33-ODOT Prestressed Design FINAL

AASHTO LRFD Bridge
B id Design
D i
Specifications
Prestressed Concrete
RICHARD A. MILLER, PhD, PE, FPCI

PROFESSOR
UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI
AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition
General
This module covers prestressed concrete superstructure

elements.
Segmental boxes are NOT covered.
Topics which are related to reinforced concrete only are
covered in another module.
Concrete structures are covered in Chapter 5. Chapter 5
uses a unified approach – reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete are covered in the same chapter.
Loads and load combinations related to concrete are
covered in Chapter 3.
Analysis of concrete structures is covered in Chapter 4.
July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

ODOT Short Course Do Not Duplicate Prestressed Concrete: Slide #2
1
General
LRFD equations are in KSI units!

Example Modulus of Rupture:
f r = 0.24 5ksi = 0.530ksi LRFD

f r = 7.5 5000 psi = 530 psi STD.SPEC.
In most cases, the equations are simply the old Standard

Specifications equations converted to ksi units.
7.5 5000 psi 7.5 1000 5ksi 7.5 5ksi

= = = 0.24 5ksi
1000 psi / ksi 1000 1000

§ 5.4 – Material Properties
Materials must meet AASHTO LRFD Bridge

Construction Specifications.
Unless specified otherwise, all provisions apply for
strengths up to 10 ksi (Art. 5.4.2.1).
Some provisions allow up to 15 ksi.
There is an effort to extend all provisions to 18 ksi.
If a provision does not allow higher strength, use a
maximum of 10 ksi in the calculations.

Decks must have a minimum strength of 4 ksi.

2
A current problem with the LRFD Specifications is that some

provisions allow strengths up to 18 ksi, but many are limited to 15
ksi or the default of 10 ksi.
So what do you do if you are using a high strength concrete and a
specific provision does not allow that strength?
Use the highest strength allowed by that provision. For
example, assume a 15 ksi strength is specified but a particular
provision has not been verified for that strength. For that
particular provision, you must use a concrete strength of 10
ksi for your calculations (you may still use 15 ksi concrete in
the structure, you just cannot take advantage of the additional
strength for that particular provision). However, if other
provisions allow the use of 15 ksi concrete, you can use 15 ksi
for those provisions.

§ 5.4.2.3 – Shrinkage and Creep
For calculation of creep and shrinkage, the engineer may

use:
Articles 5.4.2.3.2 and 5.4.2.3.3
CEB-FIP Model Code
ACI 209
For prestressed concrete – the loss equations include

creep and shrinkage.
The main use of these provisions for prestressed
concrete is for calculating restraint moments for
continuous for live load bridges.
These are verified to 15 ksi. The creep equations do not
work for strengths over 15 ksi.
3
Creep Coefficient ( Art. 5.4.2.3.2) : H = Relative Humidity

ψ (t , ti ) = 1.9kvs k hc k f ktd ti−0.118 t = time from first loading to
V  time being considered
k vs = 1.45 − 0.13  ≥ 1.0
S ti = time of first loading
k hc = 1.56 − 0.008 H
V/S = volume to surface
5
kf =
1 + f ci ' fci = concrete strength at time of
prestress transfer or time of
 t 
ktd =  first load (RC).
(RC)
 61 − 4 f ci '+t  If unknown, assume = 0.8fc’.
Std. Spec did not have a creep coefficient. Previous versions of LRFD use a
different equation. It is similar to the ACI equation using ∆t0.6 /(10+ ∆t0.6).
Shrinkage ( Art. 5.4.2.3.3) : H = Relative Humidity

ε sh = −kvs k hs k f ktd (0.48 x10 −3
) t = time from end of cure to
V  time being considered
k vs = 1.45 − 0.13  ≥ 1.0
S V/S = volume to surface
k hs = 2 − 0.014 H fci = concrete strength at time of
5 prestress transfer or time of
kf =
1 + f ci ' first load (RC).
If unknown, assume = 0.8fc’.
 t 
ktd =  
 61 − 4 f ci '+t 
Std. Spec. set shrinkage = 0.002. Previous editions of LRFD used an ACI type
equation with a term of t/(35+t).
4
§ 5.4.2.6 – Modulus of Rupture
There are now 3 defined Moduli of Rupture for normal

g concrete:
weight
For Arts. 5.7.3.4 (crack control) and 5.7.3.3.2 (Ieff):
0.24 √fc’ksi (= 7.5√fc’ in psi units)
For Art. 5.7.3.3.2 (minimum reinforcement):
0.37 √fc’ksi (= 11.5√fc’ in psi units)
For Art. 5.8.3.4.3 (shear) (this is new in 2007):
0.20 √f
√ c’ksi (= 6 √f
√ c’ in psi units)
Note that the value for Article 5.8.3.4.3 (shear) ONLY

applies to the new, “simplified” method.

§ 5.4.2.4 – Modulus of Elasticity & § 5.4.2.5 – Poisson’s Ratio
E c = 33, 000K1w1.5
c f c ' (5.4.2.4-1)
µ = 0.2
02 (5 4 2 5)
(5.4.2.5)
Where:
K1 = Aggregate factor. Taken as 1.0 unless determined by
testing or as approved by a jurisdiction.

w = concrete unit weight in kcf
fc’ = concrete strength ksi
E is basically the old Standard Specifications equation converted to

ksi units and with an aggregate correction factor added.
µ is unchanged from Standard Specifications.

5
§ 3.4 - Loads and Load Factors
§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations
For prestressed girders, the following service load combinations are most
common:
Service I: Used for compression and transverse tension in prestressed
concrete.
Service III: Used for longitudinal tension in prestressed concrete
girders.
Service IV: Used for tension in prestressed columns, for crack control.
Strength I: Basic load combination.
Fatigue : Fatigue of reinforcement does NOT need to be checked for
fully prestressed components designed using Service III
(A 5.5.3.1)
(Art. 3 1)
Strength II-V and Extreme Event I and II are checked as warranted.

Service II is for steel and never applies to prestressed concrete.

Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors

DC
Use One of These at a Time
DD LL
DW IM
EH CE
EV BR TU
ES PL CR
Load Combination EL LS WA WS WL FR SH TG SE EQ IC CT CV
STRENGTH I
(unless noted) γp 1.75 1.00 -- -- 1.00 0.50/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --
STRENGTH II γp 1.35 1.00 -- -- 1.00 0.50/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --
STRENGTH III γp 1.00 1.40 -- 1.00 0.50/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --
STRENGTH IV γp 1.00 -- -- 1.00 0.50/1.20 -- -- -- -- -- --
STRENGTH V γp 1.35 1.00 0.40 1.0 1.00 0.50/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --

6
Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors (cont.)

DC Use One of These at a Time
DD LL
DW IM
EH CE
EV BR TU
ES PL CR
Load Combination EL LS WA WS WL FR SH TG SE EQ IC CT CV
EXTREME EVENT I γp γEQ 1.00 -- -- 1.00 -- -- -- 1.00 -- -- --
EXTREME EVENT II γp 0.50 1.00 -- -- 1.00 -- -- -- -- 1.00 1.00 1.00

FATIGUE – LL, IM,
& CE ONLY -- 0.75 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors (cont.)

DC
DD LL Use One of These at a
DW IM Ti
Time
EH CE
EV BR TU
Load ES PL CR
Combination EL LS WA WS WL FR SH TG SE EQ IC CT CV
SERVICE I 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.30 1.0 1.00 1.00/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --
SERVICE II 1.00 1.30 1.00 -- -- 1.00 1.00/1.20 -- -- -- -- -- --
SERVICE III 1.00 0.80 1.00 -- -- 1.00 1.00/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --

SERVICE IV 1.00 -- 1.00 0.70 -- 1.00 1.00/1.20 -- 1.0 -- -- -- --

7
Service III applies only to LONGITUDINAL TENSION in

prestressed girders. The modifier to (LL+IM)
(LL IM) is 0.8. The
modifier is < 1 because it was found that the tensile
capacity of prestressed girders is underestimated. This is
largely because the loss of prestressing force is usually
overestimated and a lower bound is used for the tensile
strength (modulus of rupture).

AASHTO-LRFD
AASHTO LRFD
Distribution Factors for Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Elements
8
Distribution Factors for Precast/Prestressed Concrete Elements
§ 4.6.2.2.2 Distribution Factor Method for Moment and Shear
The simplified distribution factors may be used if:

Width of the slab is constant
Number of beams, Nb > 4
Beams are parallel and of similar stiffness
Roadway overhang de < 3 ft
Central angle < Article 4.6.1.2
Cross section conforms to AASHTO Table 4.6.2.2.1-1
Note: Multiple presence factors are NOT used with simplified distribution factors.
This is part of
Table 4.6.2.2.1-1
showing common
precast/
prestressed
concrete bridge
types.
The letter below
the diagram
correlates to a set
of distribution
factors.

9
Beam and Slab Bridges would be a Type “k” bridge.
Moment distribution factors - LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1:

Two
T or more lanes
l l d d
loaded:
DFM = 0.075+(S/9.5)0.6 (S/L)0.2 (Kg/12.0Lts3)0.1
One lane loaded:
DFM= 0.06+( S/14 )0.4 ( S/L )0.3 (Kg/12.0Lts3)0.1

S = girder spacing (ft) 3.5 < S < 16.0

L = span length (ft) 20 < L < 240
ts = slab thickness (in) 4 5 < ts < 12.0
4.5 12 0
Nb = Number of Beams Nb > 4
Kg = n(Ig + Ageg2) (in4) 10,000 < Kg < 7,000,000
n = Ec,beam/Ec,slab
Ig = gross moment of inertia, non composite girder (in4)
Ag = gross area, non composite girder (in2)
eg = distance between centers of gravity of the non composite beam
andd slab.
l b (i (in))
If Nb = 3, use the lesser of the equations above with Nb = 3

and the lever rule.

10
Beam and Slab Type “k” bridge
Shear Distribution Factors - LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3a-1:

Two or more lanes loaded:
DFV = 0.2 + ( S/12 ) - ( S/35 )2
One lane loaded:

DFV = 0.36 + ( S/25 )
3.5 < S < 16.0 ft.

20 < L < 240 ft.
ft
4.5 < ts < 12.0 in.
Nb > 4
If Nb = 3; use the lever rule.

11
Beam and Slab Bridge Type “k” – Exterior – Moment

g ext = eg int
de
e = 0.77 +
9.1
One lane loaded – use the Lever Rule
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1
g = DFM
de = distance from edge of the traffic railing to the exterior web of the
exterior beam. The term de is positive when the railing is outboard
(shown) and negative when the railing is inboard. -1.0 < de < 5.5 ft.

Beam and Slab Bridge Type “k” – Exterior – Shear

g ext = eg int
de
e = 0.6 +
10
One lane loaded – use the Lever Rule
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1
g = DFV
-1.0 < de < 5.5 ft.

12
Beam and Slab Bridge – Type “k” Longitudinal Beams

on Skewed Supports
Any number of lanes loaded; multiply DFM by:
(LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2c-1)
1 − c1 (tan θ )
1.5
0.25 0.5
 K  S
c1 = 0.25   
 12 Lt s  L
θ = Angle of skew; 30o < θ < 60o;
if θ<30o, c1 = 0; if θ>60o then θ=60o
L = Span, 20 < L < 240 ft
S = Beam Spacing, 3.5 < S < 16 ft
Nb > 4

Beam and Slab Bridge – Type “k” Longitudinal Beams

on Skewed Supports
Correlation Factor for Load Distribution Factor for Support Shear at
Obtuse Corner - (LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1)
0.3
 12 Lt s3 
1.0 + 0.20  tan θ
 K 
 g 
θ = Angle of skew; 0o < θ < 60o;
L = Span, 20 < L < 240 ft
S = Beam Spacing, 3.5 < S < 16 ft
Nb > 4

13
Lever Rule: Assume a hinge develops over each interior girder and solve for the
reaction in the exterior girder as a fraction of the truck load.
This is for one lane loaded. Multiple

Presence Factors apply 1.2 is the MPF
1.5’
∑M H → 1.2 Pe − RS = 0
36k 36k
1.2 Pe 1.2e
R= ∴ DF =
S S
In the diagram,
diagram P/2 are the wheel loads; P
is the resultant force. All three loads are
NOT applied at the same time.
8 ft Note that truck cannot be closer than 2’
from the barrier (3.6.1.3)
ODOT Short Course Do Not Duplicate Loads & Analysis: Slide #27
Minimum Exterior DFM: (Rigid Body Rotation of Bridge Section)
NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
DFExt ,Min = + Nb (C4.6.2.2.2d-1)
Nb
∑x 2
NL - Number of loaded lanes under consideration

Nb - Number of beams or girders
e - Eccentricity
E t i it off design
d i ttruck
k or lload
d ffrom CG off pattern
tt off
girders (ft.)
x - Distance from CG of pattern of girders to each girder (ft.)
XExt - Distance from CG of pattern of girders to exterior girder (ft.)

14
Adjacent Box Girders

Adjacent box girders with shear keys and a cast
cast-in-place
in place
overlay are Type “f” sections.
Adjacent box girders with shear keys, but no cast-in-

place deck, are Type “g” sections. Type “g” sections
may or may not be laterally post-tensioned.
Lack of lateral post-tensioning causes a reduction of the
distribution factor.

Interior Box Girders

The following
g distribution factors may y be used for a Type
yp
“f” (composite deck) or a Type “g” (non-composite)
bridge IF the girders are “sufficiently connected together”
– meaning they achieve transverse flexural continuity.
This can be done with lateral post-tensioning of at least
250 psi (Commentary 4.6.2.2.1; paragraph 12).
The Commentary further states that bridges without a
structural
t t l overlayl and d which
hi h use untensioned
t i d ttransverse
rods should NOT be considered as sufficient to achieve
transverse flexural continuity, unless demonstrated by
testing or experience (Commentary 4.6.2.2.1, paragraph
14).
15

Type “f”
f (composite deck) or “g”g with lateral PT -
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1
Moment:
Two lanes loaded
DFM = k ( b/305 )0.6 ( b/12.0L )0.2 ( I/J )0.06
One lane loaded
DFM = k(b/33.3L)0.5(I/J)0.25


k = 2.5
2 5 ( Nb )-0.2
) 0 2 > 1.5
15
Nb = number of beams 5 < Nb < 20
b = width of beam, in 35< b < 60 in
L = span of beam, ft 20< L < 120 ft
I = moment of inertia of beam, in4
J = St. Venant torsional constant, in4
For preliminary design, ( I/J )0.06 = 1.0

16

Distribution Factors for Shear - LRFD Table 4.6.2.2..3a-1
Two Lanes Loaded: These are used for
DFV = (b/156)0.4 (b/12L)0.1 (I/J)0.05(b/48) both composite and
non-composite;
One Lane Loaded: even if the girders
DFV = (b/130L)0.15 (I/J)0.05 are NOT sufficiently
connected.
5 < Nb < 20
35< b < 60 in
20< L < 120 ft
25,000 < J < 610,000 in4
40,000 < I < 610,000 in4
Type “g” box with NO lateral PT
DFV (distribution factor for shear) does not change. It is the same
for Type “g” structures with and without lateral PT.
DFM is different. For Type “g” structures without lateral PT, the old
Standard Specifications equations are used.
NOTE: The Standard Specifications equations were based on wheel loads and
the LRFD equations are based on axle loads; so the equations changed by a
factor of 2.

17
Distribution Factor for Moment - LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1
DFM = S/D
S = width of precast beam (ft)
D = (11.5 - NL)+1.4NL(1-0.2C)2 when C < 5

D = (11.5 - NL) when C > 5
Where:
NL = number of traffic lanes
C = K(W/L) < K

For Preliminary Design

Beam Type K
N
Nonvoided
id d rectangular
t l b beams 07
0.7
Rectangular beams with circular voids: 0.8
Box section beams 1.0
C = K(W/L) < K Channel beams 2.2
Where: T-beam 2.0
(1 + µ ) I Double T-beam 2.0
K=
J
W = overall width of bridge measured perpendicular to the
longitudinal beam (ft)
L = span (ft)
µ = Poisson’s ratio = 0.2 for concrete (5.4.2.5)
18
4 A2
J ≈
S
∑t
Where:
A = Area enclosed by the centerline of the webs and flanges.

S = length
l h off a web
b or flflange centerline.
li
t = thickness of the corresponding web or flange.

The bending moment for exterior beams is determined by

multiplying the distribution factor for interior beams by a
factor, e, which accounts for the distribution of load to the
exterior girder. Note that this applies to type “g” even if
there is no lateral post-tensioning. Lack of lateral post-
tensioning is accounted for in the DVM.
Minimum exterior distribution factor based on rigid body

rotation does not apply to adjacent box girders.

19
Exterior Box Girders

Multiplier for Moment – Types “f”
f and “g”
g - LRFD Table 4
4.6.2.2.2d
6 2 2 2d-1
1

gext= eginterior
Where:
e = 1.04 + ( de / 25 ) > 1
de=distance from edge of the traffic railing to the exterior web of

the exterior beam. The term de is positive when the railing is
outboard (shown) and negative when the railing is inboard.
de < 2.0 UNIT IS FEET!
g= DFM

Exterior Box Girder

Multiplier for Moment – Types “f”
f and “g”
g - LRFD Table 4
4.6.2.2.2d
6 2 2 2d-1
1
One lane loaded:

gext= eginterior
e = 1.125 + ( de / 30 ) > 1 e accounts for the

de < 2.0 ft. distribution of load to
the exterior girder

20
Exterior Box Girders

Multiplier for Shear – Types “f”
f and “g”
g - LRFD Table 4
4.6.2.2.3b
6 2 2 3b-1
1
 48 
g ext = eg int  
 b 
 48 
  ≤1
 b 
0.5
 b  de < 2.0
20
 d e + − 2.0  35 < b < 60 in
e = 1+  12  ≥ 1.0

 40  g = DFV
 
 

Multiplier for Shear – Types “f” and “g” - LRFD Table

4.6.2.2.3b 1
4.6.2.2.3b-1
One lane loaded:
gext = eginterior
e = 1.125 + ( de / 20 ) > 1
de < 2.0 ft.

21
Skewed Box Girders

Multiplier for Moment - LRFD Table 4
4.6.2.2.2c-1
6 2 2 2c 1
1.05 - 0.25 ( tan θ) < 1.0
θ = skew angle
If θ > 600 use θ = 600
This is optional.

When the skew angle of a bridge is small, say, less than 20o, it is
often considered safe to ignore the angle of skew and to analyze the
bridge as a zero-skew bridge whose span is equal to the skew span.
This approach is generally conservative for moments in the beams,
and slightly unsafe (<5%) for slab-on-girder decks for longitudinal
shears.
The LRFD Specifications Table 4.6.2.2.e-1 lists reduction multipliers
for moments in longitudinal beams.
The previous slide illustrates the multiplier for spread box beams,
adjacent box beams with concrete overlays or transverse post-
tensioning and double tees in multi-beam decks or Types (b), (c), (f)
and (g).

22
Correlation Factor for Load Distribution Factor for Support

Shear at Obtuse Corner – Types
yp “f” and “g”g - ((LRFD Table
4.6.2.2.3c-1) – This is mandatory.
12.0 L
1 .0 + tan θ
90d
0o< θ < 60o
20 < L < 240 ft
ft.
17 < d < 60 in d is depth of the girder
35 < b < 60 in b is width of the flange
5 < Nb < 20

AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Flexure and Axial Loads
23
Definitions of various “d” terms for

AASHTO LRFD now uses the same terminology as ACI

318-05.
This is a unified method for prestressed and reinforced
concrete members.
Article 5.7.2.1 defines 3 states:
Tension Controlled
Compression Controlled
Transition
In all cases, extreme fiber compressive strain = 0.003

(Article 5.7.2.1).
Values above 0.003 are allowed for confined cores.

24
§ 5.7.2 Assumptions for Strength and Extreme Event Limit States
Definition of Section Types
Extreme tensile steel strain when the extreme Type of section

concrete compressive strain = 0.003
εt > 0.005 Tension controlled
εt < f y / E s (may use = 0.002) Compression controlled
0.005 > εt > f y / Es Transition
For all prestressing or Grade 60 non-prestressed steel, εt may be

assumed = 0.002 in place of fy/Es for compression controlled.
The ACI 318 code, upon which this provision is based, requires flexural
members (that is, members with a superimposed axial load of < 0.1fc’Ag) to
have εs > 0.004. AASHTO does not impose this requirement.
Definition of strain conditions for determining tension or compression

control. Note that tensile strain in the steel closest to the tensile
face is used.
used
Balanced condition is when εt = εy. For Grade 60 steel and all
prestressing steel, εy may be taken as 0.002.
Note that for prestressing steel, εt is the tensile strain which occurs
in the steel after the pre-compression in the concrete is lost.
25
For a prestressed beam, it is

important to understand the
definition of εt.
Begin by considering the strain

dt
condition of the beam at the
point where the only loads are
the prestressing force and the
beam self weight.
In this condition, the top of the beam is usually in tension (due to the
prestressing). There is a net tensile strain in the prestressing steel of
εp1. This is the initial pull minus any strain lost due to prestress losses.
At the level of the steel, there is a compressive strain the concrete, εc.
As load is applied, the strain

profile changes, the bottom
d
decompresses andd eventually
t ll
reaches a point where the
CONCRETE strain at the level
of the steel is 0. This is called
dt “decompression”.
If there were no losses (except

for elastic shortening), the strain
in the steel,
steel εp2 at this point
would be the initial pull. The
actual strain in the steel, with
losses, can be calculated by
mechanics.

26
This is the condition at Mn. The

compressive strain in the concrete
is 0.003.
0 003 The total strain in the
prestressing steel is the sum of the
strain in the steel at
decompression, εp2, and the strain
dt developed between
decompression and the ultimate
state, εt.
The specifications only regulate the

strain developed between
decompression and the ultimate
state, εt. The additional strain in
the prestressing steel, εp2 is not
part of the specification.
§ 5.5.4.2 Resistance Factors
Φ = 0.9 tension controlled reinforced concrete members

1 0 tension controlled prestressed concrete members
1.0
0.75 compression controlled members with spirals or
ties (except for members in Seismic Zones 3 & 4)
0.90 shear and torsion
0.70 shear and torsion lightweight concrete
For transition members, use a linear interpolation of the Φ

factor based on the extreme tensile steel strain.

27
1.05
Prestressed
1 Prestressed:
0.95 Strain = 0
0.004
004
Phi = 0.92 Reinforced
0.9
Phi Factor
0.85
0.8
0.75
0.7
0.65 Compression Tension

Controlled Transition Controlled
0.6
0 0 001
0.001 0 002
0.002 0 003
0.003 0 004
0.004 0 005
0.005 0 006
0.006 0 007
0.007
Extreme Steel Strain
 dt 
Prestressed Members 0.75 ≤ φ = 0.583 + .25  − 1 ≤ 1.0 (5.5.4.2.1-1)
 c 
 dt 
Reinforced Members 0.75 ≤ φ = 0.65 + .15  − 1 ≤ 1.0 (5.5.4.2.1-2)
c 
Effect of New Resistance Factors

It is allowable to design flexural members with extreme
fiber steel strains < 0.005. This is done by increasing the
area of steel. However, in general, the Φ factor is
reduced at a slightly lower rate than moment resistance
is gained. There is a slight increase in Mn but it is
minimal.
Thus there is little effect on the allowable moment by
Thus,
increasing the amount of steel above that required to
bring the extreme fiber steel strains to 0.005.

28
For tension controlled partially prestressed members:

φ = 0.90
0 90 + 0.10PPR
0 10PPR (5 5 4 2 1 3)
(5.5.4.2.1-3)
A ps f py
PPR = (5.5.4.2.1-4)
A ps f py + A s f y
PPR = Partial prestressing ratio

Aps = Area of prestressing steel
fpy = Yield strength of the prestressing steel
As = Area of mild steel
fy = Yield strength of the mild steel
The stress block remains the same as Standard

Specifications.
Analysis of reinforced concrete RECTANGULAR beams
is the same as Standard Specifications.
HOWEVER, there are some differences with prestressed
concrete.
29
AASHTO-LRFD
AASHTO LRFD
Prestressed Beams with Bonded Tendons
§ 5.7.3 Flexural Members
The value of fps can be found from (if fpe > 0.5fpu):
 c   f py 
f ps = f pu 1 − k  (5.7.3.1.1-1)
5 7 3 1 1 1) k = 2  1.04
1 04 −  (5.7.3.1.1-2)
(5 7 3 1 1 2)
 d p   f pu
  
Then:
0.85f c ' b a = A ps f ps
a = β1c
 c 
0.85f c ' b β1c = A ps f pu 1 − k 
 d p 

A ps f pu
c=
f
0.85f c ' β1 b + kA ps pu
dp
Stress in the steel, fps, can also be found from strain compatibility analysis.

30
Aps f pu
c=
f pu
0.85 f c ' β1 b + kAps
dp
c = depth of neutral axis
b = width of compression block
Aps= area of TENSILE prestressing steel
dp = depth to centroid of tensile prestressing steel
fpu = tensile strength of prestressing steel
fpy = yield strength of prestressing steel
β1 = stress block factor – same as Std. Spec.

If there is mild (nonprestressed) tensile steel, As and mild

compression
p steel As’ both with a yyield stress of fy , the
equation for c becomes:
 c 
.85 f c ' b β1c + As ' f y ' = As f y + Aps f pu 1 − k 
 dp
 
A f + As f y − As ' f y '
c = ps pu
f pu (5.7.3.1.1-4)
0.85 f c ' β1 b + kAps
dp
The engineer must do an analysis to see if the compression steel yields. If the
compression steel does not yield, the actual stress is substituted for fy’ into
equation 5.7.3.1.1-4.
31
Sometimes, things change for the better!!!!

Std. Spec In Editions 1-3 of the
And LRFD Specifications, the
LRFD 2005 β factor was applied to
Interim the flange as well as to
the web. This made no
sense. It was changed
Editions 1 with the 2005 Interim
th
throughh 3 off back to the old definition
definition.
LRFD Now it is the same
definition as ACI 318 and
Std. Spec.

The T beam equation returns to normal:

 a  a
M n = Aps f ps  d p −  + As f y  d s −  − (5.7.3.1.1-1)
 2  2
 a  a hf 
As ' f y '  d s '−  + 0.85 f c ' ( b − bw ) h f  − 
 2 2 2 
Again the engineer must do an analysis to see if the compression steel

yields. If the compression steel does not yield, the actual stress is
substituted for fy’ into equation 5.7.3.1.1-1.

32
The LRFD Specifications give only this equation:

 a  a  a a h 
M n = A psf ps  d p −  + A sf y  d s −  − A 's f 's  d 's −  + 0.85f 'c ( b − b w ) h f  − f 
 2   2   2  2 2 
If the section is NOT a “T” beam, b = bw and:
 a  a  a
M n = A psf ps  d p −  + Asf y  d s −  − A 's f 's  d 's − 
 2   2   2 
If there is no compression steel:
 a  a
M n = A psf ps  d p −  + Asf y  d s − 
 2  2
If there is no non-prestressed tensile steel:
 a
M n = A psf ps  d p − 
 2
For prestressed T- Beams:
Aps f pu + As f y − As ' f y '− 0.85 f c ' ( b − bw ) h f

c= (5.7.3.1.1-3)
f
0.85 f c ' β1 bw + kAps pu
dp
bw = web width
b = flange width
hf = flange thickness

33
AASHTO-LRFD
AASHTO LRFD
Prestressed Beams with Unbonded Tendons
AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition.
The stress in the prestressing steel can be found from:

 dp −c 
f ps = f pe + 900  < f py (5.7.3.1.2-1)
 le 
 2l i 
l e =   (5.7.3.1.2-2)
 2 + Ns 
l e = effective tendon length
i = length of tendon between anchorages
l
Ns = Number of support hinges crossed by the tendon between

anchorages or discretely bonded points.
fpe= Effective stress in the steel after losses.

34
For rectangular beams:
Aps f ps + As f y − As ' f y '

c= (5.7.3.1.2-4)
0.85 f c ' β1 b
For T-beams:
Aps f ps + As f y − As ' f y '− 0.85 f c ' ( b − bw ) h f
c=
0.85 f c ' β1 bw (5.7.3.1.2-3)

For unbonded tendons, the equations for “c” require the

value of fps, but the equation for fps requires the value of
“c”.
The two equations can be solved simultaneously in a
closed form, but most people will not do this.
Thus, finding fps becomes an iterative procedure.
The Commentary (C5.7.3.1.2) gives an equation for a
first estimate of fps (in ksi):
f ps = f pe + 15 (C5.7.3.1.2-1)

35
AASHTO-LRFD
AASHTO LRFD
Components with Both Bonded and
Unbonded Tendons
Components with Both Bonded and Unbonded Tendons
Article 5.7.3.1.3 allows two methods:
Article 5.7.3.1.3a “Detailed Analysis”

In this method, a detailed, strain compatibility is used.
Article 5.7.3.1.3b “Simplified Analysis”

Shown on the following slide
Apsb = area of bonded tendons
Apsu = area off unbonded

b d d ttendons
d

36
Components with Both Bonded and Unbonded Tendons
Simplified Analysis - The stress in the UNBONDED tendons may be

conservatively taken as the effective stress after losses: fppe.
For T-beams:
Apsb f pu + Apsu f pe + As f y − As ' f y '−0.85 f c ' (b − bw )h f
c=
f
0.85 f c ' β1 bw + kAps pu
dp
For rectangular beams:
Apsb f pu + Apsu f pe
c=
f
0.85 f c ' β1 b + kAps pu
dp
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Moment Capacity
37
Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.2 Flexural Resistance
For T-beams (where a>hf):

 a  a
Mn = Aps f psdp −  + As f y ds − 
 2  2 (5.7.3.2.2-1)
 a  a hf 
− As ' f y 'ds '−  +0.85fc ' (b −bw)hf  − 
 2 2 2 
For rectangular beams, b=bw; thus equation 5.7.3.2.2-1

becomes:
 a  a  a
M n = Aps f ps  d p −  + As f y  d s −  − As ' f y '  d s '− 
 2  2  2

Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.2 Flexural Resistance
In the preceding equations:
dp = distance from the extreme compression fiber to the

prestressing steel.
ds = distance from the extreme compression fiber to the
non-prestressed tensile steel.
ds’ = distance from the extreme compression fiber to the
non prestressed compression steel
non-prestressed steel.
fy = yield strength of the non-prestressed tensile steel.
fy’ = yield strength of the non-prestressed compression
steel.
38
Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.3 Limits for Reinforcement
Minimum reinforcement (Article 5.7.3.3.2):
It is the smaller of:
φMn > 1.2 Mcr – same as in Std. Spec.

φMn > 1.33Mu – LRFD added

Moment Capacity
For the minimum reinforcement requirement, the cracking moment Mcr

is found from:
S 
M cr = Sc ( f r + f cpe ) − M dnc  c − 1 ≥ Sc f r (5.7.3.3.2-1)
 Snc 
Sc = composite section modulus
fr = modulus of rupture = 0.37√fc’ (ksi units)
fcpe = compressive stress in the concrete due to effective
prestressing force, at the extreme tensile fiber for applied
loads.
Mdnc = Unfactored dead load moment on the non-composite or
monolithic section.
Snc = Non-composite section modulus.

39
Moment Capacity
Maximum reinforcement provision was dropped with 2005

Interim
No longer needed with new definitions of tension controlled,
compression controlled and transition.
LRFD previously used a c/d ratio. This can still be used:
c 3 Tension Controlled
≤ εt > 0.005
dt 8
c 3
≥ Compression Controlled
dt 5 εt <0.002
3 c 3
> > Transition
5 dt 8
Moment Capacity
Maximum reinforcement is now controlled by εt.
To determine εt , calculate c. Then, using similar triangles:

 dt − c 
ε t = 0.003 
 c 

40
Moment Capacity
Maximum Reinforcement
This is more restrictive that Std. Specification
p or p
previous editions of
LRFD.
For reinforced sections, 0.75ρbal was used. This was a strain of 0.0037
in the steel.
For prestressed, Std. Spec. c/de ratio was limited to 0.42. This
corresponded to a strain of 0.0041
c Tension Controlled
≤ 0.375 ε > 0.005
dt t
c Previous Editions
≤ 0.42
de εt >0.0041
c
≤ 0.45 Std. Specifications, RC.
de
Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.4 Control of Cracking by Distribution of Reinforcement
700γ e
s≤ − 2d c (5.7.3.4-1)
βs fs
dc
βs = 1+
0.7(h − d c )
s = spacing of reinforcement closest to the tension face.
γe = exposure factor; 1 for Class 1 and 0.75 for Class 2
ODOT uses 0.75 for decks, 1 for everything else
dc = cover to extreme tension fiber
fs = Steel stress @ service limit state
h = overall thickness or depth
Does not apply to slabs designed using the empirical method

(ODOT does not allow empirical design).
It applies to all other concrete components where the service tensile stress
exceeds 0.8fr = 0.8(0.24)√fc’ = 0.20√fc’
41
Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.5 Moment Redistribution
ODOT does not permit moment redistribution

Moment Capacity
§ 5.7.3.6.2 Deflection and Camber
Prestressed members are usually designed as

uncracked at service loads. Instantaneous deflections
and cambers are then calculated using the gross
moment of inertia, Ig.
If the deflection is calculated using Ig, long term

deflection can be found by multiplying the instantaneous
deflection by 4.
For prestressed members, the Commentary (C5.7.3.6.1)

allows the multipliers given in the PCI Design Handbook
to be used for long term camber/deflection values.

42
Prestressing and Partial Prestressing
§ 5.9.3 Stress Limitations for Prestressing Tendons
Table 5.9.3-1 Stress Limits for Prestressing Tendons

fpy = yield stress of prestressing steel Tendon Type
fpu = ultimate strength of prestressing steel Stress-Relieved Low Deformed
Strand and Relaxation High-Strength
Plain High- Strand Bars
Condition Strength Bars
Pretensioning
Immediately prior to transfer (fpbt) 0.70 fpu 0.75 fpu __
At service limit state after all losses (fpe) 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy
Post-Tensioning
Prior to seating – short
short-term
term fpbt
bt may be allowed 0 90 fpy
0.90 0 90 fpy
0.90 0 90 fpy
0.90
At anchorages and couplers immediately after anchor 0.70 fpu 0.70 fpu 0.70 fpu
set
Elsewhere along length of member away from 0.70 fpu 0.74 fpu 0.70 fpu
anchorages and couplers immediately after anchor set
At service limit state after losses (fpe) 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy

§ 5.9.4 Stress Limits for Concrete
Table 5.9.4.2-1 Temporary Tensile Stress Limits in Prestressed Concrete Before Losses, Fully
Prestressed Components. (Partial)
Bridge Type Location Stress Limit

Other than •In precompressed tensile zone without N/A
Segmentally bonded reinforcement
Constructed •In areas other than the precompressed tensile 0.0948√f’ci <0.2(ksi)
Bridges zone and without bonded reinforcement
•In areas with bonded reinforcement
(reinforcing bars or prestressing steel) 0.24√f’ci (ksi)
sufficient to resist the tensile force in the
concrete computed assuming an uncracked
section, where reinforcement is proportioned
using a stress of 0.5 fy, not to exceed 30 ksi.
•For handling stresses in prestressed piles 0.158√f’ci (ksi)
Compression Limit at Transfer 0.6 f’ci (ksi)

43
Debonding and Harping
If the tensile stresses at the end of girder are above

0.24√fci’ , then the stress must be reduced either by
debonding the strand or harping the strand.
If debonding is used, no more than 25% of the total
number of strands may be debonded and not more than
40% in any single row may be debonded. (Art. 5.11.4.3)

Table 5.9.4.2.1-1 Compressive Stress Limits in prestressed Concrete at Service Limit State After
Losses, Fully Prestressed Components.
Location Stress Limit
• In other than segmentally constructed bridges due to the 0.45f’c (ksi)
sum of effective prestress and permanent loads
• In segmentally constructed bridges due to the sum of 0.45f’c (ksi)
effective prestress and permanent loads
• In other than segmentally constructed bridges due to live 0.40f’c (ksi)
load and one-half the sum of effective prestress and
permanent loads
• Due to the sum of effective prestress
prestress, permanent loads
loads, 0 60φwf’c (ksi)
0.60φ
and transient loads and during shipping and handling

44
Table 5.9.4.2.2-1 Tensile Stress Limits in Prestressed Concrete at Service Limit State After Losses,
Fully Prestressed Components. (Partial)
B id T
Bridge Type L
Location
ti St
Stress Li
Limit
it
Other than Tension in the Precompressed Tensile Zone
Segmentally Bridges, Assuming Uncracked Sections
Constructed • For components with bonded prestressing 0.19√f’c (ksi)
Bridges tendons or reinforcement that are subjected to
not worse than moderate corrosion conditions
• For components with bonded prestressing 0.0948√f’c (ksi)
tendons or reinforcement that are subjected to
severe corrosive conditions
• For
F components t with
ith unbonded
b d d prestressing
t i N T
No Tension
i
tendons
Again, these are Std. Spec. limits in ksi units.

0.19(1000)0.5 = 6
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Loss of Prestressing Force
45
§ 5.9 – Prestressing and Partial Prestressing
§ 5.9.5 Loss of Prestress
Loss of prestressing force was changed with the 3rd

Edition.
Like creep and shrinkage, the changes are based on the
results NCHRP Report 496 “Prestressed Losses in
Pretensioned High Strength Concrete Bridge Girders”
These provisions are applicable up to 15 ksi concrete

The basic equations:

Pretensioned Members:
∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5.9.5.1-1)
Post-tensioned Members:
∆f pT = ∆f pF + ∆f pA + ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5 9 5 1-2)

(5.9.5.1-2)

46
∆fpT = Total loss of prestressing force (ksi).

∆fpF = Loss due to friction (ksi)
(ksi).
∆fpA = Loss due to anchorage set (ksi).
∆fpES = Loss due to elastic shortening (ksi).
∆fpLT = Loss due to long term shrinkage and creep of the
concrete and relaxation of the steel (ksi).
∆fpA is usually given by the manufacturer.

Friction losses:
Loss due to friction between an internal tendon and a

duct wall:
(
∆ f pF = f pj 1 − e − ( kx + µα )
) (5.9.5.2.2b-1)
Loss due to friction between an external tendon and a

single deviator pipe:
(
∆ f pF = f pj 1 − e − µ (α + 0.04 ) ) (5.9.5.2.2b-2)

47
fpj =
initial jacking stress in the tendon (ksi).
x = length of tendon from the jacking point to the point
being considered (ft).

K = wobble friction coefficient (per ft. of tendon)
µ = friction coefficient.
α = sum of the absolute value of angular change of
prestressing steel path from jacking end (or nearest

jacking end if jacked from both ends) to point under
consideration. (radian)

Table 5.9.5.2.2b-1 Friction Coefficients for Post-Tensioning Tendons.

Steel Duct K µ
Wire or Rigid or Semi rigid galvanized 0.0002 0.15-0.25

Strand metal sheathing
Polyethylene 0.0002 .23
Rigid steel deviator bar for 0.0002 .25

external tendons
HS Bar Galvanized metal sheathing 0.0002 .30
Values for K and µ should be found from experimental data. If such

data is absent, values from the table above may be used.

48
Elastic Shortening, pretensioned members:
Ep
∆f pES = f cgp (5.9.5.2.3a-1)
Ect
Ect = modulus of elasticity of the concrete at transfer or at time of
load
Elastic Shortening, Post-tensioned Members:
N −1 Ep
∆f pES = f cgp (5.9.5.2.3b-1)
2N E ci

fcgp = concrete stresses at the center of gravity of the prestressing

tendons due to prestressing force immediately after transfer
(pretensioning) or immediately after jacking (post-tensioning)
and the self-weight of the member at the sections of maximum
moment (ksi).
In pretensioned members, at transfer, fcgp may be calculated by
assuming the stress in the prestressing tendon after release = 0.9fpi;
where fpi is the initial prestressing stress (jacking stress) in the
tendons.
Ep = Elastic Modulus off the prestressing strand (ksi).
( )
Eci = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at the time of transfer or time of
load application (ksi).
N = number of identical strands.

49
Long Term Losses

For standard,
standard precast,
precast pretensioned members subject to
normal loading and environmental conditions:
f pi Aps
∆ f pLT = 10 γ hγ st + 12γ hγ st + ∆ f pR (5.9.5.3-1)
Ag
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01H ((5.9.5.3-2))
5
γ st = (5.9.5.3-3)
1 + f ci

fpi = prestressing steel stress immediately PRIOR to

transfer.
transfer
H = Average annual relative humidity in percent
(e.g.70 not 0.7)
∆fpR = 2.5 ksi for LoLax
10 ksi for stress relieved
γh = humidity factor
γst = strength factor

50
To use the ∆fpLT equation, the following criteria must be

met:
Members are pretensioned
Normal weight concrete is used
Members are moist or steam cured
Prestressing is by bar or strand with normal and low

relaxation properties
Average exposure conditions and temperatures.

This table can be used to estimate time dependent losses in

prestressed members which do not have composite slabs and are
stressed after attaining a compressive strength of at least 3.5 ksi.
Table 5.9.5.3-1 Time-Dependent Losses in ksi.
Type of Beam Level For wires and Strands with For Bars with fpu = 145
Section fpu = 235,250 or 270 ksi or 160 ksi
Rectangular Upper Bound 29.0 + 4.0PPR 19.0 + 6.0 PPR
Average
Box Girder Upper Bound 21.0 + 4.0PPR 15.0
Average 19.9 + 4.0PPR
Single T, Double Upper Bound  f ' −6.0 
39.0 1.0 − 0.15 c + 6.0 PPR f ' −6 .0 
T, Hollow core  6.0  
31.0 1.0 − 0.15 c + 6.0 PPR
 6.0 
and Voided Slab
Average  f ' −6.0 
33.0 1.0 − 0.15 c + 6.0 PPR
 6.0 
PPR is the partial prestressing ratio.

51
Lump Sum Losses:

For lightweight concrete,
concrete the stresses in the table are
increased 5 ksi.
For low relaxation strand, the values in the table are
reduced by:
4 ksi for box girders
6 ksi for rectangular beams and solid slabs
8 ksi for single T’s, double T’s, hollow core and voided
slabs.

For post-tensioned members, the “Refined Method” for

estimation of time dependent losses must be used.
However, this method is based on NCHRP 496, but
requires a large amount of calculation.
Since longitudinal post-tensioning is not common in

Ohio, the method is not presented here. However, it can
be found in Article 5
5.9.5.4
9 5 4 of the LRFD Specifications
Specifications.

52
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Bond/Development Length
§ 5.11 – Bond and Development Length
§ 5.11.4.1 – Transfer Length
For ffully
F ll bbonded
d d strands,
t d th the ttransfer
f llength
th ffrom
the end of the girder is assumed to be 60db,
where db is the bar or strand diameter.

53
§ 5.11.4.2 – Development Length
Development length for fully bonded strand is given by:
 2 
l d = κ  f ps − f pe  d b (5.11.4.2-1)
 3 

Where:
ld = development length
fps = steel stress at strength limit state
fpe = effective prestressing stress after all losses
db = strand diameter
κ =1.0 for pretensioned panels, piles and other
pretensioned members with a depth < 24 inches.
= 1.6
1 6 ffor pretensioned
t i d members
b with
ith a d
depth
th > 24 iinches
h
= 2.0 for debonded strand

54
In previous editions of the LRFD Specifications, bond

stress was assumed linear – e.g, if the bonded length was
only ½ the development length, it was assumed that the
strand could only develop 0.5fps.
This assumption is still true for TRANSFER LENGTH; e.g

at ½ the transfer length it is assumed only 0.5fpe is
developed.
However, stress in the steel beyond the transfer length, but

less than the development length, can now be calculated
by a bilinear formula.
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe )
(5.11.4.2-4)
Where:
fpx = stress at “x” from the end of the girder
fpe = effective stress in the steel after all losses
fps = stress in the steel at the strength limit state
lpx = length were the stress is being calculated
ld = development length
db = strand diameter
55
Within the transfer length (which is 60db):
l px f pe
f px = (5.11.4.2-3)
60db


56
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Shear
§ 5.8 - Shear and Torsion
§ 5.6 Design Considerations
Important things about the shear section

This section has the provisions of the LRFD
Specifications, through the 2007 changes.
This section concentrates the provisions as they apply to
prestressed concrete; both pretensioned and post-
tensioned.
Segmental box girder bridges and spliced girders are
NOT covered
covered.
Reinforced concrete is covered in another section.

1
§ 5.6.3 Strut-and-Tie Model
Strut and Tie Model

Strut and tie can be used for analysis of anchorage
zones and support regions.
It is also useful for deep footings, pile caps and sections
where the depth is more than ½ the span.
This model is covered in Article 5.6.3.
Strut and tie will not be discussed as part of this module.

It will be covered in another presentation.

§ 5.8.2 General Requirements
Vr = φVn (5.8.2.1-2)
Vu ≤ Vr
Vn = nominal shear resistance given in Article 5.8.3.3
(kip)
φ = 0.9 normal weight concrete
φ =0 0.7
7 lightweight concrete
Vu = Factored shear at the cross section being
considered. If there is significant torsion present,
this term is modified for torsion.
2
§ 5.8.3.3 Nominal Shear Resistance
The nominal shear resistance, Vn, can be assumed to be

the sum of three forces, the forces in the stirrups, the
vertical component of the force in the concrete and the
vertical component of any harped or draped prestressing
strand. This leads to the basic equation:
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp (5.8.3.3-1)

Assumptions about Shear Strength:

The beam fails when the concrete in the struts reaches
its crushing strength.
At failure, the beam has shear cracks and the cracks
have opened
This would cause the stirrups to yield.
The compressive strength of concrete between the

shear cracks (struts)
( ) is not fc’. As will be shown, it
may be greater than or less than fc’.

3
Assume that the angle

of the strut is θ and the
distance between the
compressive and
tensile forces is jd
where d is effective
depth and j<1. Thus
the horizontal distance
is jd/tanθ = jdcotθ.

The stirrup contribution is:

Force per stirrup times the number of stirrups.
If the stirrups are spaced at “s”, the number of stirrups in

the length jd cotθ is (jd cotθ)/s
The force per stirrup is Avfy so:
Av f y jd cot θ Av f y d v cot θ
Vs = =
s s
(Note that if j = 1 and θ = 45o, we get the old, familiar equation: Vs = (Avfy d) / s .
Also note that jd = dv)
4
The LRFD Specifications consider the most general case

where the stirrups may be inclined at an angle of α from the
longitudinal axis. Thus, the equation becomes:
Av f y d v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α

Vs =
s
(5.8.3.3-4)
However, in almost all cases, α = 90o ; thus cotα = 0 and

sinα = 1. The equation reverts the one shown on the
previous slide.
If a line is cut
perpendicular to
the cracks, it has a
length of jdcosθ. It
may cross several
struts. The total
force in the struts
will be the
concrete stress
times the area.
Fc = fc (jd cosθ) bv
where fc is the concrete stress and bv web width.
5
The force triangle shows that

the force along the struts is
V / sinθ.
Substituting into the previous equation and assuming Vc is

the shear force carried by the concrete:
Vc = fc (jd cosθ) sinθ bv

Vc = f c ( jd cos θ ) sin θ bv
Note that if j = 1, θ = 45o

and f c = 4 f c '
Vc = 2 f c ' bv d (lbs ) = 0.0632 f c ' bv d ( kips )
This is the ACI 318 equation and the old Standard Specification
equation.
The Vc equation, in ksi units, may be used for NON-
PRESTRESSED concrete members (LRFD 5.8.3.4).

6
The basics of these equations were developed by

research done at the University of Illinois in the 1920’s.
1920 s.
They found that the actual angle varies along the beam
and that the angle can be anywhere from 25 to 65
degrees.
While it is possible to calculate the angle, it is difficult. In
the days before computers or calculators, it was nearly
impossible. Therefore, the value of 45 degrees was
chosen for simplification. The value of the crushing
strength was also chosen as a simplification.

In the 1980’s, Vecchio and Collins (University of Toronto)

proposed a method for finding the shear strength of a
beam. This method required the calculation of the actual
angle, θ, and the crushing strength of the concrete struts.
The crushing strength is a function of the strain
perpendicular to the strut.
The original theory was called “Compression Field
Theory”.. Later the theory was improved to account for
Theory
additional mechanisms, such as aggregate interlock, and
was renamed “Modified Compression Field Theory”.

7
Modified Compression Field Theory
The basis of the Modified Compression Field Theory

(MCFT) is to determine the point at which the diagonal
compressive struts fail and to determine the angle of the
struts. From the crushing strength and the angle, the
contribution of the concrete, Vc , can be found.

Why isn’t the crushing strength fc’ ? The value of fc’ is for
uniaxial load. The concrete fails by cracking parallel to the
load. If a lateral (biaxial) force is applied, it changes the
apparent compressive strength. Lateral compression holds
cracks together and increases compressive strength.
Lateral tension pulls them apart and decreases the
compressive strength.

8
Vecchio and Collins proposed that the compressive

g of the strut is a function of both the compressive
strength p
stress along the strut and the tensile stress
perpendicular to the strut. They wrote several equations
in terms of the applied average shear stress, v = V/bd,
the principal tensile strain (perpendicular to strut), ε1, and
the angle of the strut, θ.
MCFT, values of ε1 and θ are assumed

To use MCFT assumed. It then
takes 17 steps and 15 equations to recalculate ε1 and θ.
If these are not close to the assumed values, then
iterations are needed.

§ 5.8.3 Sectional Design Model
Sectional Design Model

Obviously, no one wanted to use an iterative procedure
involving 17 steps and 15 equations. As a result the
LRFD Code simplified the method to use a table. This is
called the “Sectional Design Model”.
Unfortunately, soon after the 1st Edition came out, there
was controversy with the Sectional Design Model. The
equations provided low values of shear strength. It was
found that simplifying the method created inaccuracies
inaccuracies.
Editions after the 2 Ed. still use(d) the Sectional Design
nd
Model, but have new equations and tables with more

realistic values of shear resistance.

9
The shear strength of the beam is:

Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp (5 8 3 3-1)
(5.8.3.3 1)
Vc = contribution of the concrete

Vs = contribution of the stirrups
Vp = vertical component of the force in harped strands.
Note that there is a limit:
Vn < 0.25f
0 25fc’ bv dv + Vp (5 8 3 3 2)
(5.8.3.3-2)
bv = effective web width
dv = effective depth for shear
dv = de – a/2 > greater of 0.9de or 0.72 h

According to Articles 5.8.2.5 and 5.8.2.9, the web width,

bv, must be adjusted for the presence of ducts.
bv = Effective web width, defined as the minimum web
width, parallel to the neutral axis, between the
compressive and tensile flexure resultants. For
circular sections, it is the diameter of the section.
At a particular level, one half the diameter of ungrouted
ducts and one quarter the diameter of grouted ducts is
subtracted from the web width.

10
The nominal shear resistance is the lesser of:

Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp (5.8.3.3-1)
Vn ≤ 0.25f c 'b v d v (5.8.3.3-2)
Vc and Vs are defined as:
Vc = 0.0316 β f c ' bv d v L (5.8.3.3-3)
Av f y d v (cot θ + cot α )sin α (5.8.3.3-4)
Vs =
s
dv is the shear depth = de – a/2
the greater of 0.9de or 0.72 h

s = stirrup spacing
Av = stirrup area.
The 0.0316 converts psi to ksi units.

In all of the preceding equations, the factors β and θ are

unknown and must be determined.
The LRFD Specifications require a sectional approach.
The girder is divided into sections along the length, the
factors β and θ are determined at each section.
Traditionally, the sections are every 0.1L and important
points like harp points, debond points, etc.
The first sections must be the critical section from the
face of the support.

11
§ 5.8.3.2 Sections Near Supports
Critical Section
The critical section is defined in Article 5.8.3.2.
The beam must be checked using Article 5.8.1.2 to determine if it

is a deep beam.
The critical section is taken as dv from the face of the support IF the
reaction is compressive.
The term dv has limits of the greater of 0.72h and 0.9de .
Previous editions defined critical section as the larger of dv

and 0
0.5d
5dvcotθ,
cotθ but this made the process iterative
iterative.
Otherwise it is taken at the face of the support.
At interior supports, the critical section on each side of the support

must be determined separately based on loading conditions.

§ 5.8.3.2 Sections Near Supports
In 2007, Article 5.8.3.2 introduces a limit on average shear stress, vu, at

any design section:
Vu − φ V p
vu = (5.8.2.9-1)
φ bv d v
If the value of vu > 0.18fc’, AND the flexural element is NOT integral with
the support,
support then strut and tie model (Article 5.6.3)
5 6 3) must be used for
analysis.

12
The first step in the Sectional Design Model is to

determine if the section has at least the minimum amount
of transverse steel (stirrups).
Minimum transverse reinforcing (stirrups) are needed if:
Vu > 0.5φ(Vc + Vp) (5.8.2.4-1)
However, Vc cannot be determined until β is found from

tables, but the tables used to find β are different
depending on whether there are minimum stirrups or not.
It is probably best to put minimum stirrups throughout the
entire beam to avoid excessive iterations.
The previous slide shows the first problem with this

method. The term θ is found in a table which depends
on whether or not there are minimum stirrups. However,
to find if minimum stirrups are needed, it is necessary to
know Vc which depends on θ. Thus, the engineer must
make an assumption about whether minimum stirrups
are needed to determine which table is needed for θ.
The table for θ depends on whether or not minimum
stirrups are PROVIDED, not whether or not they are
required. Thus, by always specifying minimum stirrups,
iterations between the tables can be avoided.

13
§ 5.8.2.7 Maximum Spacing of Transverse Reinforcement
The maximum spacing of stirrups is, smax is:

V − φ Vp
If vu < 0.125 fc’ vu = u
smax = 0.8 dv < 24” (5.8.2.7-1) φ bv d v
(5.8.2.9-1)
Ifv > 0.125 fc’
smax = 0.4 dv < 12” (5.8.2.7-2)
The minimum area of stirrups is:

bv s
Av ,min = 0.0316 f c ' (5.8.2.5-1)
fy
Note: If torsion must be considered, Vu in the equation for v must be modified for torsion
(as given in Eq’ns 5.8.2.1-6 and 7). This will be explained later in the torsion section.
This provision does NOT apply to segmental boxes. Different equations are used.
§ 5.8.2.5 Minimum Transverse Reinforcement
For sections with at least the minimum amount of

transverse steel (stirrups):
A value of θ is assumed and this is used to find the
term εx (the formulae for εx are shown on the following
slides).
The LRFD Tables, which are based on vu /fc’ and εx, are used
to find values of β and θ. If θ is close to the assumed value,
then Vn can be calculated. If it is not close, iteration is
needed.

14
To avoid iteration, it is permissible to assume the term

0.5(Vu-V
Vp)cotθ = (Vu-VVp) in the following equations (i.e.
0.5cotθ = 1). (Commentary – C5.8.3.4.2 paragraph 4).
This means cotθ can be assumed = 2. For cotθ = 2, θ =

26o, the most conservative, reasonable angle.

Mu
+ 0.5Nu + 0.5Vu − Vp cotθ − Aps f po
d (5 8 3 4 2 1)
(5.8.3.4.2-1)
εx = v
2(Es As + E p Aps )
εx = longitudinal strain at 0.5dv . The initial value should
be < 0.001.
This equation ASSUMES cracked section and is only for
beams where at least the minimum amount of transverse
reinforcingg ((stirrups)
p ) is p
provided.
Note: If torsion must be considered, Vu in the equation must be modified for torsion (as
given in Eq’ns 5.8.2.1-6 and 7). This will be explained later in the torsion section.
Again, this equation is used if at least minimum stirrups are provided, not whether or not
they are required.
15
Really Important Definitions:
The flexural tension side of a beam is the (½ h) on the

flexural tension side.
In all the equations for shear which require a value of the
area of the longitudinal tensile steel, As or Aps , ONLY the
steel on the flexural tension side counts. Tensile steel
on the flexural compression side (the ½ h on the flexural
compression side) or compression steel is NOT counted
for shear strength.

Definition of “flexural tension side”, the term Ac, and the

term εx for cases with and without minimum stirrups.
16
Mu
+ 0.5 N u + 0.5 Vu − V p cot θ − Aps f po
dv
εx =
2(Es As + E p Aps )
The first term in the numerator, Mu / dv , is the tensile force

in the flanges due to the moment. The dv is shear depth =
de – a/2.

Mu
dv
εx =
2(Es As + E p Aps )
The second term in the numerator, Nu, is any APPLIED
axial force (not prestressing force). It is assumed that ½ of
the axial load is taken by each flange. If the load is
compressive, Nu is negative.

17

Mu
dv
εx =
(
2 Es As + E p Aps )
The third term in the numerator, (Vu – Vp )cotθ, is the axial force
component of strut force and the inclined force from any harped
tendons, as shown in the force triangle. Half the force is assumed to
be taken by the tensile flange and the other half by the compression
flange.

Mu
dv
εx =
2(Es As + E p Aps )
The last term in the numerator, Apsfpo corrects for the strain
in the prestressing steel due to prestressing. The term fpo
is the “locked in” stress in the prestressing steel, usually
taken as 0.7fpu (LRFD Art. 5.4.8.3.2), unless the section
being considered is within the transfer length. If the section
is within the transfer length, the value of fpo must be
reduced to reflect the lack of development (e.g. if the
section is at ½ the transfer length, fpo = 0.35fpu).
18
Mu
dv
εx =
2(Es As + E p Aps )
The denominator is the stiffness of the tensile side. Notice

that this equation ASSUMES cracking. If the section
doesn’t crack (εx is negative), the effect of the uncracked
concrete must be considered.

If Equation 5.8.3.4.2-1 is used and εx < 0; the section has

not cracked. The effect of the uncracked concrete must be
considered and the equation becomes:
Mu
+ 0.5Nu + 0.5Vu − Vp cotθ − Aps f po
d
εx = v
2(Es As + E p Aps + Ec Ac )
(5.8.3.4.2-3)
Ac is the area of concrete on the tension half of the section.

Note: If torsion must be considered, Vu in the equation must be modified for
torsion (as given in Eq’ns 5.8.2.1-6 and 7). This will be explained later in the
torsion section.

19
§ 5.8.3.4 Determination of β and θ
Once the values of vu /fc’ and εx are calculated, use the table in the
LRFD Specifications to find θ and β. If the value of θ is close to the
original assumption, use the β given. If not, use the table value of θ as
the next estimate and repeat the calculations of εx .
Table 5.8.3.4.2-1 Values of θ and β for Sections with Transverse Reinforcement
εx * 1,000
v/f'c ≤ -0.20 ≤ -0.10 ≤ -0.05 ≤ 0.00 ≤ 0.125 ≤ 0.25 ≤ 0.50 ≤ 0.75 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 1.50 ≤ 2.00
≤ 0.075 22.3 20.4 21.0 21.8 24.3 26.6 30.5 33.7 36.4 40.8 43.9
6.32 4.75 4.10 3.75 3.24 2.94 2.59 2.38 2.23 1.95 1.67
≤ 0.1
18.1 20.4 21.4 22.5 24.9 27.1 30.8 34.0 36.7 40.8 43.1
3.79 3.38 3.24 3.14 2.91 2.75 2.50 2.32 2.18 1.93 1.69
≤ 0.125 19.9 21.9 22.8 23.7 25.9 27.9 31.4 34.4 37.0 41.0 43.2
3.18 2.99 2.94 2.87 2.74 2.62 2.42 2.26 2.13 1.90 1.67
≤ 0.15
21.6 23.3 24.2 25.0 26.9 28.8 32.1 34.9 37.3 40.5 42.8
2.88 2.79 2.78 2.72 2.60 2.52 2.36 2.21 2.08 1.82 1.61
≤ 0.175 23.2 24.7 25.5 26.2 28.0 29.7 32.7 35.2 36.8 39.7 42.2
2.73 2.66 2.65 2.60 2.52 2.44 2.28 2.14 1.96 1.71 1.54
≤ 0.2
24.7 26.1 26.7 27.4 29.0 30.6 32.8 34.5 36.1 39.2 41.7
2.63 2.59 2.52 2.51 2.43 2.37 2.14 1.94 1.79 1.61 1.47
≤ 0.225 26.1 27.3 27.9 28.5 30.0 30.8 32.3 34.0 35.7 38.8 41.4
2.53 2.45 2.42 2.40 2.34 2.14 1.86 1.73 1.64 1.51 1.39
≤ 0.25
27.5 28.6 29.1 29.7 30.6 31.3 32.8 34.3 35.8 38.6 41.2
2.39 2.39 2.33 2.33 2.12 1.93 1.70 1.58 1.50 1.38 1.29

Notes:
It is NOT necessary to interpolate the previous table
table.
The terms β and θ apply to the range of strains and
shear in the table. Taking higher values of εx is
acceptable.
Example from the Commentary: θ = 34.4o and β=2.26 can
be used provided that εx < 0.75x 10-3 and vu/fc’ < 0.125
(Commentary – C5.8.3.4.2
C5 8 3 4 2 paragraph 9)9).
If 0.5cotθ was assumed = 1, the values of θ and β
obtained from the table may be used without further
iteration.

20
After finding the value of β and θ :
Vc = 0.0316 β f c ' bv d v (5.8.3.3-3)
Av f y d v cot θ
Vs =
s
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp < 0.25fc’ bv dv + Vp
Then Vu < φ Vn

If the section does NOT have at least the minimum

required transverse steel (stirrups), two modifications are
made.d FiFirst,
t the t i εx , is
th strain, i th
the maximum
i llongitudinal
it di l
strain in the web. It can be calculated by:
Mu
dv
εx =
(Es As + E p Aps )
The initial value of εx should < 0.002
As before, the section is assumed to be cracked and
0.5cotθ may be taken = 1
torsion section.
21
If the section is not cracked:

Mu
+ 0.5 N u + 0.5 Vu − V p cott θ − Aps f po
dv
εx =
(Es As + E p Aps + Ec Ac )

torsion section.
The second modification is that a crack spacing

parameter, sxe , is used in place of v in the table.
1.38
s xe = s x ≤ 80 in.
a g + 0.63
sx = lesser of dv or the spacing of longitudinal steel
placed in the web to control cracking. The area of
longitudinal steel in each layer must be at least
0.003 bvsx
ag = maximum aggregate size – inch.

22

Once the values of sxe and εx are calculated, use the table
in the LRFD Code for this case to find θ and β. If the value
of θ is close to the original assumption, use the β given. If
not, use the table value of θ as the next estimate and
repeat the calculations of εx . Iterate (unless 0.5cotθ is
assumed = 1). Again, interpolation is not necessary. After
finding the value of β and θ :
Vc = 0.0316β f c ' bv d v
Av f y d v cot θ
Vs =
s
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp < 0.25fc’ bv dv + Vp
Then Vu < φ Vn
23
Here is the table for beam with less than minimum stirrups:
Table 5.8.3.4.2-2 Values of θ and ββ for Sections without Transverse Reinforcement
εx * 1
1,000
000
sXE (in)
< -0.20 < -0.10 < -0.05 < 0.00 < 0.125 < 0.25 < 0.50 < 0.75 < 1.00 < 1.50 < 2.00
25.4 25.5 25.9 26.4 27.7 28.9 30.9 32.4 33.7 35.6 37.2
< 5
6.36 6.06 5.56 5.15 4.41 3.91 3.26 2.86 2.58 2.21 1.96
27.6 27.6 28.3 29.3 31.6 33.5 36.3 38.4 40.1 42.7 44.7
< 10
5.78 5.78 5.38 4.89 4.05 3.52 2.88 2.50 2.23 1.88 1.65
29.5 29.5 29.7 31.1 34.1 36.5 39.9 42.4 44.4 47.4 49.7
< 15
5.34 5.34 5.27 4.73 3.82 3.28 2.64 2.26 2.01 1.68 1.46
31.2 31.2 31.2 32.3 36.0 38.8 42.7 45.5 47.6 50.9 53.4
< 20
4.99 4.99 4.99 4.61 3.65 3.09 2.46 2.09 1.85 1.52 1.31
34 1
34.1 34 1
34.1 34 1
34.1 34 2
34.2 38 9
38.9 42 3
42.3 46 9
46.9 50 1
50.1 52 6
52.6 56 3
56.3 59 0
59.0
< 30
4.46 4.46 4.46 4.43 3.39 2.82 2.19 1.84 1.60 1.30 1.10
36.6 36.6 36.6 36.6 41.2 45.0 50.2 53.7 56.3 60.2 63.0
< 40
4.06 4.06 4.06 4.06 3.20 2.62 2.00 1.66 1.43 1.14 0.95
40.8 40.8 40.8 40.8 44.5 49.2 55.1 58.9 61.8 65.8 68.6
< 60
3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 2.92 2.32 1.72 1.40 1.18 0.92 0.75
44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 47.1 52.3 58.7 62.8 65.7 69.7 72.4
< 80
3.10 3.10 3.10 3.10 2.71 2.11 1.52 1.21 1.01 0.76 0.62

Some final notes:

The shear must be checked at the critical sections and
then at intervals along the beam, usually every 0.1L,
and any important points (like harp points) . The values
of dv , β and θ must be calculated at each section.
As with all concrete members, minimum stirrups are
required when Vu > 0.5φ(Vc – Vp)
members β and θ may be
For reinforced concrete members,
taken as 2 and 45 , respectively. Previously, there was
o
a depth limit of 16 inches on this, but this is removed in

2007.

24
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Coming in 2007! - Simplified Shear
(or, what goes around, comes around –

again, and again and again.)
§ 5.8.3.4.3 Simplified Procedure for Prestressed & Nonprestressed

Sections
Article 5.8.3.4.3 – new in 2007
Well,, not reallyy new
Vci and Vcw return from the Standard Specifications with some
modification.
This is the result of a National Co-operative Highway Research
Program (NCHRP) study.
Report 549
Available on line at www.trb.org – follow the NCHRP links.
Note: Simplified shear has been accepted by the AASHTO Subcommittee on Bridges.
However, no change is official until it is actually published. Article and equation numbers
are from the proposed article, but these may change for editorial reasons in the final
publication.
25

Sections
Why the change?
According to NCHRP 549:
Sectional Design Model, as given in the current LRFD

Specifications, is still considered too complex.
Designers said the process has to be automated.
Automated processes cause the engineers to “lose the feel” of

designs.
The old Vci and Vcw worked
orked well
ell for man
many years.
ears
Still the ACI 318 method.


Sections
Not exactly the old Standard Specifications method.
NCHRP 549 suggested 4 changes:
Change 1 – The expression for web shear cracking,
Vcw, is made more conservative and now also applies
to partially prestressed members.

26

Sections
Change 2 – The variable angle truss model is used for
calculating the contribution of shear reinforcement in
web shear regions. For flexural shear regions where Mu
> Mcr, the 45o truss model is used.
Change 3 - Maximum shear stress is substantially
increased.
Change 4 - Minimum shear reinforcement is the same as
for the Sectional Design Model
Model.


Sections
Rules:
No significant axial tension
Provide minimum shear reinforcement as given in Art.

5.8.2.5 (same as Sectional Design Model).
Take Vp = 0 when finding Vn in Eq’n 5.8.3.3-1.
Then, Vc is the lesser of:

Vcw
Vci
As before, the beam is divided into sections and shear is

investigated at each section. The critical section is the
same as for Sectional Design Model.
27

Sections
Vcw
Nominal shear resistance provided by concrete when
inclined cracking results from excessive principal
tensions in the web.
“Web Shear”
Vci
Nominal shear resistance provided by concrete when
inclined cracking results from combined shear and

moment.
“Flexural Shear”


Sections
A quick reminder.
Exactly what are Vci and Vcw?

28

Sections
There are two types of shear:
Flexural shear where shear cracks grow from flexural
cracks. This is Vci .
Web shear where thin webs crack due to high
principal tensile stresses. This is Vcw.


Sections
Flexural Shear - Vci
A prestressed beam will form a flexural crack when the
moment at a section reaches Mcre . The shear at the
section which exists at the time of cracking is called Vcre .
The shear does NOT cause the cracking. The cracking
is caused by the moment, Mcre. Vcre is simply the shear
which is associated with Mcre.
So how is Vcre found?
The simplifying assumption is made that V and M

increase proportionally.

29

Sections
Thus, if V and M increase proportionally, Vcre can be found
from this proportionality. Since Mu is known, it is possible
to find Vu FOR THE LOADING CASE WHICH CAUSES Mu.
The equation becomes:
Vu V
= cre
M u M cre
Vu
Vcre = M cre
Mu


Sections
Experiments have shown that if the shear at the section
increases by (0.02√fc’)b
)bv dv ksi, the flexural crack will grow
into a shear crack.
The flexural shear at the time the crack grows into a shear
crack can be written as:
Vci = Vcre + 0.02 f c 'bv d v
M cre
Vci = 0.02 f c 'bv d v + Vu (ksi )
Mu
This form of the equation is valid for non-composite
members with uniform loads. It is NOT valid for bridges.
30

Sections
Flexural Shear - Vci
It was assumed that the shear and moment increase
proportionally. However, in a composite section or a
section with other than uniform loads, the dead load
doesn’t increase proportionally, so subtract it out of the
proportionality part of the equation.
Two new terms are defined:
Mmax = Maximum moment at a section caused by all
FACTORED superimposed loads.

Vi = Shear at the section associated with Mmax.


Sections
If the dead load is taken separately, the equation is:
Vi M cre
Vci = 0.02 f c 'bv d v + Vd +
M max
Vd = shear due to UNFACTORED dead load – noncomposite
section
Mmax = maximum moment at the section due all super-imposed
FACTORED loads.
Vi = FACTORED shearh att th
the section
ti corresponding
di tto Mmax.
bv = minimum web width
dv = effective shear depth

31

Sections
There is a lower limit to Vci:
Vi M cre
Vci = 0.02 f c 'bv d v + Vd + ≥ 0.06 f c 'bv d v
M max
(5.8.3.4.3-1)
Near simple supports, the Vci equation goes to infinity

because Mmax goes to 0. However, the Vcw equation is
finite at supports, so it will control.


Sections
How is the cracking moment found?
In a prestressed beam, what will eventually be the tensile

fiber will be in compression due to prestressing forces, fcpe.
The beam cracks when enough moment is applied to the
beam to remove the compressive stress and add enough
tension to crack the beam. The usual cracking strength in
flexure is the modulus of rupture, fr.

32

Sections
Assuming an elastic system:
M cre c M cre
f cpe + f r = =
I Sc
M cre = S c ( f cpe + f r )
Where Sc is the section modulus to the tension fiber.


Sections
Mcre must be adjusted to reflect the fact that the dead load
effect has been accounted for. In the LRFD equation, only
the non-composite DL is subtracted:
 12M dnc 
M cre = S c  f r + f cpe −  (5.8.3.4.3-2)
 S nc 
Mdnc = Moment due to UNFACTORED dead loads applied
to the non-composite or monolithic section
section.
Sdnc = Section modulus to the tensile fiber of the non-
composite or monolithic section.

In the LRFD equation, Mcre is in inch-k, but Mdnc is in ft-k. The 12 converts feet to inches.

33

Sections
Web Shear - Vcw
In a beam,, there are shear stresses from flexure. The maximum shear
stress occurs at the neutral axis. For most beams, there is no normal
stress at the neutral axis. However, in a prestressed beam there is a
normal stress from the P/A term in the stress equation. In a composite
beam, the neutral axis of the composite is not the same as in the non-
composite. At the neutral axis of the composite section, there will also
be normal stresses from bending, caused by the prestressing and the
dead load applied to the non-composite section.


Sections
Web Shear - Vcw The top sign is used
The normal stress, fpc is: above the non-composite
neutral axis, the bottom
Peff Peff eyc M dl,nc y c sign is used below the
f pc = m ± non-composite neutral
A nc I nc I nc axis.
Peff = effective prestressing force
Anc = noncomposite area
Inc = noncomposite moment of inertia
yc = distance between neutral axis of composite and
noncomposite sections
= 0 for noncomposite beams
Mdl,nc= noncomposite dead loads
e = eccentricity of prestressing
34

Sections
Web Shear - Vcw
Vcw can be calculated using the shearing stress formula:

v = (Vcw Q)/(It)
where v is the shear stress which causes a maximum principal
tensile stress of 4(fc’)1/2 when the normal stress is fpc.


Sections
Web Shear - Vcw
An approximate equation is provided to find Vcw:
( )
Vcw = 0.06 f c ' + 0.3 f pc bv d v + V p (5.8.3.4.3-3)

35

Sections
The shear strength of the beam is: (5.8.3.3-1 &
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp < 0.25fc’ bv dv + Vp 5 8 3 3-2)
5.8.3.3-2)
For the simplified method, Vp is taken = 0 in this equation,

so:
Vn = Vc + Vs < 0.25fc’ bv dv
Vc is the lesser of Vci and Vcw .
Vp is taken = 0 only in Equations 5.8.3.3-1 and 5.8.3.3-2 and when the

simplified method is used. It is NOT taken = 0 in the equation for Vcw,
5.8.3.4.3-3


Sections
Vi M cre
Vci = 0.02 f c 'bv d v + Vd + ≥ 0.06 f c 'bv d v (5.8.3.4.3-1)
M max
 12M dnc 
M cre = Sc  f r + f cpe −  (5.8.3.4.3-2)
 S nc 
This is the old Vci equation, just adjusted to ksi units, rounded off and
with new notations.
0.02√fc’ ksi = 0.63√fc’; 0.06√fc’ ksi = 1.9√fc’

36

Sections
Vd = Shear force at the section from UNFACTORED
dead load (includes DC and DW) (k-in).
(k in).
Mcre = Moment causing flexural cracking at a section
due to externally applied load (k-in).
Mmax = Maximum factored moment at a section due to
externally applied loads (k-in).
Vi = Shear force at a section due to factored
superimposed loads
loads, which occurs simultaneously
with Mmax (kip).
Mmax and Vi are found from the load combination causing
maximum moment at the section.

Sections
fcpe = compressive stress in concrete due to effective
prestressing forces only (after loss) at the extreme
fiber of the section where externally applied loads
cause tensile stress.
fr = modulus of rupture. For this provision:
f r = 0.2 f c ' (ksi )

Note that this definition
f off fr is a new bullet in Article
5.4.2.6 (2007).
This is the old 6√fc’ just converted to ksi units.

37

Sections
Mdnc = total unfactored dead load moment acting on the
non composite or monolithic section (k-ft).
non-composite (k ft)
Note that this is k-ft. That’s why there’s a 12 in the numerator – converts ft. to in.
Sc = Section modulus to the extreme fiber of the

composite section where tensile stress is caused
by externally applied loads (in3).
Snc = Section
S modulus to the extreme fiber
f off the non-
composite or monolithic section where tensile
stress is caused by externally applied loads (in3).


Sections
For composite members, the commentary allows for a
simplification:
Mmax = Mu – Md Vi = Vu – Vd
(C5.8.3.4.3) 7th Paragraph
Note: The ACI-318 code allows a simplification for non-composite

members, however, this simplification was developed for building
beams with UNIFORM loads. This simplification should NOT be
applied to bridge girders, which are loaded with point (axle) loads.

38

Sections
(
V cw = 0 . 06 )
f c ' + 0 . 3 f pc b v d v + V p (5.8.3.4.3-3)
This is an approximate equation for finding the condition

where the principal tensile stress is 4√fc’
Note that Vp is NOT = 0 in this equation. Vp is only set =
0 when finding Vn in equations 5.8.3.3-1 and 2 and when
using the simplified shear method.
Again, this is the old Vcw equation, converted to kip units.


Sections
fpc = compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all
prestress loses) at centroid of cross section resisting
externally applied loads or at the junction of the web
and the flange when the centroid lies within the flange
(ksi). In a composite section, fpc is the resultant
compressive stress at the centroid of the composite
section (or at the junction of the web and the flange if
the centroid lies in the flange) due to both prestress
and the moments resisted by the precast member
acting alone.

39

Sections
Stirrups:
that, if α = 90o (and it almost always is)
Recall that is), then:
Av f y d v cot θ
Vs =
s
If Vci < Vcw (in other words, Vci controls), then:
cotθ = 1
If Vcw < Vci, (Vcw controls) then:

 f pc 
cot θ = 1.0 + 3  ≤ 1.8 (5.8.3.4.3-4)
 f '
 c 

Sections
Simplified Shear - Summary
Basically,
Basically it is the old Vci and Vcw method from the Std.
Std
Specifications (and ACI 318).
The equations are slightly different.
Be sure to use the new version of the equations.
The biggest change is needing to find cotθ for finding Vs

and longitudinal steel requirements.
If Vci controls, cotθ = 1
If Vcw controls, cotθ must be calculated.

40
Lightweight Concrete
This applies to all shear methods, If the splitting strength is

known the term √fc’ is replaced by :
4.7 f ct ≤ fc '
If the splitting strength is not known, substitute:
0.75 f c ' All lightweight

g g
0.85 f c ' Sanded lightweight

In place of fc '

Deep Components
Deep Components:
Components may be considered as deep components if:
There is a point of zero shear within a distance of 2d

from the face of the support.
A load causing more than ½ the shear at the support
is within 2d of the face of the support (for segmental
boxes, the limit is 1/3 the shear).
Design with strut and tie (Article 5.6.3)
Detail according to Article 5.13.2.3

41
§ 5.8.3.5 Longitudinal Reinforcement
As shown in the previous slides, the shear forces cause

tensile forces in the longitudinal reinforcement. According
to the commentary in the LRFD Specifications, this tension
becomes larger as θ becomes smaller and Vc gets larger.
Therefore, the tensile steel doesn’t only have to resist
moment, but it also must resist the tensile component of
the shear. It is possible that these tensile forces might be
great enough, when combined with the tensile forces due
to moment and axial load, to fail the longitudinal tensile
steel. Therefore, a check must be made to assure that
there is sufficient tensile steel to resist all the forces.
The longitudinal tensile steel must be able to resist the

tension due to bending and axial load, along with the
tensile component of shear force in the concrete.

42
A ps f ps + As f y ≥
Mu Nu V 
+ 0 .5 +  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ (5.8.3.5-1)
φ dv φ  φ 
Note that φ is the appropriate strength reduction factor for
that specific load effect (e.g. 1.0 for Mu in prestressed
concrete, 0.9 for shear, etc.).
There is also a limit of Vs < Vu / φ

torsion. This will be explained later in the torsion section.

At the inside edge of the bearing area of a simple end

support to the section of critical shear:
V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥  u − 0.5Vs − Vp  cotθ
φ 
(5.8.3.5-2)

43
In Equations 5.8.3.5-1 and 5.8.3.5-2, there is a cotθ term.

The value of cotθ depends on the method used. If the
Sectional Design Model is used, then cotθ is found using
the value of θ found from the table.
If the simplified method is used, the value of cotθ depends

on which value controls. If Vci controls, then cotθ=1. If Vcw
controls then cotθ must be calculated:
controls,
cotθ=1.0+3(fpc/√fc’) < 1.8.

Finally, it is necessary to account for any lack of

development of the tensile steel. In the diagram below, the
strand/bar may not be fully developed before it reaches the
crack. If so, the terms fy and fps must be reduced by the
ratio of the actual length/development length.

44
The longitudinal reinforcement does not have to be greater

than that required to carry Mu in cases where there is a
compressive reaction on the flexural compression face.
In other words – it is not necessary to check this provision at

the interior supports of a continuous girder. However, it IS
necessary to check this provision for a continuous for live
l d girder.
load id

§ 5.8.4 Interface Shear Transfer – Shear Friction
Interface (horizontal) shear must be considered at:

An existing or potential crack
An interface between dissimilar materials
An interface between two concretes cast at different

times
The interface between different elements of a cross
section
This provision appears to be for the vertical interface between
flanges and webs of box girders – especially segmental
boxes.

45
The factored interface shear resistance. Vri shall be taken as:
Vri = φVni (5.8.4.1-1)
The design shall satisfy:
Vri ≥ Vui (5.8.4.1-2)

Where:
Vni = Nominal Shear Resistance (kip)
Vui = Factored interface shear force due to total load
based on the applicable strength and extreme
event load combinations in Table 3.4.1-1 (kip)
φ = Resistance factor for shear specified in Article
5.5.4.2.1. In cases where different
ff weights off
concrete exist on different sides of the interface, the
lower of the two values of φ shall be used.

46
The strength of the interface, Vni, is:
Vni = cA cv + µ  A vf f y + Pc  (5.8.4.1-3)
But not greater than the lesser of:

Vni ≤ K1f 'c A cv (5.8.4.1-4)
Vni ≤ K 2 A cv ( 841 )
(5.8.4.1-5)
A cv = b vi L vi (5.8.4.1-6)

Vni = Nominal shear resistance (k)

Acv = area of concrete engaged in shear transfer (in2)
Avf = area of shear reinforcement crossing the shear
plane (in2 )
fy = yield strength of reinforcement
c = cohesion factor
µ = friction factor
Pc = permanent net compressive force normal to the
shear plane (k). If tensile, Pc = 0.
fc’ = 28 day compressive strength of the WEAKER
concrete
47
bvi = interface width considered to be engaged in shear

transfer (inch)
Lvi = interface length considered to be engaged in shear
transfer (inch)
K1 = fraction of the concrete strength available to resist
interface shear, as specified in Article 5.8.4.3
K2 = limiting interface shear resistance specified in
Article 5
5.8.4.3
8 4 3 (ksi)

Based on consideration of a free body diagram and utilizing the

conservative, envelope value of the factored, vertical shear force at
the section, Vu1.
Vu1
v ui = (5.8.4.2-1)
b vid v
Where dv is the previously defined shear depth.
The factored interface shear force in kips/ft for a concrete girder/slab

bridge may be determined as:
Vui = v ui A cv (5.8.4.2-2)

48
If the net (normal) force, Pc , across the interface shear plane is tensile,
additional reinforcement shall be provided:
Pc
A vpc = (5.8.4.2-3)
φf y
For beams and girders, the longitudinal spacing of the rows of interface
shear transfer reinforcing bars shall not exceed 24 inches.

§ 5.8.4.2 Cohesion and Friction
For concrete placed monolithically

c = 0.40 ksi
µ = 1.4
K1 = 0.25
K2 = 1.5 ksi
For normal weight concrete placed against a clean concrete surface,

free of laitance and intentionally roughened 0.25 inches
c = 0.24 ksi
µ = 1.0
K1 = 0.25
K2 = 1.5 ksi

49

For concrete anchored to as-rolled structural steel by headed studs
or by rebar where all the steel in contact with the concrete is clean
and free of paint:
c = 0.025 ksi
µ = 0.7
K1 = 0.2
K2 = 0.8 ksi
For concrete placed against clean, hardened concrete not

intentionally roughened but free of laitance and clean
0 075 ksi
c = 0.075
µ = 0.6
K1 = 0.2
K2 = 0.8 ksi

For lightweight concrete placed against a clean concrete surface,

c = 0.24 ksi
µ = 1.0
K1 = 0.25
K2 = 1.0 ksi
For a cast-in-place concrete slab on clean concrete girder surfaces,

c = 0.28 ksi
µ = 1.0
K1 = 0.3
K2 = 1.8 ksi – normal weight
K2 = 1.3 ksi - lightweight

50
Avf has a minimum:
0.05A cv
A vf ≥ (5.8.4.4-1)
fy

For a cast-in-place concrete slab on a clean concrete

girder surface, free of laitance:
g
The minimum interface shear reinforcement, Avf, need
not exceed the lesser of the amount determined from
equation 5.8.4.1-1 and the amount needed to resist
1.33Vui /φ as determined using equation 5.8.4.1-3.
The minimum reinforcement provisions shall be
waived for girder/slab interfaces with surface
roughened to an amplitude of 0 0.25
25 inches
inches, where the
factored interface shear stress, vui < 0.210 ksi and all of
the vertical shear reinforcement required by Article
5.8.1.1 is extended across the interface and
adequately anchored in the slab.
51
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Torsion
§ 5.8.2.1 General
Torsion causes a condition of pure shear, as shown by

element “a”. However, element “a” can be rotated to show
principal stresses, as shown in element “c”. For principal
stress, two of the normal stresses are tensile and two are
compressive.

52
§ 5.8.2.1 General
In a torsion test brittle materials, which are weaker in

tension than in shear, will break along surfaces forming a
45 degree angle with the longitudinal axis.
CONCRETE IS A BRITTLE MATERIAL!!!!!!

§ 5.8.2.1 General
Because concrete is brittle and tension weak, torsion forces

will crack the member diagonally, perpendicular to the
maximum principal tensile stress. As a result, concrete
members under torsional loads tend to ‘unwrap’.

53
§ 5.8.2.1 General
As with shear, compression struts will occur.
Stirrups will arrest the cracks. As with shear, the presence

of stirrups (in tension) and compression struts forms a
truss, but here the truss is 3-D.
§ 5.8.2.1 General
The important part is this:
Torsion causes shear stresses which are additive to the

flexural shear stresses.

54
§ 5.8.2.1 General
General Requirements:
Tr = φ Tn (5.8.2.1-1)
Tu = factored torsional moment

Tr = factored torsional resistance
Tn = nominal torsional resistance given in Article 5.8.3.6
(k-in)
φ = 0.9 normal weight concrete
φ = 0.7 lightweight concrete

§ 5.8.2.1 General
In many cases, torsional stresses are not significant.

Article 5.8.2.1 states that torsional effects may NOT BE
ignored if:
Tu ≥ 0 . 25 φ T cr (5.8.2.1-3)
 Acp2  f pc
Tcr = 0 .125 fc ' 1+
 p 0 .125 f c ' (5.8.2.1-4)
 c 

55
§ 5.8.2.1 General
 Acp2  f pc
Tcr = 0.125 f c '   1+
 p 0.125 f c '
(5.8.2.1-4)
(5.8.2.1 4)
 c 
Tcr = Cracking torsion (k-in)
Acp = Total area enclosed by the outside perimeter of
the concrete cross section (in2)
pc = length of the outside perimeter of the concrete cross
section (in)
fpc = compressivei stress
t in
i concretet (after
( ft allowance
ll for
f
all prestress loses) at centroid of cross section
resisting externally applied loads or at the junction of
the web and the flange when the centroid lies within
the flange (ksi). (This is the same as for Vcw).
§ 5.8.2.1 General
A cp = 789 in
i 2
pc = 26 + 20 + 2 8 + 92 + 92 + 23 + 62 + 62 + 8
 
pc = 166.4 in
56
§ 5.8.2.1 General
For cellular structures:

2
Acp
≤ 2 A0bv (5.8.2.1-5)
pc
A0 = Area enclosed by the shear flow path, including any
holes therein.

§ 5.8.2.1 General
Torsional Design
For torsion, the area of ADDITIONAL transverse

reinforcement is calculated.
The required area of stirrups for shear must be added to

the required area of stirrups for the concurrent torsion
(Article 5.8.3.6.1).

57
The Commentary (C5.8.3.6.1) explains the use of the

word “concurrent”.
concurrent .
It is not appropriate to design for the maximum shear
and the maximum torsion (unless they are concurrent).
It is appropriate to examine the area of transverse
reinforcement required for the maximum shear with the
concurrent torsion and the maximum torsion with the
concurrent shear
shear. Use the largest area required
required.

When calculating the shear resistance, Vn, several

equations
q require
q the term Vu. When considering
g shear
and torsion, the EQUIVALENT factored shear force, Vu
shall be taken as equal to:
Solid Sections :
2
 0.9 phTu  (5.8.2.1-6)
V +
u
2

 2 A0 
B Sections
Box S i :
Td
Vu + u (5.8.2.1-7)
2 Ao
ph = perimeter of the centerline of the closed, transverse torsion reinforcement.

58
§ 5.8.3.6.2 Torsional Resistance
The nominal torsional resistance is:

2 A0 At f y cot θ
Tn = (5.8.3.6.2-1)
s
At = Area of one leg of closed transverse reinforcement
provided for torsion in solid members or the total area
of transverse torsion reinforcement in the exterior web
of a cellular member.
CAUTION: The Specifications require that the area of transverse
reinforcement for shear be added to that for torsion. However, the transverse
reinforcement for shear, Av, includes ALL legs of the stirrups which cross the
plane of the shear crack. For torsion, At is the area of ONE leg. Thus, when
detailing the reinforcement, it is important to add these areas correctly.

§ 5.8.3.6.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
The longitudinal steel requirements are modified if torsion

must be considered.
Solid Sections:
A ps f ps + As f y ≥
2 2
Mu Nu V   0.45 p hTu 
+ 0 .5 + cot θ  u − V p − 0.5Vs  +  
φ dv φ  φ   2 A0φ 
(5.8.3.6.3-1)

59
§ 5.8.3.6.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
In box sections, the required amount of ADDITIONAL

longitudinal steel is:
Tn p h
Al = (5.8.3.6.3-2)
2 A0 f y

Design for Shear and Torsion
Step 1
Determine if torsion must be considered
considered.
IF Tu < 0.25ΦTcr, torsion may be ignored.
Step 2
Determine the maximum factored shear and
concurrent factored torsion.
Determine the maximum factored torsion and
concurrent factored shear.

60
Design for Shear and Torsion (cont.)
Step 3
Modify Vu to reflect the presence of torsion
torsion.
This is the equivalent factored shear force.
Equations 5.8.2.1-6 or 7
For the Sectional Design Model is used for shear, the
equivalent factored shear force is used for Vu in the
equations for vu and εx.

Step 4
Determine the area of transverse shear reinforcement
needed to resist the maximum value of Vu.
Determine the area of transverse shear reinforcement
needed to resist the value of Vu concurrent with the
maximum torsion.

61
Step 5
Determine the area of transverse torsion
reinforcement needed to resist the maximum value of
Tu.
Determine the area of transverse torsion
reinforcement needed to resist the value of Tu
concurrent with the maximum shear.

Step 6
Add together the areas of transverse reinforcement
required for torsion and shear.
Add the required areas for the cases of maximum shear and
concurrent torsion and maximum torsion and concurrent
shear. Use the maximum.
Remember, the calculated shear area is for ALL the stirrup
legs; the calculated torsion area is for ONE leg. Be sure to
add
dd th
the areas correctly.
tl

62
Check the requirements for longitudinal steel using the

equations modified for torsion.
5.8.3.6.3-1 or 2
Finally, although the specifications do not say it

specifically, it appears that if torsion is present, sectional
design model must be used.

63
AASHTO-LRFD
S TO
Continuous for Live Load
New in 2007
§ 5.14.1.4 Bridges Composed on Simple Span Precast Girders

Made Continuous
Article 5.14.1.3 has been extensively revised for 2007.
Results of NCHRP Study 12-53.
12 53.
NCHRP Report 519 (available on the web at TRB.org)
This article only applies to bridges intended to be

continuous for live load.
This does not apply to bridges designed as simple
spans.
Some states use “poorpoor boy”
boy continuity. A negative
moment connection is provided in the slab, but no
positive moment connection is provided. The bridge
is designed as simple spans. 5.14.1.3 does NOT
apply to this type of bridge.
1
New in 2007

Made Continuous
Construction Sequence

New in 2007

Made Continuous
Negative moment reinforcement over a diaphragm

2
New in 2007

Made Continuous
A bent strand positive moment connection

New in 2007

Made Continuous
Girders carry self weight and slab weight as simple, non-
composite spans.
All superimposed DL and LL carried as continuous,
composite spans.
Negative moment connection over pier is usually
reinforced slab.
Creep, shrinkage and temperature may cause girders to
camber upup, causing positive moment
moment.
Usually in young girders
Positive moment connection required.

3
New in 2007

Made Continuous
Over time, creep and shrinkage of the girders may cause additional
camber in the girders. This creates a positive moment at the
diaphragm which often causes cracking, so positive moment
connections are needed. These moments are called “restraint”
moments.
Experimental evidence shows that this behavior is most prevalent
when the girders are very young.
When the girders are old, theory says shrinkage of the slab causes
the girders to de-camber, resulting in a negative restraint moment at
the diaphragm. However, this is not seen in field measurements.
Field measurements show the girders camber up until the slab is
cast, then every thing “locks up” – no cambering or decambering is
seen.
§ 5.14.1.4.2 Restraint Moments
Methods of analysis are NOT covered in the LRFD

Specifications.
Many commercial bridge analysis programs will
calculate positive moments from creep/shrinkage.
PCA EB-14 is a popular hand method.
Q-Con Bridge is available for free from WSDOT.
Current analysis methods are questionable.

Creep and shrinkage properties are extremely
variable.
Analysis results do not match field data for older
girders.
4
§ 5.14.1.4.2 Restraint Moments
The MOST important variable is the age of the girders at

the time continuity is established (Art 5.14.1.4.4).
If the girders are less than 90 days old when continuity
is established:
The engineer must estimate or specify the girder age at
continuity.
Restraint moments must be calculated.
If the girders are SPECIFIED to be no less than 90
days old when continuity is established:
Provide a specified positive moment connection
No calculations of restraint moments are needed.

§ 5.14.1.4.4 Age of Girder when Continuity is Established
The 90 day specification

At 90 days,
days approximately 70% of the creep and
shrinkage has occurred in the girder. This limits
positive moment formation.
Experimental evidence shows that girders with a
positive moment connection which will resist 1.2Mcr
can still provide continuity even if some cracking is
present
present.
Using the 90 day rule greatly simplifies design.
The 90 day rule is verified by experience in several

states.
5
§ 5.14.1.4.4 Age of Girder when Continuity is Established
To use the 90 day rule, the 90 day wait must be in the

contract documents.
Waiting 90 days may not be practical
Precasters do not want to store for 90 days.
Production schedules may be significantly altered if a

long lead is needed.
In some states, precasters are paid for storage.
The commentary allows the owner to change the 90 day

wait to the time when ktd = 0.7 (Art. 5.4.2.3.2 and
5.4.2.3.3).

§ 5.14.1.4.5 Degree of Continuity at Various Limit States
When the positive moment connection cracks, some degree of

continuity may be lost.
In general, the girders act as simple spans until the cracks close;
then act as continuous after the crack closes.
The design must consider possible loss of continuity.
If the calculated stress at the bottom of the continuity diaphragm for

the combination of superimposed permanent loads, settlement,
creep, shrinkage, 50% live load and temperature gradient, if
applicable, is compressive, the spans may be considered as fully
continuous for all limit states.
If the girders are specified to be at least 90 days old when continuity
is established, the spans may be assumed fully continuous for all
limit states.
Negative moment deck cracking may be neglected.

6
§ 5.14.1.4.6 Service Limit State for Girder Stress Limits
For loads carried as simple spans (including release of

prestressing force), the girders must satisfy the tensile
stress requirements for prestressed girders (Art. 5.9.4).
For the top of the girder at an interior support at service
limit state after losses, either:
Treat it as a prestressed girder. Use the prestressed
tensile limits and Service III, as applicable.
Treat it as a reinforced concrete section
section.
A cast-in-place composite deck slab shall not be subject
to the tensile stress limits for the service limit state after
losses specified in Table 5.9.4.2.2-1.
§ 5.14.1.4.7 Strength Limit State
The negative moment connection must be able to resist

the factored negative moment at the section.
The positive moment connection must be able to resist
the factored restraint moments.

7
§ 5.14.1.4.8 Negative Moment Connections
The most common negative moment connection is a

reinforced concrete slab on top the girders.
This is designed as a reinforced concrete section and
must meet all applicable provisions.
Bars must be properly anchored and splices must be
staggered.
Other types of connections are permitted if verified by
testing
testing.

§ 5.14.1.4.9 Positive Moment Connections
Positive moment connections resist restraint moments

caused by creep and shrinkage of the girders.
Without positive moment connections, the
girder/diaphragm interface cracks and continuity is lost.
Continuous for Live Load Bridges MUST have positive
moment connections.

8
Three types permitted:

Leave some of the strand extended from the end of
the girder and bend it to a 90o angle.
Embed mild steel bars in the end of the girder. These
bars have either 90o or 180o hooks into the
diaphragm.
Any connection verified by analysis/testing to provide
adequate resistance
resistance. Mechanical connections would
be permitted under this section.

The positive moment connection must be designed to

resist the factored restraint moments unless the 90 day
rule is used.
If the connection is designed using restraint moments,
the capacity of the connection must be between 0.6 Mcr
and 1.2 Mcr.
Mcr is the cracking moment of the gross composite
girder cross section at the diaphragm

diaphragm.
Mcr is calculated using the strength of the diaphragm
concrete.

9
If the connection is designed using the 90 day rule, the

capacity of the connection must be at least 1.2 Mcr.
IMPORTANT – The 1.2 Mcr capacity referred to here IS
NOT the same 1.2 Mcr referred to in Art. 5.7.3.3.2 (which
states that prestressed elements must have a minimum
capacity of 1.2 Mcr). Art. 5.7.3.3.2 does NOT apply to
positive moment connections.

Bent Bar Type Connection:

Connection is made by embedding mild steel in the end
of the girder.
Use the provisions for development of straight and bent
bar (Art. 5.11) to design the bars. The critical section is
the girder/ diaphragm interface.
Stagger the ends of the bars in the girder to prevent
stress concentrations
concentrations.

10
Bent Bar type

connection.

Bent Bar Type Connection:

Often,
Often the bars cannot be installed pre
pre-bent
bent (especially
in Bulb-T and I sections). It may be necessary to field
bend. Field bend specifications are needed.
Embedded bars may increase end zone congestion.
To mesh the bars in the diaphragm, the bars must be

offset. However, an excessively asymmetrical
connection detail will cause uneven bar stress
stress. The
connection should be kept as symmetrical as possible
while still allowing meshing.

11
This shows that bent

bars extend above the
top of the flange.
They cannot be
installed bent or the
forms cannot be
closed. They must be
installed straight and
field bent.

Bent Strand Type Connection:

This connection is made by leaving a length of strand
extend from the end of the beam.
The strand may be left straight and developed into the
diaphragm.
The strand may be bent into a 90o hook.
This connection develops the strand for the purposes of

Art. 5.8.3.6.3 (Longitudinal reinforcement).
The strands should be symmetrical about the vertical
axis of the cross section.

12
Strand stress in bent strand connections is found from:

fpsl = (
(ℓdsh – 8)/0.228
) < 150 ksi (5.14.1.4.9-1)
fpul = (ℓdsh – 8)/0.163 (5.14.1.4.9-2)
where:
ℓdsh = total length of extended strand (IN)
fpsl = stress in the strand at the SERVICE limit state.
Cracked section shall be assumed. (KSI)
fpul = stress in the strand at the STRENGTH limit state
state.
(KSI)
Strands shall project at least 8 IN from the face of the
girder before they are bent.
§ 5.14.1.4.10 Continuity Diaphragms
The design of continuity diaphragms at interior supports may be

based on the strength of the concrete in the precast girders.
Precast girders may be embedded into continuity diaphragms.
If horizontal diaphragm reinforcement is passed through holes in the
precast beam or is attached to the precast element using
mechanical connectors, the end precast element shall be designed
to resist positive moments caused by superimposed dead loads, live
loads, creep and shrinkage of the girders, shrinkage of the deck
slab, and temperature effects. Design of the end of the girder shall
account for the reduced effect of prestress within the transfer length.
Where ends of girders are not directly opposite each other across a
continuity diaphragm, the diaphragm must be designed to transfer
forces between girders. Continuity diaphragms shall also be
designed for situations where an angle change occurs between
opposing girders.

13
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications –
Design Example 1
Simple Span Prestressed
Adjacent Box Bridge
RICHARD MILLER
Design Example - Simple-Span Adjacent Box Girder Bridge
Problem Statement and Assumptions
This design example demonstrates the design of a single span, 65 ft. long
j
adjacent box ggirder bridge
g with a 30o right
g forward skew,, as shown below. This
example illustrates the design of typical interior and exterior beams at the critical
sections in positive flexure, shear and deflection due to prestressing, dead load,
and live load.
References:
•“Precast Prestressed Concrete Bridge Design Manual,” Published by Precast/Prestressed concrete Institute

1

This problem was chosen to illustrate skew bridge design.
Note: Table 4.6.2.2.2e-1 has an inconsistency. It does not

include this type of bridge in the description in the first
column, but names it as a cross section type in the second
column.
It is assumed the skew factor applies to this structure.

2
1.2.1 Precast Beams
Ohio B33-48 box girder as shown

fc’ = 7.0 ksi @ 28 days
fci’ = 5
5.0
0 kksii
ODOT Bridge
Design Manual
(BDM) allows a
range
g of strengths.
g
These are chosen
from that range.
[BDM 302.5.1.7]

Selecting the Girder Size
The LRFD Specifications were checked

against the old Standard Specifications
Specifications.
LRFD should give a more refined design, but
not a radically different design.
For prestressed concrete, the difference is
usually a few strands one way or the other.
Design tables developed for Standard
Specifications can usually be used to
approximate the section for initial sizing.
3
When using tables based on the Standard

Specifications try to stay in the middle of the design
Specifications,
range. Sections near either end of the design range
may be inadequate.
The Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI)
publishes preliminary design tables in their Bridge
Design Manual.
These work when ODOT uses the AASHTO standard
section (e.g. Type IV)
It will give an approximate section for cases where the
ODOT section is not AASHTO standard (boxes).
The B33-48 section was chosen from preliminary

design charts in ODOT Design Data Sheets Sheets. Group
“B” Design (roadway width 36 ft. to 48 ft.).
The span of 65 ft is the midrange for this section.
The design data sheet suggests using 20 strands,
½” diameter.
ODOT requires the use of minimum span to depth
ratios given in LRFD Article 2.5.2.6.3. For a precast
box, the limit is 0.03L = 0.03(65ft)(12in/ft) =23.4
inches < 33 inches OK

4
1.2.3 Prestressing Strand
½ in diameter, low-relaxation ASTM A 415

[ODOT BDM 302.5.1.2a]
ODOT BDM allows either ½ inch or 0.6 inch. Here, ½

inch diameter is chosen.
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2

Ultimate strength, fpu = 270.0 ksi
1.2.4 Reinforcing Bars
GR 60; Yield strength, fy = 60 ksi [BDM 302.5.1.8]
Modulus of elasticity, Es = 29,000 ksi

1.2.5 Loads
Diaphragms: 2 - 12” wide at 1/3 points
(ODOT Std. Drawings)
g
Future wearing
surface: 0.060 ksf (ODOT Std. Drawings)
Barriers: 0.090 k/ft each (ODOT Design Data Sheets)
Truck: HL 93, including dynamic allowance

1 2 6 Bridge Parameters
1.2.6
Single Span
Overall Length: 67 ft.
c/c Span: 65 ft.
Support: Elastomeric Bearing Pad
5
1.3.1 Non-Composite Section Properties
Area in2 733.5

Weight (k/ft) 0.764
h (in) 33
yb (in) 16.61
yt (in) 16.39
I (in4) 108,150
Sb (in3) 6,511
St (in3) 6,599
EC = 33, 000 K1wC1.5 f c ' (5.4.2.4-1)

EC = 33, 000 × 1.0 × 0.1501.5 5.0 = 4,300 ksi At Transfer
EC = 33, 000 × 1.0 × 0.1501.5 7.0 = 5, 072 ksi At Service Loads
Material Properties
It is important to remember that the LRFD

Specifications use KSI units
units. The formula
given for E is the old E=33w1.5√fc’, just
adjusted to ksi units.
The K1 factor was added for high strength
concrete, but it applies to all concrete. E is
heavilyy influenced byy aggregates.
gg g At high
g
strengths, E is limited by aggregate stiffness.
The K1 factor allows the owner or designer to
adjust E based on experimental evidence.
6
1.3.2 Assumptions
The current ODOT standard is to tie the girders

together with tie rods,
rods tightened enough to bring the
girders together, but not providing significant lateral
post-tensioning. According to the commentary in the
LRFD Specifications, for this bridge to be considered
to have the girders “sufficiently connected”, a lateral
post-tensioning force causing a stress of 0.25 ksi
across the keyway is needed
needed. Therefore
Therefore, this bridge
will be considered as not being “sufficiently
connected”. This changes the distribution factor
significantly.
1.4.1 Dead Loads
DC = Dead load of structural components and

non structural attachments
non-structural
DC Dead Loads carried by the girders:
Beam Weight: 0.764 klf
Diaphragms: 2 at each 1/3 point
( 33in − 10.5in )( 48in − 11in )
DCd = (1 ft )( 2 diaphragms )( 0.150kcf ) = 1.75k
144in 2 / ft 2
ODOT specifies a MINIMUM of 3 inches in the Bridge Design Manual, but

the Design Data Sheets use a 3.5 inch average to account for camber
along the length of beam.
7
1.4.1 Dead Loads
DC Dead Loads carried by the girders (con’t):

Asphalt Wearing Surface: at Construction
3.5in
DCws = ( 4 ft )( 0.120kcf ) = 0.140klf
12in / ft
DW = future wearing surfaces and future DL

FWS: (0.060 ksf)(4 ft) = 0.240 klf

1.4.1 Dead Loads
An important note on the asphalt wearing surface:
The ODOT standards call for a minimum 3 inch

asphalt surface.
However, the ODOT Design Data Sheets call for a

3.5 in surface. Actually, this is the average surface
thi k
thickness. Due
D tto camber,
b th the surface
f may bbe
thicker at the ends of the girder. The surface may
be thicker on an individual girder due to differential
camber.
8
1.4.1 Dead Loads
Rails: 0.090 klff applied to exterior girders.
In other example problems, barrier/railing loads are

distributed equally to all the girders, but Article 4.6.2.2
appears to require a deck to distribute the load equally to
all girders. Here, assume the railing load is applied only
to the exterior girders.
girders

1.4.1.1 DL-Unfactored Shear Forces & Bending Moments
Since this is a simple span beam, the most critical moment

iss at midspan:
dspa
M DC =
(0.764 klf + 0.140 klf )(65 ft )  65 ft 
2
+ 1.75k = 515.3k − ft
8  3 
M DW =
(0.240 klf )(65 ft )
2
= 126.8 k − ft
8

9
1.4.2 Live Loads
According to LRFD Article 4.6.1.2.1 vehicular live loading

y of bridges
on the roadways g or incidental structures,
designated HL-93, shall consists of a combination of the:
Design truck or design tandem with dynamic allowance. The

design truck shall consists of an 8.0 kip front axle and a pair of
32.0 kip back axles. The first and second axle are spaced 14’-0”
apart. The space between the rear axles shall be varied between
14.0’ and 30.0’ to produce extreme force effects. The design
tandem shall consist of a pair of 25
25.00 kip axles spaced 4
4.0
0’ apart.
apart
[LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.2 and 3.6.1.2.3]
Design lane load shall consist of a load of 0.64 kip/ft uniformly
distributed in the longitudinal direction. [LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.4]

1.4.2 Live Loads
Since this is a simple span, the maximum moment from the

LANE LOAD occurs when the girder is fully loaded. Thus:
M LL ,Lane =
(0.640 klf )(65 ft )
2
= 338 k − ft
8
The HL-93 truck controls for this span length and, since this
is a simple span, the maximum moment is:
M LL ,Truck = 896k − ft
10
1.4.2 Live Loads
A note on live loads:
The lane load is just a uniform load, so for a simple

span the moment is:
M = 0.5wx(L-x)
w = load (klf)
L = total span
x = point where moment is calculated.
1.4.2 Live Loads
The HL-93 Truck is treated as a series of axle loads. For a

SIMPLE SPAN (only), the maximum moment occurs when
th midspan
the id off th
the b
beam iis ½ way b
between
t th
the resultant
lt t
load and the nearest axle load:
The resultant is used
only for positioning the
loads. It is NOT
included in the
analysis.
Don’t you wish you would have
paid more attention in Structural
Analysis?????

11
1.4.2 Live Loads
The HL-93 has the same axle loads as the old HS-20 truck.
p
The Standard Specifications p
published moments for simple
p
spans under the old HS-20 loading in Appendix B.
BE CAREFUL – Appendix B gives the moment for the

controlling load case which might be either the truck load or
the lane load!! Recall that the Standard Specifications use
EITHER Lane or Truck; LRFD uses BOTH.
The HS 20 lane load is NOT the same as the HL-93 truck

or HL-93 lane!!! (Standard Specification Lane Load has a
point load!)

1.4.2.1 Distribution Factors
The live load bending moments and shear forces are

determined by using the simplified distribution factor
f
formulas
l [LRFD 4.6.2.2].
4 6 2 2] To
T use theth simplified
i lifi d lilive lload
d
distribution factor formulas, the following conditions must
be met [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1]
Width of deck is constant. OK
Number of beams, Nb > 4. OK
Overhang part of the roadway < 3 ft OK
de = 0.23 ft
Curvature in plan < Article 4.6.1.2 OK
Beam parallel and of same stiffness OK
Cross Section listed in Table 4.6.2.2.1-1 OK
For a precast concrete box beam with an asphalt
surface , the bridge type is (g).
12
1.4.2.1 Distribution Factors
The number of design lanes should be

determined by taking the integer part of the ratio
w/12, where w is the clear roadway width in feet
between curbs and/or barriers.
w = 48 feet
Number of design lanes = integer part of (48/12) = 4
(3.6.1.1.1)

1.4.2.1.1 Distribution Factors for Bending Moment
DFM = S/D
S = width of precast beam (ft)
D = (11.5 -NL)+1.4NL(1-0.2C)2 when C < 5
D = (11.5 -NL) when C > 5
(Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1)
Range of Applicability:
NL ≤ 6 Skew ≤ 45°

13
Where:
NL = Number of Lanes = 4
C = K(W/L) < K
W = Clear width of the bridge = 48 ft.
K=
(1 + µ )I
J
J is not published for ODOT girders. However, it

can be approximated by:
( )
2
4 A2 4 1180in 2
J= = = 211625in4
S
∑ t 2  5.5in  + 5.5in + 5in
27.75in 42.5in 42.5in
A is the area enclosed by the centerline of the box walls.

t is the wall thickness
S is the length of the centerline of a box wall.

14
K=
(1 + 0.2 ) 108150in4 = 0.783
211625in4
 48 ft 
C = 0.783   = 0.578
 65 ft 
D = ( 11.5 − 4Lanes ) + 1.4 ( 4Lanes ) ( 1 − 0.2 ( 0.578 ) ) = 11.9
2
S 4 ft
= = 0.336
0 336
D 11.9
µ = Poisson’s Ratio = 0.2 [LRFD 5.4.2.5]

Note that for boxes, K can be conservatively taken

as 1
1. The DFM = 0.361,
0 361 a difference of 8%
8%.
Also note that there is only one distribution factor

for this case. This is different from other cases
where there are factors for one lane loaded and
two lanes loaded.

15
1.4.2.1.2 Distribution Factors for Shear Force
Two Lanes Loaded:
DFV = (b/156)0.4 (b/12L)0.1 (I/J)0.05(b/48)
One Lane Loaded:
DFV = (b/130L)0.15 (I/J)0.05

(Table 4.6.2.2.3a-1)

Where DFV = distribution factor for moment for

interior beam
beam. Provided:
5< Nb < 20 Nb = 12 OK Nb = number of beams
35 < b < 60 b = 48 OK b = beam width, in
20 < L < 120 L = 65 OK L = beam span, ft
25,000 < J < J = 211,625 OK
610,000
40,000 < I < I = 108,150 OK
610,000

16
For two or more lanes loaded:

01
0.1
 48 
0.4
 48   108150 0.05  48 
DFV =         = 0.456
 156   12 ( 65 )   211625   48 
For one design lane loaded:

0.15
 48   108150 
0.05
DFV =  = 0.445
0 445
 130 ( 65 )   
 211625 
 
Because I/J is raised to a very small power, assuming I/J = 1 changes
the DFV very little. Here, the DFV is about 4% higher if I/J = 1.
1.4.2.2 Dynamic Allowance
IM = 33%
Where:
IM = dynamic load allowance, applied only to truck load

17
1.4.2.3 Moment Reduction Factor for Skew
g = 1.05 − 0.25 tan θ ≤ 1.0 For 0° ≤ θ ≤ 60°
g = 1.05 − 0.25 tan 30o = 0.905 ( )

The specifications state that the MOMENT
DISTRIBUTION FACTOR in a skewed bridge g MAY
be reduced by this factor. (Table 4.6.2.2.2e-1)
Note: Table 4.6.2.2.2e-1 has an inconsistency. It does not include this type of
bridge in the description in the first column, but names it as a cross section type
in the second column. It is assumed the skew factor applies to this structure.
1.4.2.4 Unfactored Bending Moments
Unfactored bending moment due to HL-93 truck,

per beam:
MLL,Truck
= (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(1+IM)(skew factor)
= (bending moment per lane)(0.336)(1.33)(0.905)
= (bending moment per lane)(0.404)
= 896 k-ft ((0.404)) = 362.3 k-ft

18
1.4.2.4 Unfactored Bending Moments
Unfactored
U f dbbending
di moment d
due to HL
HL-93
93 llane lload,
d
per beam:
MLL,Lane = (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(skew factor)
= (bending moment per lane)(0.336)(0.905)
= 338 k-ft (0.304) = 102.7 k-ft
(Impact is not applied to lane loads.)

1.4.3 Load Combinations
The following limit states are applicable: (3.4.1)

Service I:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
Maximum Q = 1.25(DC) + 1.50(DW) + 1.75(LL + IM)
Fatigue: Does not need to be checked for pretensioned

beams designed using the Service III load combination.

19
1.5.1 Service Load Stresses at Midspan
Bottom tensile stress due to applied dead and live loads using load
combination Service III:
M DC + M DW + 0.8 M LL+ I
fb =
Sb
Where:
fb = Bottom tensile stresses ksi
MDC = Unfactored bending moment due to DC loads kip-ft
MDW = Unfactored bending moment due to DW loads kip-ft
MLL+I = Unfactored bending moment due to design vehicular live kip-ft
load including impact,
Sb = Section modulus to the bottom fiber in3
Box girders are usually controlled by Strength I, but it is difficult to estimate number of
strands using Strength I. It is easier to estimate the number of strands using Service III
and add a few strands. Final strand patterns can be adjusted, if needed, later.
1.5.1 Service Load Stresses at Midspan
fb =
{515.3 + 126.8 + 0.8 ( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ftf } (12ini / ftf ) = 1.87ksi
6511in3
Remember! For Service III (which applies ONLY to tension

in fully prestressed members), the LL factor is 0.8!

20
1.5.2 Tensile Stress Limits for Concrete
f r = 0.19 f c' (Table 5.9.4.2.2-1)
f r = 0.19 7.0 = 0.503ksi
1.5.3 Required Number of Strands
The first step is determine the required amount of

prestressing stress at the tensile fiber:
f pb = ( f b − f r )
f pb = (1.87 − 0.503) = 1.37ksi
Assume the strands are 2 inches from the bottom

of the girder So the strand eccentricity at the
midspan is:
ec = ( yb − ybs ) = (16.61 − 2.0) = 14.61in
If Ppe is the total prestressing force, the stress at
the bottom fiber due to p prestress is:
Ppe Ppe ec
f pb = +
A Sb
21
Now plug in the required recompression stress, fpb

and solve for Ppe:
1.37 ksi
Ppe = = 380 kips
 1 14.61in 
 2
+ 
 733.5in 6511in 3 

Final prestress force per strand

= (area
( off strand)(f
t d)(fpi)(1-losses,
)(1 l %)
where fpi = initial prestressing stress before
transfer, ksi = 0.75fpu = 202.5 ksi
Assuming 25% loss of prestress the final

prestressing force per strand after losses is:
(0.153)(202.5)(1 − 0.25) = 23.2kips

22
Number of strands required:

380
= 16.4
23.2
This shows a need for at least (18) ½ in
diameter, 270 ksi, low-lax strands as the
strand pattern must be symmetrical.

1.5.4 Strand Pattern
At midspan:
The ODOT design data sheets recommend 20 strands.

Use 20 strands.

23
1.5.4 Strand Pattern
Why 20 strands?
1) Boxes tend to be controlled by strength design, but it is

hard to use that for strand estimation. It is easier to use
Service III and add a few extra strands.
2) The exterior girders will probably require more strand
(maybe starting with the exterior would be a better idea!).
It is poor design practice to have the exterior girders have
more strand than the interior. This causes fabrication
problems. The interior and exterior girders cannot be
made on the same bed at the same time.

2.1 Prestress Losses
Total Prestress Losses:

∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5.9.5.1-1)
Where:
∆fpES = loss due to elastic shortening, ksi
∆fpLT = loss due to long-term
long term shrinkage and creep of
concrete, and relaxation of the steel, ksi

24
2.1.1 Elastic Shortening
Ep
∆f pES = f cgp (5.9.5.2.3a-1)
Ect
Where:
fcgp = The concrete stress at the center of gravity of
prestressing tendons due to the prestressing
force immediately after the transfer and the self-
weight of the member at the section of the
maximum moment (ksi).
Pi Pe 2
M g ec
f cgp = + i c −
A I I
Ep = Elastic Modulus of the prestressing steel (ksi).
Ect = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at the time of

transfer or time of load application (ksi).
Mg = girder self weight at release
( 0.764klf )( 65 ft )
2
 65 ft 
Mg = + 1.75k = 441.4k − ft = 5300k − in
8  3 

25
In the calculation of Mg c/c bearing is used for length. Some

designers use overall length, based on the assumption that
th girder
the i d willill sitit on its
it ends
d when
h released.
l d Overall
O ll length
l th
gives “a more accurate Mg”. But consider this:
In this case, the difference in the moment between overall

length and c/c bearing is 6%.
Mg is used for ES losses

losses, which includes Eci. Eci is based on
release strength, which is unknown (what is specified is the
MINIMUM; the actual will be above this). The formula for E
is accurate to, at best, + 10%.

The ES loss is added to the long term losses and the creep
and shrinkage equations used to find the long term losses
are stated in the commentary to only be accurate + 50%.
The weight of the beam is based on ideal cross section and

a UW of 150 pcf. Real concrete has UW varying from 140-
160 pcf and there are tolerances in the cross section.
Mg based on c/c bearing is conservative (the Mg term

subtracts, so using c/c bearing INCREASES ES) and it will
be needed later – so why not just use it here??

26
(
Pi = 20 strands ( 0.9 )( 202.5ksi ) 0.153in 2 = 558k )
558k (14.61in ) 5300k − in (14.61in )

2
558k
f cgp = + − = 1.15ksi
733.5in 2 108150in 4 108150in 4
28500ksi
∆f pES = (1.15
1 15ksi ) = 7.6
7 6ksi
4300ksi

In the calculation of fcgp , the initial stress is assumed to be

0.9 fpi . This
Thi iis permitted
i db by A
Article
i l 5.9.5.2.3a.
9 23
In lieu of this, the commentary permits the calculation of the

elastic shortening losses using transformed section. The
commentary gives the following equation:
Aps f pi ( I g + em2 Ag ) − em M g Ag
∆f pES = (C5.9.5.2.3a-1)
AI E
Aps ( I g + em2 Ag ) + g g ci
Ep
27
2.1.2 Long-Term Losses
For standard, precast, pretensioned members subject to

g and environmental conditions:
normal loading
f pi Aps
∆f pLT = 10 γ hγ st + 12γ hγ st + ∆f pR (5.9.5.3-1)
Ag
In which:
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01H (5.9.5.3-2)
5
γ st = (5.9.5.3-3)
1 + f ci '
H = The average annual ambient relative humidity (%)

γh = Correction factor for relative humidity of the ambient
air
γhst = Correction factor for specified concrete strength at
time of Prestress transfer to the concrete member
∆fpR = An estimate of relaxation loss taken as 2.5 ksi for
low relaxation strand

28
Assume H = 70%
γ h = 1.7
1 7 − 0.01(70)
0 01(70) = 1.00
1 00
5
γ st = = 0.83
1 + 5.0
So:
( 202.5ksi )( 20 ) ( 0.153in 2 )
∆f pLT = 10 (1.00
1 00 )( 00.83
83) + 12 (1.00
1 00 )( 0.83
0 83) + 2.5
25
733.5in 2
∆f pLT = 7.0 + 10.0 + 2.5 = 19.5ksi

2.1.3 Total Losses at Service Loads

∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5.9.5.1-1)
∆f pT = 7.6 + 19.5 = 27.1ksi
27.1ksi
Loss = (100% ) = 13.3%
202.5ksi
f pe = 202.5ksi − 27.1ksi = 175.4ksi
Loss is less than the 25% initially assumed, so OK.

29
2.2 Compression Stress Limit States
(Table 5.9.4.2.1-1)
Sum of effective prestress + permanent < 0.45fc’
loads
1/2(Sum of effective prestress + < 0.4 fc’
permanent loads) + live load
Sum of effective prestress + permanent < 0.6φ
0 6φwfc’
loads + transient loads

So what is this φw term?
It is a modifier for sections with thin webs or

flanges. It is actually defined in the section for
hollow, rectangular compression members (Art.
5.7.4.7).
It is
i based
b d on th
the fl
flange or webb llength/thickness
th/thi k
ratio. Since this is for sections with thin
webs/flanges, φw term will usually be = 1 for most
beams.
30

X u (5.7.4.7.1-1)
λw =
t ((5.7.4.7.2c-1))
If λw ≤ 15 φw = 1.0
If 15 < λw ≤ 25 φw = 1 − 0.0025 ( λw − 15 ) (5.7.4.7.2c-2)
If 25 < λw ≤ 35 φw = 0.75 (5.7.4.7.2c-3)
X u = b − ( lesser of 2z or 2 y )

2.2.1 Φw
Find the web and flange slenderness ratios:

Xu
λw = (5.7.4.7.1-1)
(5.7.4.7.1 1)
t
Where:
Xu = the clear length of the constant thickness portion of the wall
between other walls or fillets
t = wall thickness
48in − 2 ( 5.5in ) − 2 ( 3in )
λw = = 6.2 Bottom Flange
5in
33in − ( 5.5in ) − 5in − 2 ( 3in )
λw = = 2.9 Web
5.5in
The top flange λw < 15 by inspection. If λw < 15, φw = 1.0 (5.7.4.7.2c-1)

31
2.2.2 Service Load Stresses
Pe =20 strand (0.153in2)(202.5 ksi – 27.1 ksi) = 537 kips
537k 537k (14.61in )

f cp ,top = − = −0.457ksi
733.5in 2 6599in 3
f cDL ,top =
[(515.3 + 126.8 )k − ft ](12in / ft ) = 1.17 ksi
6599 in 3
f cLL ,top =
{( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ft} (12in / ft ) = 0.85ksi
6599in3
2.2.3 Service Load Compression Stress Check Service I
f cp ,top + f cDL ,top = −0.457ksi + 1.17ksi = 0.713ksi

< 0.45 f c ' = 0.45 ( 7ksi ) = 3.15ksi
f cp ,top + f cDL ,top 0.713ksi

+ f cLL ,top = + 0.85ksi = 1.21ksi
2 2
< 0.4( 7ksi ) = 2.8ksi
f cp ,top + f cDL ,top + f cLL ,top = 0.713ksi + 0.85ksi = 1.56ksi

< 0.6 (1.0 )( 7ksi ) = 4.2ksi
Compression stresses OK
32
2.3.4 Service Load Tensile Stress Check Service III
The Service III stress at the bottom due to dead and live
loads, fb, was calculated previously. The allowable tensile
stress of 0.530 ksi was also calculated previously.
537 kips 537k (14.61in )

f pb = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in3
f b = −1.87 ksi
f pb + f b = 1.94ksi
k i − 1.87 kksii = +0.07 kksii = 0.07 ksi
k i COMPRESSION
The section is in COMPRESSION, so the tensile allowable

does NOT apply.
Because the bottom of the girder is in compression,

check with Service I:
fb =
{515.3 + 126.8 + ( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ft}(12in / ft ) = 2.04ksi
6511in 3
537kips 537k (14.61in )

f pb = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
f b = −2.04ksi
f pb + f b = 1.94ksi
k i − 2.04ksi
k i = −0.1ksi
k i = 0.1ksi
k i TENSION
Now it’s in tension, which is Service III ?!?!?!?!

33
So what g
gives?? Is this a Service III or Service I load
case??
Actually, it is sort of both. For all intents and purposes, the

stress at the bottom of the girder is “0” – and this is a
dividing line between Service I and Service III. Because of
the 0.8 factor on the LL, there is an inconsistency between
the two load cases. However the stress is so low, that really
doesn’t matter – we satisfy all allowables in all cases.

3.1 Factored Moment
Strength I:
Q = 11.25(DC)
25(DC) + 11.50(DW)
50(DW) + 11.75(LL
75(LL + IM)
Since the truck load and lane load have been
distributed and impact is included:
Q = 1.25(DC) + 1.50(DW) + 1.75(Truck + Lane)
M u = 1.25 ( 515.3) + 1.50 (126.8 ) + 1.75 ( 362.3 + 102.7 )

M u = 1648k − ft = 19780k − in
34
3.2 Steel Stress at Strength Limit State
Average stress in prestressing steel when :

 c 
f ps = f pu  1 − k (5.7.3.1.1)
 
 dp 
Where:
fps = Average stress in prestressing steel ksi
k = 0.28 for low relaxation strands
dp = Distance
Di from
f extreme compressioni fiber
fib to
the centroid of the prestressing tendons = 31 in.
c = Distance between the neutral axis and the in.
compressive face
Aps f pu + As f y − As' f y'

c= (5.7.3.1.1-4)
f
0 85 f c' β b + kAps ppu
0.85
dp
Where:
Aps = Area of prestressing steel in2

fpu = Specified tensile strength of prestressing
steel = 270 ksi
As = Area of mild steel tension reinforcement =
0.0 in2
fy = Yield strength of tension reinforcement =
60.0 ksi
35
A’s = Area of compression reinforcement = 0.0 in2

f’y = Yield strength of compression reinforcement
= 60.0 ksi
f’c = Compressive strength of concrete = 7.0 ksi
β1 = Stress block factor specified in LRFD 5.7.2.2
= 0.70
b = Effective width of compression flange = 48 in
in.
To compute c, assume rectangular section behavior, and check if the depth of the
equivalent compression stress block, a, is equal to or less than ts: Where a =β1c

c=
( )
20 0.153in 2 270ksi + 0 − 0
= 3.98in.
in < 5.5in.
in
270ksi
(
0.85 ( 7ksi )( 0.7 )( 48in ) + 0.28 ( 20 ) 0.153in 2 ) 31 in
 3.98in 
f ps = 270ksi 1 − 0.28  = 260ksi
 31 in 
c is also the neutral axis depth, so the stress block depth,

a = β1c = 0.7(3.98) = 2.79 inches. Since c < hf, the stress
block is entirely in the flange so the beam may be treated
as rectangular.
36
3.3 Flexural Resistance

The moment equation in the LRFD Specification looks like this:
 a  a  a a h 
As f y ' ds ' −  +0.85fc ' ( b −bw ) hf  − f 
Mn = Aps f ps dp −  + As f y ds −  − A'
 2  2  2 2 2 
(5.7.3.2.2-1)
If the section is rectangular (b=bw), the equation becomes:
 a  a  a
 2  2  2
If th
there iis no compression
i or mild
ild tension
t i steel,
t l the
th equation
ti
becomes:
 a
M n = Aps f ps  d p − 
 2
Since c < hf, the section may be treated as rectangular.
a = 2.79in
 a
M n = Aps f ps  d p −  (5.7.3.2.2-1)
 2
 2 79in 
2.79
( )
M n = 20 0.153in 2 ( 260ksi )  31 in −
 2 
 = 23550k − in

37
The nominal flange width of 48 inches was used for “b”.

In reality, the flange area is reduced by the shear key cut-
out. However, this is often ignored as this would require
an iterative procedure. If the area is adjusted for the
shear key, the nominal moment, Mn changes by only
0.10%. It may not be appropriate to reduce the area by
the shear key cut-out as this will be filled with grout and
the grout may act with the base concrete to effectively
provide the complete flange width. All of this is a matter of
engineering judgment.

3.4 Determination of Phi
To determine Φ, it is necessary to calculate the steel strain

at the level of the extreme tensile steel.
c = 3.98 inches (calculated above)
dt is the distance to the extreme tensile steel. Since
there is only one row of steel, dt = dp.
dt − c
ε t = 0.003
c
31in − 3.98
ε t = 0.003 = 0.0204
3.98

38
3.4 Determination of Phi
Since εt =0.0204 > 0.005,

the section is tension controlled. (5.7.2.1)
Φ = 1.0 (5.5.4.2.1)
This is a big change from the old ρbalanced method.

However, this now makes the LRFD Specifications
consistent with ACI 318. This replaces the
maximum reinforcement provisions.

3.5 Determination of Flexural Strength
M u ≤ ΦM n
19, 780k − in < (1.0 )( 23550k − in ) OK

39
3.6 Minimum Reinforcement
For minimum reinforcement, the resistance moment, Mr

must be at least the lesser of 1.2 times the cracking
g
moment or 1.33 times the factored applied moment.
1.33Mu = 1.33(19780 k-in) = 26310 k-in
For the cracking moment, find the modulus of rupture:
f r = 0.37 f c ' = 0.37 7ksi = 0.979ksi (5.4.2.6)
Note that this is a new MOR for minimum reinforcement. It is

equal to 11.5√fc’ in psi; which is the upper bound for MOR.
3.6 Minimum Reinforcement
Next, determine the stress at the bottom of the box due

to effective prestressing force:
537kips 537k (14.61in )

f cpe = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3

40
3.6 Maximum and Minimum Reinforcement
Since this is a non-composite section:
M cr = Sb ( f r + f cpe ) (5.7.3.3.2-1)
M cr = 6511in 3 ( 0.979ksi + 1.94ksi ) = 19000k − in
11.2M 1 2(19000k i ) = 22800 k-in

2Mcr = 1.2(19000k-in) ki <1 1.33M
33Mu
Mr = φMn = 1.0(23550) k-in = 23550 k-in >
22800 k-in OK
3.6 Maximum and Minimum Reinforcement
Note: When the number of strands was selected,

selected it
was determined that 18 strands would be needed,
but 20 were used. If 18 strands had been used,
φMn = 21400 k-in, so 18 strands would NOT meet
the minimum requirement.

41
4.1 Steel Stress at Transfer
Assume the stress at transfer is 0.9fpi
Pi = 20 strand(0.153in2)(0.9)(202.5 ksi)=558 kips
4.2 Allowable Stress at Transfer (Table 5.9.4.1.2-1)
Tension:
0.0948√fci’ < 0.2 ksi w/o bonded reinforcement
0.24√fci’ w/ bonded reinforcement
Compression: 0.6fci’

4.3 End Stress at Transfer
558 kips 558 k (14.61in )

f pt = − = −0.474 ksi
733.5in 2 6599in 3
558 kips 558 k (14.61in )
f pb = 2
+ 3
= 2.01ksi
733.5in 6511in
These stresses should be calculated at the end of the

transfer length = 60db=30 in. The dead load stresses 30
inches from the support should be added. However, these
stresses will not be large so it is conservative to use just the
stress due to prestressing. (5.11.4.1)

42
4.3 End Stress at Transfer
fpt = 0.474 ksi tension < 0.24√fci’ = 0.24√5 ksi = 0.537 ksi
OK w/bonded steel
fpb = 2.01 ksi compression < 0.6fci = 0.6(5 ksi) = 3 ksi OK
Because the stress is OK, no debonding is needed. If this calculation had

shown debonding was needed, it would have been prudent to recalculate
stresses at the end of the transfer length (include the gravity moment) to
see if debonding is still needed. If debonding is needed, no more that
25% of the total number of strands could be debonded and no more than
40% in one row can be debonded.

4.3.1 Bonded Steel
Bonded steel is needed at the top of the girder at the end to

take the tensile forces. This steel must resist the total
t
tension
i ini the
th top
t flange
fl with
ith a stress
t off no more than
th 0.5f
0 5fy
but not more than 30 ksi. (Table 5.9.4.1.2-1)
The first step it to find the tension in the flange. This requires
the location of the neutral axis to be determined. From the
top and bottom stresses at the end, the neutral at the end is:
0.474 ksi(33in )
x= = 6.30in
0.474 + 2.01ksi
43
4.3.1 Bonded Steel
The top flange is 5.5 inches, so the stress at the bottom of

the top flange is:
0.474 ksi
(6.3in − 5.5in ) = 0.0602 ksi
6.30in

4.3.1 Bonded Steel
T = 0.5 ( 6.30in )( 0.474ksi )( 5.5in )( 2 )

0.474ksi + 0.060ksi
+ ( 5.5in ) ( 48in − 2 ( 5.5in ) )
2
T = 70.8kips
Again, this tension could be reduced by
calculating the force at the end of the
g ((including
transfer length g the g
gravity
y
moment). Including the gravity moment will
reduced the calculated tension, but because
bars only come in certain sizes, the
reduction may not change the number of
bars needed.

44
4.3.1 Bonded Steel
The bonded steel must resist the total tensile force with a
stress not exceeding the lesser of 0.5fy or 30 ksi.
70.8 kips
As = = 2.36 in 2 (5.9.4.1.2-1)
30 ksi
Use 8 #5
The length of the bar is determined by the point where

bonded steel is no longer required. Since 0.0948√fci’ =
0.212 ksi > 0.2ksi; find the point where the dead load drops
the stress below 0.2 ksi.
4.3.1 Bonded Steel
For simplicity, just consider the beam weight and ignore

diaphragms.
p g
M = ∆fc St = (0.474 ksi – 0.200 ksi) 6599 in3

= 1808 k-in = 150.7 k-ft
M = 150.7 k − ft = 0.5(0.764 klf )x(65 ft − x )

150.7 k − ft = 24.83 x − 0.382 x 2
x = 6.75 ft ; 58.25 ft
This is from center of bearing, so extend steel 7.75 ft. from
each end and then add development length.
45
4.3.1 Bonded Steel
1.25 Ab f y
ld = ≥ 0.4 d b f y (5.11.2.1.1)
f c'
1.25 ( 0.31in 2 ) 60ksi

ld = = 10.4in < 0.4 ( 0.625in )( 60ksi ) = 15in
5ksi
Where:
Ab = Area of the bar
db = diameter of bar
ff’c = compresive strength of concrete at release
Top bar factor = 1.4 : 1.4(15 inches) = 21 inches
So the minimum bar length = 7’- 9” + 1’ – 9” = 9’ – 6”

4.4 Midspan Stress at Transfer
Mg = 5300 k-in (previously calculated)

5300 k − in
f t ,DL = = 0.803ksi
6599in 3
− 5300 k − in
f b ,DL = = −0.814 ksi
6511in 3
f top = −0.474 ksi + 0.803ksi = 0.329 ksi

f bot = 2.01ksi − 0.814 ksi = 1.20 ksi
By inspection, both are below the compression limit.

46
5.1 Critical Section - Shear
The critical section is at dv from the face of the support for a

section where the reaction force in the direction of the
applied shear introduces compression into the end region
of the member.
For this member with only a single layer of prestressing

steel:
a 2.79in
d v = de − = 31in − = 29.6inches (5.8.3.2)
2 2

5.1 Critical Section - Shear
The term dv is not taken less than:
0.9de = 0.9(31 inches) = 27.9 inches < 29.6 inches

or
0.72h = 0.72(33 inches) = 23.76 inches < 29.6 inches
Assuming a 1 ft. long bearing pad, the critical section is:
29.6 + 6 = 35.6 inches from center of bearing.
For calculations, use 36 inches = 3 ft. The difference is

only a few percent.
47
5.2.1 Basic Shear Forces and Moments at the Critical Section
DC:
For beam weight:
Vg = w(0.5 L − x ) = 0.764 klf (0.5(65 ft ) − 3 ft ) = 22.54 k
M g = 0.5 wx(L − x ) = 0.5(0.764 klf )(3 ft )(65 ft − 3 ft ) = 71.0 k − ft
For the diaphragm, V = 1.75k (shear is constant),

M = 1.75(3) = 5.25k-ft

For the DC wearing surface:
Vws = 0.140klf ( 0.5 ( 65 ft ) − 3 ft ) = 4.13k

M ws = 0.5 ( 0.140klf )( 3 ft )( 65 ft − 3 ft ) = 13k − ft
For the DW wearing surface:

V fws = 0.240klf (0.5 ( 65 ft ) − 3 ft ) = 7.08k
M fws = 0.5 ( 0.240klf )( 3 ft )( 65 ft − 3 ft ) = 22.3k − ft

48
Live Load: Consider the influence line for shear

The shear at x is maximized
by placing the rear wheel of
the truck at x and loading
the right part of the beam
with the uniform load. (Note
that influence lines are NOT
used for dead loads.
Obviously, it is not possible
to have the DL on only part
of the beam!)
Now don’t you REALLY wish you wouldn’t have slept in Analysis class?????
Using a standard structural analysis program, at the critical

section:
VLL,Lane = 18.92 k
VLL,Truck = 58.33 k
MLL,Lane = 56.76 k-ft
MLL,Truck = 175.0 k-ft

49
5.2.2 Skew Factor
This is a multibeam bridge. The shear at the obtuse corner

of each girder MUST be increased by:
12 L 12(65 ft )
1+ tan θ = 1 + tan(30 ) = 1.20
90 d 90(33in )
(Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1)
Note that this factor applies to the distribution factor.
Since the critical section is only 3 feet from the support,

apply the skew factor.

5.2.3 Factored Moments and Shears
As calculated in Section 1.4.2.1.1 of this example:

DFV = 00.456
456
DFM = 0.336
The moment MAY be multiplied by the skew factor

for moment, 0.905.
The shear MUST be increased by skew factor,

1.20.
50
5.2.3 Factored Moments and Shears
VLL+IM = 0.456(1.2)[58.33(1.33)+18.92]
0 456(1 2)[58 33(1 33) 18 92] = 52.5
52 5 kips
ki
Vu = 1.25(22.54k + 1.75k + 4.13 k) + 1.50(7.08 k) + 1.75(52.5 k)=

138.0 kips
MLL+IM = DF(SF)[Truck x IM + Lane]

MLL+IM = 0.336(0.905)[175
0 336(0 905)[175 k-ft(1.33)+56.76]
k ft(1 33)+56 76] = 88.0
88 0 k-ft
k ft
Mu = 1.25(71.0 k-ft + 5.25 k-ft + 13.0 k-ft)

+1.5(22.3 k-ft) +1.75(88.0 k-ft) = 299.0 k-ft = 3588 k-in

5.3 Shear Design
For shear design, the shear forces at various points along

the girder should be calculated. Normally, this is done at
the critical section, at points where strands are debonded
or harped and then at every 0.1L.
For this design example, only the shear at the critical

section is analyzed. The same procedure for the remaining
points would be used
used.

51
5.3 Shear Design
The LRFD Specifications adopted the modified compression

field theory for shear design with Version 1. This was called
the Sectional Design Model.
In Version 4 (2007), the Simplified Method was added. The

Simplified Method restores the old Vci and Vcw from the
Standard Specifications.
Both methods will be illustrated in this example.

5.3 Sectional Design Model
The sectional design model requires the calculation of two

factors:
dv
Concrete strain at : εx
2
Average shear stress in the concrete: v
These two values are used to find β and θ; which are then
used to find the strength of the concrete and the strength of
the stirrups.

52
5.3.1.1 Finding εx
dv
Strain at is:
2
Mu
+ 0.5 N u + 0.5 (Vu − V p ) cot θ − Aps f po
dv
εx = ≤ 0.001
2( Es As + E p Aps + Ec Ac )
(5.8.3.4.2-1)
This equation
q assumes the section is uncracked. If the
section is cracked, Ac in the equation above is =0.
This equation also assumes at least minimum stirrups are
used.

5.3.1.1 Finding εx
Nu = Applied factored normal force at the specified kips

section = 0
Vp = Component of the effective prestressing force in kips
the direction of the applied shear = 0
fpo = .70 f pu = 0.70(270.0) = 189 ksi

Aps = Area of prestressing steel on the flexural in2
t
tension
i side
id off th
the member
b = 20(0.153)
20(0 1 3) = 33.06
06
As = Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural in2

tension side of the member = 0
53
5.3.1.1 Finding εx
Ep = 28,500 ksi
Ac = Area of concrete on the tension half of the in2
beam
2(5.5in)(33in)(0.5) + (48in-11in)(5in) = 366.5
dv = 29.6 in
Tension Half of the Box

5.3.1.1 Finding εx
Note that θ is unknown at this point. However, the

commentary allows 0.5cotθ=1
0 5cotθ=1 as a simplification.
simplification
Assuming the section is uncracked, the strain at dv/2 is:
3588k − in
+ 138k − 3.06in 2 (189ksi )
εx = 29.6in = −82 x10−6 ≈ −0.08 x10−3
 ( ) (
2  28500ksi 3.06in + 5072ksi 366.5in 
2 2
)
Negative means “uncracked”, so the assumption of
uncracked is correct.

54
5.3.1.2 Finding vu
Vu − φV p
vu = ((5.8.2.9))
φ bv d v
Where:
vu = Shear stress in concrete Ksi
bv = Effective web width of the beam = 5.5 in
Vp = Component of the effective prestressing kips
force in the direction of the applied shear = 0
138
vu = = 0.469ksi < 0.18 f c ' = 1.26ksi
0.9(2)(5.5)(29.6)
5.3.1.3 β and θ
From LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
 vu  0.469
 '= = 0.067
f
 c 7.0
ε x = −0.08 x10−3
θ = 21.0◦
β = 4.10
55
5.3.1.3 β and θ
εx * 1,000
v/f'c
v/f c
<-0.2 <-0.1 <-0.05 <0 <0.125 <0.25 <0.5 <0.75 <1 <1.5 <2
22.3 20.4 21.0 21.8 24.3 26.6 30.5 33.7 36.4 40.8 43.9
<0.075
6.32 4.75 4.10 3.75 3.24 2.94 2.59 2.38 2.23 1.95 1.67
18.1 20.4 21.4 22.5 24.9 27.1 30.8 34.0 36.7 40.8 43.1
<0.1
3.79 3.38 3.24 3.14 2.91 2.75 2.50 2.32 2.18 1.93 1.69
19.9 21.9 22.8 23.7 25.9 27.9 31.4 34.4 37.0 41.0 43.2
<0.125
3.18 2.99 2.94 2.87 2.74 2.62 2.42 2.26 2.13 1.90 1.67
21.6 23.3 24.2 25.0 26.9 28.8 32.1 34.9 37.3 40.5 42.8
<0.15
2.88 2.79 2.78 2.72 2.60 2.52 2.36 2.21 2.08 1.82 1.61
23.2 24.7 25.5 26.2 28.0 29.7 32.7 35.2 36.8 39.7 42.2
<0.175
2.73 2.66 2.65 2.60 2.52 2.44 2.28 2.14 1.96 1.71 1.54
24.7 26.1 26.7 27.4 29.0 30.6 32.8 34.5 36.1 39.2 41.7
<0.2
2.63 2.59 2.52 2.51 2.43 2.37 2.14 1.94 1.79 1.61 1.47
26.1 27.3 27.9 28.5 30.0 30.8 32.3 34.0 35.7 38.8 41.4
<0.225
2.53 2.45 2.42 2.40 2.34 2.14 1.86 1.73 1.64 1.51 1.39
27.5 28.6 29.1 29.7 30.6 31.3 32.8 34.3 35.8 38.6 41.2
<0.25
2.39 2.39 2.33 2.33 2.12 1.93 1.70 1.58 1.50 1.38 1.29

5.3.2 Shear Strength of Concrete
The contribution of the concrete to the nominal shear

resistance is:
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv d v (5.8.3.3-3)
Vc = 0.0316 ( 4.1) 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) = 111.6k
Since Vu = 138k > φVc = 0.9(111.6k) = 100 k; at least

minimum stirrups are needed for strength.
The equations for β and θ assumed minimum stirrups.

56
5.3.3 Minimum Stirrups
v u = 0.469ksi < 0.125f c ' = 0.125 ( 7ksi ) = 0.875ksi (5.8.2.7)
s max = 0.8d v = 0.8 ( 29.6in ) = 23.7in < 24in (5.8.2.5)
smax = 23.7 in.

Calculate minimum area of steel using a 12 inch
spacing to get area of steel per foot:
A v ≥ 0.0316 f c '
b vs
= 0.0316 7ksi
(11in )(12in ) = 0.184in 2
fy 60ksi

5.3.3 Minimum Stirrups
ODOT uses #4 bars with 2 legs as standard (Av = 2(0.2

in2) = 0.4 in2) @ 12 inch o.c.
This is adequate to meet minimum.

57
5.3.4 Shear Strength of the Girder
A v f y d v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α (5.8.3.3-4)

Vs =
s
The stirrups are perpendicular to the main steel so α = 90o;
cotα = 0, sinα=1; θ = 21o
A v f yd v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α
Vs =
s
Vs =
( 0.4in
0 4in 2 ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6
29 6 ) cot ( 21) + 0 (1)
12in
Vs = 154.2k

5.3.4 Shear Strength of the Girder
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp = 111.6k + 154.2k + 0 = 265.8k

Vu = 138k < φVn = 0.9 ( 265.8k ) = 239.2k
#4 @ 12 inches is OK. Girder is OK in shear.

58
5.3.5 Maximum Nominal Shear Resistance
The upper limit of Vn, given by following equation,

is intended to ensure that the concrete in the web
of the beam will not crush prior to yield of the
transverse reinforcement.
Vn ≤ 0.25 f c'bv d v + V p (5.8.3.3-2)
With Vp=0:
Vc + Vs ≤ 0.25 f c'bv d v
111.6 + 154.2 ≤ 0.25(7)(11)(29.6)
265.8 ≤ 569.8 OK
5.4 Simplified Shear
In the 2007 LRFD Specification, the simplified shear

method is introduced.
This method brings back Vci and Vcw from the Standard
Specification.
Vcw (web shear) usually controls near the support, so

Vcw will be checked at the critical section.
Vci (flexural shear) doesn’t control near the support,

so for this example, Vc will be calculated at 0.2L.
However, in practice Vc and Vcw must be checked at
all appropriate sections.

59
5.4.1 Vcw
( )
Vcw = 0.06 f c ' + 0.3f pc b v d v + Vp (5.8.3.4.3-3)
Where:
fpc = compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for
all prestress loses) at centroid of cross section
resisting externally applied loads or at the junction
of the web and the flange when the centroid lies
within the flange (ksi)
(ksi).
For a composite section, this is the compressive stress in the

non-composite section at the composite centroid. For a non-
composite section, it is the stress at the centroid.
5.4.1 Vcw
Since this is a non-composite section, the only stress at

the centroid is the compressive stress due to the axial
component of prestressing:
Pe 537k
f pc = = 2
= 0.732ksi
A 733.5in
( )
Vcw = 0.06 7ksi + 0.3 ( 0.732ksi ) (11in )( 29.6in ) = 123.2kips

60
5.4.1 Vcw
The critical section is 29.6 inches from the face of the

support. Assuming a 1 ft bearing pad, the critical section is
approximately 3.5 feet from the end of the beam. The
transfer length is 60 bar diameters = 30 inches. Thus, the
critical section is past the transfer length, so fpc does not
have to be reduced for lack of bond.
If the critical section is within the transfer length

length, fpc is
reduced linearly.

5.4.1 Vcw
One difference between LRFD and Standard Specifications

is that LRFD uses cotθ in the Vs calculation.
calculation For Vcw, the
term cotθ must be calculated:
f pc
cot θ = 1.0 + 3 ≤ 1.8 (5.8.3.4.3-4)
fc '
0.732ksi
cot θ = 1.0 + 3 = 1.83 > 1.8; so use 1.8
7ksi
θ = 29o

61
5.4.1 Vcw
The minimum stirrup area and maximum spacing

calculated in the Sectional Model still apply here.
Assuming #4 stirrups @ 12 in:
V =
( 0.4in ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6in )(1.8 )
2
= 106.5k
s
12in
Vu = 138k < 0.9 (123.2k + 106.5k ) = 207k

5.4.2 Vci
Vci does not control near supports of simply supported

beams. It will be calculated at 0.2L = 13 ft from the
center of the support.
DC:
Beam Self-weight:
Vg = w ( 0.5L 764klf ( 00.55 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 14.9k

0 5L − x ) = 00.764klf 14 9k
M g = 0.5wx ( L − x ) = 0.5 ( 0.764klf )(13ft )( 65ft − 13ft ) = 258k − ft

62
5.4.2.1 Unfactored Dead Loads
DC:
For the diaphragm: V = 11.75
75 k (shear is constant),
constant)
M = 1.75(13) =22.8 k-ft
For the wearing surface:

Vws = 0.140klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 2.73k
M ws = 0.5 ( 0.140klf )(13ft )( 65ft − 13ft ) = 47.3k − ft

5.4.2.1 Unfactored Dead Loads
DW:
0 240klf ( 0.5
Vfws = 0.240klf 0 5 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 4.68k
4 68k
The total UNFACTORED dead load shears and
moments are:
Vd = 14.9k + 1.75k + 2.73k + 4.68k = 24.1k

Md = 258.0k-ft + 22.8k-ft +47.3k-ft + 81.1k-ft
= 409.2 k-ft = 4910 k-in
63
5.4.2.1 Factored Dead Loads
The FACTORED shears and moments are:
Vud = 1.25(14.9 k + 1.75 k + 2.73 k) + 1.50(4.68 k) = 31.3 k
Mud = 1.25(258.0k-ft + 22.8k-ft +47.3k-ft) + 1.5(81.1k-ft)

= 531.8
531 8 kk-ft
ft = 6381 kk-in
i

5.4.2.2 Live Load

This method requires two sets of shears and moments for
Live Load. The first is the loading where the shear is
maximum and the second is where the moment is
maximum.
For the lane load, the shear is maximum when the lane
load is on the right 52 ft. of the girder (see the influence line
from the sectional model):
VLane1 = 13.3k and MLane1 = 173 k-ft = 2076 k-in
The maximum moment occurs when the lane load is on the

entire girder:
VLane2 = 12.5k and MLane2 = 216.3 k-ft = 2596 k-in

64
5.4.2.2 Live Load

5.4.2.2 Live Load
Clearly, the moment is maximum when the lane load is placed along the entire
beam. The truck load is less certain. The moment at “X” is the value of the
point load times the ordinate of the influence line. Unfortunately, it is not clear
where this product will be maximum!

65
5.4.2.2 Live Load
For the truck, it is again necessary to consider two

p
placements:
Placed for maximum shear
Placed for maximum moment
In this case, it just happens that both are the same – the
rear axle placed at 0.2L as shown in the previous slide.
However, this is not always the case. It just happened that

way in this example.

5.4.2.2 Live Load
For the truck load, the maximum shear at the section and
the maximum moment at the section happen to occur
under the same loading – the rear wheel of the truck 13 ft.
from the support. In this case, the maximum shear loading
and the maximum moment loading are the same, but that is
NOT always the case. Be sure to carefully check all
reasonable load conditions.

66
5.4.2.2 Live Load
VTruck = 47.2 k and MTruck = 613 k-ft = 7356 k-in
Vu,LL = 1.75[Vtruck(1+IM) + VLane](DFV)

Vu,LL = 1.75[47.2k(1.33) + 13.3k]( 0.456) = 60.7k
Note that the skew factor is NOT applied. The

skew factor is applied only at the obtuse corner
and at 0.2L
0 2L, the section is not at the obtuse corner
corner.

5.4.2.2 Live Load
Mu,LL = 1.75[Mtruck(1+IM) + MLane](DFM)(skew factor)

Mu,LL
LL = 1.75[613
1 75[613 kk-ft(1
ft(1.33)
33) + 216.3
216 3 kk-ft](0
ft](0.336)(0.905)
336)(0 905)
= 549.0 k-ft = Mmax
Note that the Skew Factor IS Applied to moment
The shear associated with maximum moment is:

Vi = 1.75[47.2k(1.33) + 12.5k]( 0.456) = 60.0 k
Why isn’t Vi = Vu? Vi is the shear associated with maximum moment. For the
truck, the same position produced both maximum moment and shear, so Vi for
the truck is the same. For the lane, maximum shear occurs with the beam
partially loaded, but maximum moment occurs when the beam is fully loaded.
Thus, Vi is different for the lane load.

67
5.4.2.3 Determination of Cracking Load for Shear
First, find the modulus of rupture:

f r = 00.2
2 f c ' = 00.2 7ksii = 00.529ksi
2 7k 529k i (5 4 2 6)
(5.4.2.6)
Note that LRFD has 3 different MORs – be sure to use the

correct one!
Next, determine the stress at the bottom of the box due to

effective prestressing force:
537kips 537k (14.61in )
f cpe = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
 12M dnc 
M cre = Sc  f r + f cpe −  ((5.8.3.4.3-2))
 Snc 
Where:
Mdnc Unfactored moment due to dead load on the non-
= composite or monolithic section = 409.2 k-ft
(note – in k-ft; 12 in numerator converts to inches)
Snc = non-composite section modulus
Sc = composite section modulus = Snc since this is a non-
composite structure

68
 12 ( 409.2k − ft ) 
M cre = ( 6511in 3 )  0.529ksi + 1.94ksi − 
 6511in 3 
M cre = 11165k − in = 930.5k − ft

5.4.2.4 Vci
Vi M cre
Vcii = 0.02 f c 'b
b v d v + Vd + ≥ 0.06 f c 'b
bvd v
M max
(5.8.3.4.3-1)
Vci = 0.02 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) + 24.1k +

( 60.0k )( 930.5k − ft ) = 143.0k >
549k − ft
0.06 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) = 51.7k

69
5.4.2.5 Check Shear Strength
Vu = 31.3k + 60.7k = 92k
Assuming #4 @ 12; It is stated that cotθ=1 for Vci
Vs =
( 0.4in ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6in )(1.0 ) = 59.2k
2
(5.8.3.4.3)
12in
Vu = 92.0k < φVn = 0.9 (143.0k + 59.2k ) = 182.0k
The section is adequate in shear.

5.4.2.5 Check Shear Strength
If s=18”
Vs = 39.5kips
Vu = 92.0k < φVn = 0.9 (143.0k + 39.5k ) = 164k

70
Shear Strength
Why are there different values for Vs ?
Sectional Model: Vs = 154.2k

154 2k
Simplified Model for Vcw ; Vs = 105k
Simplified Model for Vci ; Vs = 59.2k
The answer is the θ angle. For sectional model, θ=21o. For

Vcw, θ =29o and for Vci, θ=45o. This affects the number of
p which cross the shear crack. The smaller the angle,
stirrups g ,
the more stirrups which cross the crack and the higher Vs.

5.6 Minimum Longitudinal Steel
At each section:
Mu 5N u  Vu
00.5N 
A ps f ps + As f y ≥ + + − Vp − 0.5Vs  cot θ (5.8.3.5-1)
φd v φ  φ 
For this example, the minimum longitudinal steel will be

checked at the critical section. The critical section 29.6
inches from the face of the support. Allowing for a 1 ft.
bearing pad and one foot from center of bearing to the end
of the girder, the critical section is 47.6 inches from the end
of the girder. However, it is necessary to see if the strand
stress is reduced by lack of development.

71
The development length equation is unchanged for strand

from Standard Specifications, except that a factor, κ is
added.
dd d Thi
This ffactor
t iis th
the resultlt off an O
October,
t b 1988 FHWA
memorandum suggesting the need for this conservative
multiplier because of strand/bond problems:
 2   2 
l d = κ  f ps − f pe  d b = 1.6  260 − (175.4 )  ( 0.5 ) = 114.5in
 3   3 
((5.11.4.2))
The terms fps (steel stress at strength limit) and fpe (effective
prestressing stress after losses) were calculated previously.
κ = 1.6 for member over 24 inches deep (5.11.4.2).

The critical section occurs at 47.6 inches from the end of

the beam, but the development length is 114.5 inches.
Thus, the steel stress MUST be reduced to account for
lack of development.
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe )
(5.11.4.2-4)

72
l ppx − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe )
47.6in − 30in
f px = 174.5ksi + ( 260.0ksi − 174.5ksi ) = 192.0ksi
114.5in − 30in


The following values were previously calculated or
determined:
(0 153in2)(20)(260ksi)= 3.06
Aps = (0.153in 3 06 in2
Mu = 3588 k-in
Vu = 138 k
θ = 21o (Sectional Design Model)
Vs = 153 k (Sectional Design Model)
Nu = Vp = 0
φ = 1 for moment; 0.9 for shear
Asfy = assumed 0 (ignore any mild steel)
fpe = 175.4 ksi
fps = 260.0 ksi
73
Mu 0.5N u  Vu 
A ps f ps + A s f y ≥ + + − Vp − 0.5Vs  cot θ
φd v φ  φ 
3.06in 2 (192.0ksi ) = 588k
3588k − in  138k 
> + − 0.5( 153k )  cot ( 21) = 321k
1.0 ( 29.6in )  0.9 
OK
Note that before the 2005/06 interim, the steel stress was assumed linear with
development length, not bilinear. If the stress were assumed linear here, mild
steel would need to be added. Also note that Vs < Vu/φ = 153k

Check the inside face of the bearing pad. Assuming a 12 in

pad and one foot from center of bearing to the end, the
i id off th
inside the pad
d iis 12
12+66 = 18 inches
i h ffrom th
the end
d off th
the
girder. This is inside the transfer length:
 18in 
f px = 174.5ksi   = 104.7 ksi
 30in 
Vu
Ap f pps ≥ − 0.5Vs cot θ
φ
 138k 
3.06in 2 (104.7 ksi ) = 320k >  − 0.5( 153k )  cot ( 21) = 199k
 0.9 
OK

74
If the stirrup spacing is increased to 18”, Vs = 103 k
Vu
Ap f ps ≥ − 0.5Vs cot θ
φ
 138k 
3.06in 2 (104.7 ksi ) = 320k >  − 0.5( 103k )  cot ( 21) = 265k
 0.9 
OK

5.7 Anchorage Zone Bursting Stirrups
As in the Standard Specification, LRFD requires

bursting g stirrups
p which can resist at least 4% of the
initial prestressing force, with a stress of no more
than 20ksi:
Pr = 20(0.153)(202.5)(0.04) = 24.8
24.8
As = = 1.24
20
This steel must be distributed over h/4 from the end. For this girder,
h/4=33/4=8.25 inches. Four #4 double leg stirrups @ 3” provides 1.60
in2 over 8 inches.

75
6.1 Exterior Girder - Moment
The exterior girder takes the railing load (DC):

0.090klf ( 65 ft )
2
Mb = = 47.5k − ft = 570k − in
8
Note: Article 4.6.2.2.1 allows the rail load to be equally

distributed to all the girders. However, it does not have to
be and, in this case, it is probably more correct to assign the
g to the exterior g
railing girder.

The live load moments must be multiplied by the exterior

girder factor.

g ext = eg int
(Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1)
d
e = 1.04 + e > 1
25
Since the rail is right at the edge of the box
box, de = half the
web width = 2.75 inches = 0.23 ft.
0.23
e = 1.04 + = 1.049
25
76
One lane loaded:

g ext = eg int
(Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1)
4 6 2 2 2d-1)
d
e = 1.125 + e > 1
30
0.23 Controls
e = 1.125 + = 1.133
30

M u = 1.25 ( 515.3 + 47.5 ) + 1.50 (126.8 ) + 1.75 ( 362.3 + 102.7 )(1.133)

M u = 1815k − ft = 21790k − in
For the interior box with 20 strands, φMn = 23550 k-in so

OK for Mu.
Note that there is only one DFM, so the one lane e is multiplied by the
DFM. In tthee equation
equat o abo
above,
e, tthe
e ttruck
uc load
oad (36
(362.3
3 k-ft)
t) iss already
a eady
multiplied by the interior DFM and the impact factor; the lane load
(102.7 k-ft) is multiplied by the DFM (no impact on lane load). Thus, it
is only necessary to multiply by the increasing factor.

77
Stresses at transfer do not need to be checked as

these stress occur during fabrication are independent
of the railing load and the live load.
The check performed on the interior girders is

sufficient.

Service load stresses should be checked. It is clear by

inspection that service load compression stresses are OK
(see Section 2.3.3). Check Service III:
M = ( 515.3 + 47.5 ) + (126.8 ) + 0.8 ( 362.3 + 102.7 )(1.133) = 1111k − ft = 13330k − in

13330k − in
fbottom = = 2.05ksi
6511in3
fpb = 1.94 ksi compression (previously calculated)
fbottom = 1.94 ksi – 2.05 ksi = -0.110 ksi = 0.110 tension <
0.503 ksi tension OK
78
6.1 Exterior Girder - Shear
This check must be performed at all sections. Only the

critical section is shown here. The check is also made
using Sectional Model.
At the critical section:
Vr = w ( 0.5L − x ) = 0.090klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 3ft ) = 2.65k

M r = 0.5wx ( L − x ) = 0.5 ( 0.090klf )( 3ft )( 65ft − 3ft ) = 8.37k − ft

Two or more lanes loaded: (Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1)

 48 
 b 
0.5
 b 
 d e + 12 − 2 
e = 1+   ≥1
 40 
 
05
0.5
 48 
 0.23 + 12 − 2 
e = 1+   = 1.234
 40 
 

79
One Lane Loaded: (Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1)

g ext = eg int
i
de
e = 1.125 + ≥1
20
0.23
e = 1.125 + = 1.137
20
Check:
Two or more lanes: e*DFV
*DFV = 1.234(0.456) 562 controls
1 234(0 456) = 00.562
One Lane: e*DFV = 1.137(0.445) = 0.506
Because there are two DFV, each must be checked!

Vu,LL = 0.562(1.2)[58.33(1.33) + 18.92] = 65.08k
VLL,truck = 58.33k
VLL,lane = 18.92k
IM = 0.33
Skew Factor = 1.2
Vu = 1.25(22.54k + 1.75k + 4.13 k+2.65)

+ 1.50 (7.08 k) + 1.75(65.08k)= 163.3 k
Using the Sectional Design Model, Mu = 3714k-in, β= 3.24,
θ=21.4o, φVn = 215 k, so OK.
80
6.1 Exterior Girder
What about the minimum exterior girder distribution

factor? N L
X Ext ∑ e
NL
DFExt ,Min = + Nb
Nb
∑x 2
This DOES NOT apply to

adjacent box girder bridges. It
only applies to slab/beam
bridges (Types a, e and k) with
diaphragms or cross braces.

2.5.2.6.2 Deflection
ODOT invokes Article 2.5.2.6.2,which limits Live Load

d fl ti tto L/800 ffor precast,
deflection t simple
i l span girders.
id
Camber calculations are not directly addressed in LRFD

(They were not directly addressed in the Standard
Specifications, either).
The same methods used for finding camber and deflection

used for Standard Specifications apply for LRFD Designs.

81
Since this is a limit on FLEXURAL deflection, it is

appropriate to use the MDF.
MDF = 0.336(0.905) = 0.304
Lane Load = 0.640(0.304) = 0.194klf
Axle Load (rear) = 32k(1.33)(0.304)=12.9k (includes impact)
Axle Load (front) = 8k(1.33)(0.304) = 3.22k (includes impact)

Here are the live loads positioned for maximum deflection.

65ft (12 )
Using analysis software: δ = 0.654in < = 0.975in
800

82
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications –
Design Example 2
2 Span Continuous Prestressed I-Girder Bridge
RICHARD MILLER
Design Example - Continuous Two-Span I-Girder Bridge
98’-0” 98’-0”
CL to CL of Bearings 1’-9” CL to CL of Bearings

96’-3” 96’-3”
This design example demonstrates the design of a two-span (98 ft. each)
AASHTO TypeT pe IV – I girder with
ith no ske
skew, as sho
shown.n This eexample
ample illillustrates
strates the
design of typical interior beam at the critical sections for positive flexure, negative
flexure, shear, and the continuity connection.
References:
•“Precast Prestressed Concrete Bridge Design Manual,” Published by Precast/Prestressed concrete Institute

1

34’-0”
8.5” structural+ 1.0”

wearing
Type IV
2.5’ 4 Spaces @ 8’-0” = 32’-0” 2.5’

37’-0”
Actual thickness, ts = 9.5 in Structural thickness = 8.5 in.

Note that 1.0 in wearing surface is considered to be an integral part of the 8.5 in deck.
fc’ = 4.5 ksi @ 28 days Concrete unit weight, wc=0.150 kcf

1’-8”
Precast Beams
8”
AASHTO Type IV girder shown
fc’ = 7.0 ksi @ 28 days 6”
fci’ = 4.5 ksi

6” 8”
Concrete unit weight, wc=0.150 kcf
1’-11”
The ODOT Bridge Design 4’-6”
Manual (BDM) gives a range of
9”
strengths for the precast.
These strengths are chosen
from that range
range. The BDM 9”
9
also gives the deck strength

(302.5.2.8). 8”
2’-2”

2
Prestressing Strand
½ in diameter, low-relaxation
Ultimate strength,
g , fpu = 270.0 ksi
The ODOT BDM allows ½ inch, ½ inch special or 0.6 inch diameter strand
(302.5.2.2a). For this girder, ½ inch diameter is chosen.
Reinforcing Bars
Yield strength, fy = 60 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, Es = 29,000 ksi (BDM 302.5.2.9)
Loads
Future wearing surface: 0.060 ksf (ODOT Std. Drawings)
Barriers: 0.640 k/ft each

Non-Composite Section Properties
Area in2 789 LRFD uses ksi

Weight (lb/ft) 822 units.
h (in) 54
yb (in) 24.73
yt (in) 29.27
I (in4) 260,741
Sb (in3) 10,542
St (in3) 8,909
EC = 33, 000 K1wC1.5 f c ' (5.4.2.4-1)
EC = 33, 000 × 1.0 × 0.1501.5 4.5 = 4, 067 ksi At Transfer

EC = 33, 000 × 1.0 × 0.1501.5 7.0 = 5, 072 ksi At Service Loads
3
Effective Flange Width
(1/4) Span = (96.25 ft)(12in/ft)/4 = 289 in

12ts p
plus the ggreater of the web thickness or ½ the beam
top flange width:
ts = 8.5 in (slab thickness - use structural thickness
only)
web thickness = 8 in
½ top flange = 0.5(20 in) = 10 in (Greatest)
12(8.5 in) + 10 in = 112 in

Average spacing between beams = 8 ft = 96 in
(CONTROLS)
(4.6.2.6)
EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH = 96 in Interior Girder

Transformed Section Properties

96”
Transformed flange width = 76.98”
n(effective flange width) = 8.5”
(0.8019)(96) = 76.98 in
Transformed flange area = 54”

n(effective flange width)(ts) =
(0.8019)(96)(8.5) = 654.35 in2
26”
Note that only the structural thickness of the deck, 8.5 in, is considered.
A 2” haunch is assumed for calculating weight but not for finding
composite properties (ODOT BDM 302.5.2.3).
4
Properties of Composite Section
Ac = Total area of composite section = 1,443 in2

hc = Overall depth of the composite section = 62.5 in
Ic = Moment of inertia of the composite section = 666,579 in4
ybc = Distance from the centroid of the composite section to the = 39.93 in
extreme bottom fiber of the precast beam
ytg = Distance from the centroid of the composite section to the = 14.07 in
extreme top fiber of the precast beam
ytc = Distance from the centroid of the composite section to the = 22.57 in.
extreme top fiber of the slab
b = Composite section modulus for the extreme bottom fiber of the
Sbc = 16,694 in3
precast beam
Stg = Composite section modulus for the top fiber of the precast beam = 47,376 in3
Stc = Composite section modulus for extreme top fiber of the deck slab = 29,534 in3

Dead Loads
DC = Dead load of structural components and non-

structural attachments
Slab: (96 in)(9.5 in)(0.150 kcf)/(144 in /ft ) = 0.95 klf

2 2
Haunch: (2 in)(20 in)(0.150 kcf)/(144 in /ft ) = 0.042 klf

2 2
[ODOT BDM 302.5.2.3]
Note: The actual slab thickness of 9.5” is used in

calculating dead loads. The 2” haunch thickness is also
used in calculating dead loads.

5
Dead Loads
The intermediate diaphragms are assumed as steel “X”

braces These are ignored in these dead load
braces.
calculations. The weight of each brace is less than 0.3
kips. The moment caused by these braces is << 1% of
the total DL moment.

Dead Loads
DC Dead Loads carried by the continuous structure, composite section:

According to LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.1 permanent loads may be
distributed uniformly amount all beams if the following conditions are
met:
de = 2.5 ft – 1.5 ft = 1.0 ft
Curvature in plan < Specified in Article 4.6.1.2 OK
Cross Section listed in Table 4 4.6.2.2.1
6 2 2 1-1
1 OK
The section meets the criteria, so the loads may be uniformly

distributed to the girders.

6
Dead Loads
Partial of Table 4.6.2.2.1-1 - This example is a Type “k”
Future Wearing Surface = 0.060 ksf

(0.060 ksf)(34 ft)/5 beams = 0.408 kips/ft/girder
ODOT Std. Drawings
Barrier = 0.640 klf

2 each (0.640)/5 girders = 0.256 kips/ft/girder

Dead Loads
LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.1 allows the slab weight to be evenly

distributed to the girders in the same manner as the wearing
surface and the barriers. In this case, the decision has been
made to use tributary areas to distribute the slab weight to the
girders. Either method is allowable.

7
DL-Unfactored Shear Forces & Bending Moments

Deck plus Future Wearing
Beam Weight Haunch Barrier Weight Surface
Location [Simple Span] [Simple Span] [Continuous Span] [Continuous Span]
Shear
Sh M g, Shear
Sh Ms, Shear
Sh M b, Shear
Sh Mws,
x ft. x/L kips kip-ft kips kip-ft kips kip-ft kips kip-ft
0.00 0.00 39.6 0 47.7 0 9.2 7.7 14.7 12.4
9.26 0.10 31.9 331 38.5 399.3 6.8 81.8 10.9 130.5
18.97 0.20 24 602.6 28.9 727 4.3 136 6.9 217
28.69 0.30 16 796.5 19.3 961.1 1.8 166 2.9 264.9
38.41 0.40 8 912.9 9.6 1101.5 -0.6 171.9 -1 274.2
48.13 0.50 0 951.9 0 1148.4 -3.1 153.6 -5 245.1
57.84 0.60 -8 912.9 -9.6 1101.5 -5.6 111.2 -8.9 177.5
67.56 0.70 -16 796.5 -19.3 961.1 -8.1 44.7 -12.9 71.3
77.28 0.80 -24 602.6 -28.9 727 -10.6 -46 -16.9 -73.4
86.99 0.90 -31.9 331 -38.5 399.3 -13.1 -160.8 -20.8 -256.7
96.25 Brg. -39.6 0 -47.7 0 -15.4 -292.7 -24.6 -467.1

Live Loads
According to LRFD Article 4.6.1.2.1 vehicular live loading on
the roadways of bridges or incidental structures, designated
HL-93,, shall consists of a combination of the:
Design truck or design tandem with dynamic allowance.

The design truck shall consists of an 8.0 kip front axle and
a pair of 32.0 kip back axles. The first and second axle are
spaced 14’-0” apart. The space between the rear axles
shall be varied between 14.0’ and 30.0’ to produce extreme
g tandem shall consist of a p
force effects. The design pair of
25.0 kip axles spaced 4.0’ apart. [LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.2
and 3.6.1.2.3]
Design lane load shall consist of a load of 0.64 kip/ft
uniformly distributed in the longitudinal direction. [LRFD
Article 3.6.1.2.4]
8
Live Loads
For negative moment between inflection points,

90% of the effect of two design trucks (HL-93
(HL 93
with 14 ft. axle spacing) spaced at a minimum of
50 ft. combined with 90% of the design lane
load.
Inflection points are determined by loading all
spans with a uniform load.
Note: See the Loads Module for a complete

explanation of how this is applied.

Distribution Factors
The live load bending moments and shear forces are

determined by using the simplified distribution factor
formulas [LRFD 4.6.2.2].
4 6 2 2] To use the simplified live load
distribution factor formulas, the following conditions must
be met [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1]
de = 2.5 ft – 1.5 ft = 1.0 ft
Curvature in plan
< Specified in Article 4.6.1.2 OK
For a precast concrete I-girder with cast in place deck,
the bridge type is (k).
9
Distribution Factors
The number of design lanes should be determined by

taking the integer part of the ratio w/12, where w is the
clear roadway width in ft between curbs and/or barriers.
w = 34 feet
Number of design lanes = integer part of (34/12) =

2
(3.6.1.1.1)
N t It could
Note: ld be
b argued d that
th t this
thi should
h ld b be ddesigned
i d as a th
three llane
bridge because 3 – 11 ft lanes would fit and the minimum lane width is
10ft. However, the distribution factor is for 2 or more lanes loaded and
the number of lanes isn’t in the equation so it doesn’t matter.

Distribution Factors for Bending Moment
For all limit states except for fatigue limit state.

0.6 0.2 0.1
 S   S   Kg  (Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1)
DFM = 0.075 +      3 
 9.5   L   12 Lts 
Where DFM = distribution factor for moment for interior beam. Provided:
3.5 < S < 16.0 S=8 OK S = Spacing, ft
4.5 < ts < 12.0 ts = 8.5 OK ts = slab thickness, in
Nb > 4 Nb = 5 OK Nb = number of beams
10,000 < Kg < Kg = See next Kg = longitudinal stiffness
7,000,000 slide parameter, in4

10
(
K g = n I + Aeg2 ) (4.6.2.2.1-1)
Where:
n = modular ratio between beam and deck materials
Ec (beam) 5, 072
= = = 1.247
Ec ( slab) 4, 067
A = cross-section area of the beam (non-composite), in2
= 789
I = moment of inertia of the beam (non-composite), in4
= 260,741
eg= Distance between the c.g. of beam and slab, in
= (8.5/2+2.0+29.27) = 35.52
K g = 1.247
1 247 260 (
260, 741 + 789 ( 35.52
35 52 )
2
)
K g = 1,566, 480 in 4
10,000 < Kg < 7,000,000 OK

11

0.6 0.2 0.1
 8   8   1,566, 480 
DFM = 0.075 +      3 
 9.5   98   12*98*8.5 
DFM = 0.665


0.4 0.3 0.1
 S   S   Kg 
DFM = 0.06 +      3 
 14   L   12 Lt s 
0.4 0.3 0.1
 8   8   1,566, 480 
DFM = 0.06 +      3 
 14   98   12*98*8.5 
DFM = 0.467
The case of two or more design lanes loaded controls,

DFM = 0.665 lanes/beam
12
Distribution Factors for Shear Force

2
S   S 
DFV = 0.2 +   −   (4.6.2.2.1-1)
 12   35 
Where DFV = distribution factor for moment for interior beam.
Provided:
3.5 < S < 16.0 S=8 OK S = Spacing,
p g, ft
4.5 < ts < 12.0 ts = 8.5 OK ts = slab thickness, in
Nb > 4 Nb = 5 OK Nb = number of beams
2
 8  8 
DFV = 0.2 +   −  
 12   35 
DFV = 0.814

13

 S 
DFV = 0.36 +  
 25 
 8 
DFV = 0.36 +  
 25 
DFV = 0.68
The case of two or more design lanes loaded controls,

DFV = 0.814 lanes/beam

Dynamic Allowance
IM = 33%
Where: IM = dynamic load allowance
allowance, applied only to truck
load

14
Unfactored Shear Force and Bending Moments
Unfactored shear forces and bending moment due to HL-

93 truck, per beam:
VLT = (shear force per lane)(DFV)(1+IM)
= (shear force per lane)(0.814)(1.33)
= (shear force per lane)(1.083) kips
MLT= (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(1+IM)

= (bending moment per lane)(0.884) kips-ft

Unfactored shear forces and bending moment due to HL-

93 lane load, per beam:
VLANE = (shear force per lane)(DFV)
= (shear force per lane)(0.814) kips
MLANE= (bending moment per lane)(DFM)

= (bending moment per lane)(0.665) kip-ft

15
Location HL-93 Live Load

Max Max. Positive Max. Negative
Distance
Di t S ti
Section Shear
Sh M
Moment t M
Moment t
x ft. x/L kips MLL+I, kip-ft MLL+I, kip-ft
0.00 0.00 89.4 48.5 -5.6
9.26 0.10 76.3 624.6 -83.3
18.97 0.20 62.7 1049.3 -163.4
28.69 0.30 50.1 1300.5 -243.6
38.41 0.40 39.9 1412.4 -323.7
48.13 0.50 -48.3 1386.2 -403.9
57.84 0.60 -60.3 1239.1 -484
67.56 0.70 -72.2 961.1 -564.2
77.28 0.80 -83.8 577.5 -776.2
86.99 0.90 -95 215.9 -877.6
96.25 Brg. -104.6 14.8 -1380.7

Shown in the preceding table are maximum values of

shear positive moment
shear, moment, and negative moment
moment. The
maximum values at a given location are not necessarily
from the same load case.

16
Load Combinations

Service I:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
Maximum Q = 11.25(DC)
25(DC) + 1
1.50(DW)
50(DW) + 1
1.75(LL
75(LL + IM)
Minimum Q = 0.90(DC) + 0.65(DW) + 1.75(LL + IM)

Load Combinations
A reminder:
This is a continuous bridge

bridge, so both maximum and minimum load
combinations must be considered.
Remember, in some cases loads mitigate load effects in other

spans, but it is not appropriate to use different load factors for the
same analysis. For example, the DC in one span mitigates the
positive moment in the other span; but it is not appropriate to use
different load factors in this case!

17
Load Combinations
The required number of strands is usually governed by Service III load

combination at the section of maximum moment or harp points.
In a continuous for live load structure, the maximum moments do not

occur at the same place for each load. The point of maximum moment
depends on whether the load was applied to the continuous or simple
structure. Thus, each point must be checked for the combinations of
loads.
In this structure, the maximum flexural stresses occur at Midspan (48.13)

feet for Service I and Service III (although this is NOT where the
continuous load moments are maximum). The Strength I maximum is at
0.4L. It is inappropriate to simply take maximum moments without regard
to location along the length of the girder.

Load Combinations
Service 1 Service 3 Strength 1 Length
V M V M V M
k k-ft k k-ft k k-ft ft.
200 6
200.6 68 6
68.6 182 72
182.72 58 9 299.125
58.9 299 125 113 1
113.1 Bearing 0
192.6 431.7 175.3 393.72 287.45 644.925 Trans. 2.04
189.8 549.9 172.7 502.76 283.375 817.925 H/2 2.73
164.4 1567.2 149.14 1442.28 246.375 2303.925 0.10L 9.26
126.8 2731.9 114.26 2522.04 191.575 3993.775 0.20L 18.97
90.1 3489 80.08 3228.9 138.4 5077.725 0.30L 28.69
55.9 3872.9 47.92 3590.42 89.575 5615.875 0.40L 38.41
-56.4 3885 -46.74 3607.76 -95.9 5610.625 MidSpan 48.13
-92.4 3542.2 -80.34 3294.38 -147.875 5091.675 0.60L 57.84
-128.5
128 5 2834 7
2834.7 -114.06
114 06 2642.48
2642 48 -199.95
199 95 4041.75
4041 75 0 70L
0.70L 67 56
67.56
-164.2 434 -147.44 589.24 -251.375 -329.31 0.80L 77.28
-199.3 -564.8 -180.3 -389.28 -301.825 -1464.58 0.90L 86.99
-222.3 -1614.4 -201.94 -1375.8 -334.65 -2795.88 H/2 93.52
-224.8 -1742.2 -204.3 -1494.76 -338.2 -2961.82 Trans. 94.21
-231.9 -2140.5 -210.98 -1864.36 -348.325 -3482.75 Bearing 96.25

18
Determining Number of Strands from Service Load Stresses at

Midspan
At this point,
point it is necessary to determine the needed
number of strands. Box girders tend to be controlled by the
Strength Limit State, but “I” girders (this example) tend to be
controlled by service load tensions.
The initial estimate of number of strands will be found from

the Service III combination. Recall that Service III ONLY
applies to tension in prestressed sections.

Service Load Stresses at Midspan
Bottom tensile stress due to applied dead and live loads using load
combination Service III:
Mg + Ms M b + M ws + (0.8)( M LL + I )
fb = +
Sb Sbc
Where:
Mg = Unfactored bending moment due to beam self-weight, kip-ft
Ms = Unfactored bending moment due to slab and haunch kip-ft
weights,
i ht
Mb = Unfactored bending moment due to due to barrier weights, kip-ft
Mws = Unfactored bending moment due to future wearing surface, kip-ft
19
Service Load Stresses at Midspan
(951.9 + 1,148.4)(12) [153.6 + 245.1 + (0.8)(1,386.2)] (12)

fb = +
10 542
10,542 16
16, 694
fb = 2.39 + 1.08
fb = 3.47 ksi
Stress Limits for Concrete
= 0.19 f c' (Table 5.9.4.2.2-1)
= 0.19 7.0 = 0.503ksi

Required Compressive Stress From Strands
f pb = (3.47 − 0.503) = 2.97 ksi
Required Number of Strands
Assume a strand center of gravity at midspan as 8% of the

height
g of the g
girder.
ybs = 0.08(54) = 4.32in

So the strand eccentricity at the midspan is:
ec = ( yb − ybs
b ) = (24.73
(24 73 − 44.32)
32) = 20.41
20 41in

20
If Ppe is the total prestressing force, the stress at the bottom

fiber due to p prestress is:
Ppe Ppe ec
f pb = +
A Sb
Now plug in the required recompression stress, fpb and
solve form Ppe:
Ppe Ppe (20.41)
( )
2.97 = +
789 10,542
Ppe = 927kips
The required prestressing force after all

losses is 927 kips
kips. This is after an assumed
25% loss. That means the initial prestressing
force will be approximately 1240 kips. Check
with your local precast producer to ensure the
capacity prestressing beds can withstand this
force
force.

21
Final prestress force per strand

= (area of strand)(fpi)(1-losses, %)
where
h fpi = initial
i iti l prestressing
t i stress
t before
b f ttransfer,
f kksii
= 0.75fpu = 202.5 ksi
Assuming 25% loss of prestress the final prestressing force
per strand after losses is:
F = (0.153)(202.5)(1 − 0.25) = 23.2kips / strand
927
Number of strands required = = 39.9 strands
23.2
Try (40) ½ in diameter, 270 ksi, low-lax strands.
Strand Pattern
At midspan:
No. Distance from

Strands bottom (in)
7 8
11 6
11 4
11 2
2” 10 Spa. 2”
@ 2”
22
Strand Pattern
The distance between the center of gravity of strands and

the bottom concrete fiber of the beam is, ybs, is:
[(11)2 + (11)4 + (11)6 + (7)8]

ybs = = 4.70in
40
Strand eccentricity at midspan:
ec = yb − ybs = 24.73
24 73 − 4.70
4 70 = 20
20.0
0iin

Prestress Losses

∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5 9 5 1 1)
(5.9.5.1-1)
Where:
∆fpLT = loss due to long-term shrinkage and creep of

23
Elastic Shortening
Ep
∆f pES = f cgp
Ect (5.9.5.2.3a-1)
Where:
fcgp = The concrete stress at the center of gravity of prestressing
tendons due to the prestressing force immediately after the
transfer and the self-weight of the member at the section of
the maximum moment (ksi).
Pi Pe 2
M g ec
= + i c −
A I I
Ect = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at the time of transfer or
time of load application (ksi).

Elastic Shortening
According to the LRFD Commentary for pretensioned

members, the loss due to elastic shortening may be
determined by the following alternative equation (this is the
calculation of elastic shortening loss by transformed section):
∆f pES =
AI E
Aps ( I g + em2 Ag ) + g g ct
Ep
(C5.9.5.2.3a-1)
24
Elastic Shortening
Aps = Area of prestressing steel, 40(0.153) = 6.12 in2

fpi = Prestressing steel stress immediately prior to transfer,
202.5 ksi
Ag = Gross area of section, 789 in2
Ect = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at transfer, 4,067 ksi
Ep = Elastic Modulus of the prestressing steel, 28,500 ksi
em = Average prestressing steel eccentricity at midspan,
20.0 in
Ig = Moment of inertia of the gross concrete section,
260,741 in4
Mg = Midspan moment due to member self-weight,
951.9(12) = 11,422.8 kip-in
Elastic Shortening
6 12* 202
6.12* 5(260 741 + 20.0
202.5(260, 20 02 *789) − 20.0*11,
20 0*11 422.8*789
422 8*789
∆f pES =
789* 260, 741* 4, 067
6.12(260, 741 + 20.02 *789) +
28,500
∆f pES = 16.24ksi
Note: If the self weight moment is calculated using total beam length
rather than c/c bearing, the moment becomes 11641 k-in. The elastic
shortening loss becomes 16.13 ksi; < 1% different.

25
Long-Term Losses
For standard, precast, pretensioned members subject to

g and environmental conditions:
normal loading
f pi Aps
∆f pLT = 10 γ hγ st + 12γ hγ st + ∆f pR (5.9.5.3-1)
Ag
In which:
γ h = 1.7
1 7 − 0.01
0 01H
H (5 9 5 3-2)
(5.9.5.3-2)
5
γ st =
1 + f ci ' (5.9.5.3-3)

Long-Term Losses
Where:

γh = Correction factor for relative humidity of the ambient air
γhst = Correction factor for specified concrete strength at time
of Prestress transfer to the concrete member
∆fpR = An estimate of relaxation loss taken as 2 2.5
5 ksi for low
relaxation strand

26
Long-Term Losses
Assume H = 70%
γ h = 1.7
1 7 − 00.01*70
01*70 = 11.00
00
5
γ st = = 0.91
1 + 4.5
So:
202.5*6.12
∆f pLT = 10 1.00*0.91 + 12*1.00*0.91 + 2.5
789
∆f pLT = 14.29 + 10.92 + 2.5
∆f pLT = 27.71 ksi

Total Losses at Service Loads
∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT (5.9.5.1-1)
∆f pT = 16.24 + 27.71
∆f pT = 43.95
f pe = 202.5 − 43.95 = 158.6
Losses are approximately 22% < 25% OK

27
Stresses at Transfer
Force per strand after initial losses:

Stress in tendons after transfer:
f pt = f pi − ∆f pi = 202.5 − 16.24 = 186.26ksi

Force per strand = fpt(strand area) = 186.26(0.153) = 28.50
kips
Therefore, the total prestressing force after transfer is, Pi =

1,140 kips

In this example, Pi is determined by subtracting the elastic

shortening loss from the initial stress.
In the previous example, Pi was found by assuming the

stress after transfer was 0.9fpi.
Either method is acceptable. If 0.9fpi is used, Pi = 1115

kips. The difference is 2%
kips 2%.

28
Compression:
2.700 ksi
0.60fcii’ = 0.60(4.5) = +2.700 (5 9 4 1 1)
(5.9.4.1.1)
Tension:
1. In areas other than the precompressed tensile zone
and without bonded reinforcement
ft = 0.0948 f ci' ≤ 0.2ksi

((5.9.4.1.2))
ft = 0.0948 4.5 ≤ 0.2ksi
0.201ksi ≤ 0.2ksi
Therefore, 0.200 ksi (CONTROLS)
2. In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to

resist the tensile force in the concrete computed
assuming an uncracked section, where
reinforcement is proportioned using a stress of
0.5fy, not to exceed 30 ksi.
ft = 0.24 f ci' = 0.24 4.5 = 0.509ksi

(5.9.4.1.2)

29
Stresses At Transfer Length Section
Stresses at this location need only be checked at release

since this stage almost always governs. Also, losses with
time will reduce the concrete stresses making them less
critical.
Transfer length = 60(strand diameter)

= 60(0.5) = 30 in = 2.5 ft (5.8.2.3)
The bending moment at a distance 2.5 ft from the end of

the beam due to beam self-weight is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(2.5)(97.167 − 2.5) = 97.3k − ft
Compute top stress at the top fiber of the beam:
Pi Pe M
ft = − i + g
A St St
1,140 1,140(20.0) 97.3(12)
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
f t = 1.44
1 44 − 22.56
56 + 00.13
13 = −00.99
99ksi
Tensile stress limit for concrete with bonded reinforcement:

0.509 ksi NG
30
Compute bottom stress at the bottom fiber of the beam:
Pi Pe M
ft = + i − g
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 97.3(12)
ft = + −
789 10,542 10,542
ft = 1.44
1 44 + 2.16
2 16 − 0.11
0 11 = +3.49
3 49ksi
Compressive stress limit for concrete:

+2.700 ksi NG
Harp 9 strands at the 0.35L points as shown.
At Midspan At ends
No. Distance from No. Distance from
Strands bottom (in) Strands bottom (in)
7 8 3 52
11 6 3 50
11 4 3 48
11 2 4 8
8 6
8 4
11 2

31
4”
9 Strands
50”
2’-6” 31 Strands ψ
34’-0” 14’-7”
48’-7”

The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands at

the end of the beam and the top fiber of the precast beam is:
3(2) + 3(4) + 3(6)
= 4.00 in
9
The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands at
the harp point and the bottom fiber of the precast beam is:
3(4) + 3(6) + 3(8)
= 6.00 in
9
The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands and
the top fiber of the beam at the transfer length section is:
(54 − 6 − 4)
4.00 + (2.5) = 7.25in
34

32
The distance between the center of gravity of the 31 straight bottom

strands and the extreme bottom fiber of the beam is:
11(2) + 8(4) + 8(6) + 4(8)
= 4.32 in
31
The distance between the center of gravity of the total number of the
strands and the bottom fiber of the precast beam at the transfer length
is:
9(54 − 7.25) + 31(4.32)
= 13.87in
40
Eccentricity of the strand group at transfer length is:
24.73 − 13.87 = 10.86 in

The distance between the center of gravity of the total number of the
strands and the bottom fiber of the precast beam at the end of the
beam is:
9(54 − 4) + 31(4.32)
= 14.60 in
40
The eccentricity at the end of the beam is:
24.73 − 14.60 = 10.13 in

33
Recompute top and bottom stresses at the transfer length

section using the harped pattern. Concrete stress at the top
fiber of the beam:
1,140 1,140(10.86) 97.3(12)

ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
f t = 1.44 − 1.39 + 0.13 = +0.18ksi
Compressive stress limit for concrete: +2.700 ksi OK

At the bottom:
1,140 1,140(10.86) 97.3(12)

fb = + −
789 10,542 10,542
f b = 1.44 + 1.17 − 0.11 = +2.50ksi
Compressive stress limit for concrete: +2
+2.700
700 ksi OK

34
Stresses at Harp Points
The strand eccentricity at the harp points is the same as at

the midspan,
ec = 20.0 in
The bending moment due to beam self-weight at a distance

34.00’ from the end of the beam is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(34.00)(97.17 − 34.00) = 882.7 k − ft

Concrete stress at the top fiber of the beam:
Pi Pe Mg
ft = − i +
A St St
1,140 1,140(20.0) 882.7 *12
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
ft = 1.44 − 2.56 + 1.19 = +0.07

35
Pi Pe M
fb = + i − g
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 882.7 *12
fb = + −
789 10,542 10,542
f b = 1.44
1 44 + 22.16
16 − 1.00
1 00 = +2.60
2 60

Stresses at Midspan
The bending moment due to beam self-weight at a distance

48’-7” (midspan) from the end of the beam is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(48.58)(97.17 − 48.58) = 970.1k − ft

P Pe M g
ft = i − i +
A St St
1,140 1,140(20.0) 970.1*12
ft = − + = 1.44 − 2.56 + 1.31 = +0.19
789 8,909 8,909
36
Stresses at Midspan

Pe M g
Pi P
fb = + i −
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 970.1*12
fb = + − = 1.44 + 2.16 − 1.10 = +2.50
789 10,542 10,542
Compressive stress limit for concrete: +2

+2.700
700 ksi OK

Hold-Down Forces
Assume that the stress in the strand at the time of

prestressing, before any losses, is:
0.75 f pu = 0.75(270) = 202.5ksi
Then, the Prestress force per strand before any losses is:
Pi ' = 0.153(202.5) = 31.0k / strand

Harp angle:
 54 − 4 − 6 
ψ = tan −1   = 6.2
o
 34(12) 
37
Hold-Down Forces
Therefore, hold-down force per strand

1 05 (force per strand)(sin ψ)
= 1.05
=1.05(31.0) sin 6.2◦ = 3.5 kips per strand
Note that the factor, 1.05, is applied to account for friction.
Total hold down force = 9 strands(3.5) = 31.6 kips

Hold-Down Forces
ODOT BDM States that the following limits are not to

be exceeded:
No. of Draped PU/Strand
Strands per Row (lb)
1 6,000
2 4,000
3 4,000
So hold-down force per strand = 3.5 kips per strand OK

38
At transfer, stresses at the end of girder tend to exceed allowables if

the strand is straight.
Stresses can be brought within the allowable stress range either by

harping or debonding the strand. The question arises as to which is
better, harping or debonding?
Boxes tend to use debonding because harping isn’t practical as the

strand would go through the void. I and Bulb T girders tend to use
harping
harping.
However, not all fabricators have the ability to harp (the bed won’t take
the hold down force). Therefore, before deciding to harp, contact
probable fabricators or the local PCI section for assistance and advice.

Summary of Stresses at Transfer
Top Stresses Bottom

ft (ksi) stresses
fb (ksi)
At transfer length +0.27 +2.43
section
At harp points +0.07 +2.60
At midspan +0.19 +2.50
Note that the bottom stresses at the harp points are more
critical than the ones at midspan.
No Tension! The entire beam is in compression.

39

Top Stress
0.3
0.25
0.2
Stress (ksi)
0.15
0.1 Transfer
g
Length
0.05 Harp Mid-
Point Span
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Length (ft)


Bottom Stress
2.5
2
Stress (ksi)
1.5
1 Transfer
Length
0.5 Harp Mid-
Point Span
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Length (ft)

40
Stresses at Service Loads
Total loss of prestress at service loads is
∆f pT = 43.95ksi
Stress in tendon after all losses
f pe = f pi − ∆f pT = 202.5 − 43.95 = 158.55ksi

Stresses at Service Loads
Force per strand = (fppe)(strand area)

= (158.55)(0.153) = 24.3 kips
The total prestressing force after all losses

Ppe = 24.3(40) = 972.0 kips

41
Compression: (5.9.4.2.1)
Due to permanent loads, for service limit states:
For the precast beam: 0.45fc’ = 0.45(7.0) = +3.150 ksi

For the deck: 0.45fc’ = 0.45(4.5) = +2.025 ksi
Due to one half the permanent loads and live load:
For the precast beam:0.40fc’ = 0.40(7.0) = +2.800 ksi


Compression (con’t): (5.9.4.2.1)
Due to permanent and transient loads for service limit states:
For the precast beam: 0.60Φw fc’ = 0.60(1.0)(7.0)

= +4.200 ksi
F the
For th deck:
d k 0.60Φ
0 60Φw fc’ = 0.60(1.0)(4.5) 2 700 ksi
0 60(1 0)(4 5) = +2.700 k i
Note: Φw is a factor for slender webs/flanges. It is not really meant for

“I” girders. If the calculations required for Φw are done, Φw=1.

42
Tension:
For components
p with bonded p
prestressing
g tendons:
For the precast beam:
0.19 f c' = 0.19(7.0) = 0.503ksi

Stresses at Midspan
Concrete stress at the top fiber of the beam, three cases:

1 Under permanent loads
1. loads, Service I:
Ppe Ppe ec (M g + M s ) ( M ws + M b )
ftg1 = − + +
A St St Stg
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 1,148.4) *12 (153.6 + 245.1) *12
ftg1 = − + +
789 8,909 8,909 47,376
ftg1 = 1.23
1 23 − 22.18
18 + 22.83
83 + 00.10
10 = +11.98
98

43
Stresses at Midspan
2. One-half permanent loads plus live loads:

( M LL + I )
ftg 2 = 0.5 ftg1 +
Stg
1,386.2*12
ftg 2 = 0.5(1.98) +
47,376
ftg 2 = 0.99 + 0.35 = +1.34

Stresses at Midspan
3. Under permanent and transient loads:

( M LL + I )
f tg 3 = f tg +
Stg
1,386.2*12
f tg 3 = 1.98 +
47,376
f tg 3 = 1.98 + 0.35 = +2.33

44
Stresses at Midspan
Concrete stress at the top fiber of the deck, three cases:
1. Under permanent loads:
( M ws + M b )
ftc =
Stc
(245.1 + 153.6) *12
ftc = +
29,534
ftc = +0.162
Note that deck stresses under service loads are almost always well
below allowable for continuous for LL bridges; but they still must be
checked.
Stresses at Midspan

( M LL + I )
f tc 2 = ftc1 +
Stc
1,386.2*12
f tc 2 = 0.5(0.162) +
29,534
f tc 2 = 0.08 + 0.563 = +0.64

45
Stresses at Midspan
( M ws + M b + M LL + I )
f tc =
Stc
(245.1 + 153.6 + 1,386.2) *12
f tc =
29,534
f tc = +0.73

Stresses at Midspan
Tension stress at the bottom fiber of the beam, Service III:
Ppe Ppe ec (M g + M s ) ( M ws + M b ) + 0.8M LL + I

fb = + − −
A Sb Sb Sbc
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 1,148.4) *12 [ (245.1 + 153.6) + (0.8*1,386.2) ] *12
fb = + − −
789 10,542 10,542 16, 694
fb = 1.23 + 1.84 − 2.39 − 1.08 = −0.40
Tensile stress limit for concrete: -0.503 ksi OK

Service III has the 0.8LL factor!
46
Positive Moment Section
Total Ultimate bending moment for Strength I is:

M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )
(Tables 3.4.1-1&2)
At point of maximum moment 0.4L:
M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )
M u = 1.25(912.9
1 2 (912 9 + 11,101.5
101 + 1171.9)
1 9) + 11.5(274.2)
(2 4 2) + 11.75(1,
(1 412.4)
412 4)
M u = 5, 615k − ft

Average stress in prestressing steel:

 c 
f ps = f pu  1 − k  (5.7.3.1.1)
 dp
 

47

 f py 
2 1.04 −  (Table C5.7.3.1.1-1)
=  f pu
 
dp = Distance from extreme compression fiber to in.
= the
th centroid
t id off the
th prestressing
t i tendons
t d
h - ybs = 62.5 – 4.70 = 57.80
compressive face

c= (5.7.3.1.1-4)
f
0.85 f c' β b + kAps pu
dp

48
Aps = Area of prestressing steel = 40 * 0.153 = 6.12 in2

fpu = Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel = 270 ksi
As = Area of mild steel tension reinforcement = 0.0 in2
fy = Yield strength of tension reinforcement = 60.0 ksi
As‘ = Area of compression reinforcement = 0.0 in2
fy‘ = Yield strength of compression reinforcement = 60.0 ksi
fc‘ = Compressive strength of deck concrete = 4.5 ksi
β1 = Stress block factor specified in LRFD 5.7.2.2 = 0.83
b = Effective width of compression flange = 96 in.

6.12(270) + 0.0 − 0.0

c=
270
0.85(4.5)(0.83)(96) + 0.28(6.12)
57.8
c = 5.28
a = depth of the equivalent stress block = β1c
a = 0.83(5.28) = 4.39in < t s = 8.5in

49
Therefore, the assumption of rectangular section behavior is

valid and the average stress in prestressing steel is:
 5.28 
f ps = 270  1 − 0.28  = 263.3ksi
 57.8 
Nominal flexural resistance:
 4.39 
6 12(263 3)  57
6.12(263.3) 80 −
57.80 
 a  2 
M n = Aps f ps  d p −  =
 2 12
M n = 7, 467k − ft

Factored flexural resistance:
Mr = φMn
Where Φ= resistance factor = 1.0 for flexure and
tension of prestressed concrete
φ M n = 7,
7 467k − ft > M u = 5,
5 615k − ft

50
Maximum Reinforcement-Positive Moment Section
The old ρmax requirement has been deleted. The LRFD

Specifications now require that φ be determined based on
whether the section is tension controlled
controlled, compression
controlled or a transition section. In the calculation of Mr,
tension control was assumed.
Check the strain in the extreme tensile steel:

d t = 54.0 + 8.5 − 2 = 60.5
 d −c  60.5 − 5.28 
ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.032 > 0.005
 c   5.28 
(5.7.2.1 & 5.5.4.2)
This is a tension controlled section, so φ = 1.0
Minimum Reinforcement – Positive Moment Section
At any section, the amount of prestressed and

nonprestressed
p tensile reinforcement shall be adequate
q to
develop a factored flexural resistance, Mr, at least equal to
the lesser of:
1.2 times the cracking moment, Mcr, determined on

the basis of elastic stress distribution and the modulus
of rupture, fr,
1.33 times the factored moment required by the

applicable strength load combinations
(5.7.3.3.2)
51
Minimum Reinforcement - Positive Moment Section
S 
 Snc 
Where:
fr = Modulus of rupture = 0.37 fc' = 0.37 7.0 = 0.979 (5.4.2.6) ksi
fcpe Compressive stress in concrete due to effective ksi
= prestresss forces only (after allowance for all
Prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads
Ppe Ppe ec 972 972(20.0)

+ = + = 1.23 + 1.84 = 3.07
A Sb 789 10,542
Mdnc= Total unfactored dead load moment acting on kip-ft

the non-composite
non composite section =
Mg+Ms = 951.9+1,148.4 = 2,100.3
Sc= Section modulus for the extreme fiber of the in3

composite section where tensile stress is
caused by externally applied loads = 16,694
Snc= Section modulus for the extreme fiber of the in3

noncomposite section where tensile stress is
caused by externally applied loads = 10,542

52

16, 694  16, 694  16, 694
M cr = (0.98 + 3.07) − 2,100.3  − 1 ≥ (0.979)
12  10,542  12
M cr = 4,
4 400 ≥ 1,362
1 362 kip-ft
ki ft
1.2 M cr = 5, 290 kip-ft
At midspan, the factored moment required by the Strength I load
combination is: Mu = 5,610 kip-ft
Therefore, 1.33M u = 7, 461 kip-ft
Since 1.2 33M u , 1.2

1 2M cr < 11.33 1 2MM cr Controls
M r = 7, 467 > 1.2 M crOK
Note: The LRFD Specifications states that this requirement be met at every section.

Design of the Negative Moment Section

M u = 1.25(
1 25( DC ) + 11.5(
5( DW ) + 11.75(
75( LL + IM ) (3.4.1-1&2)
(3 4 1-1&2)
At the pier section:
M u = 1.25(−292.7) + 1.5(−467.1) + 1.75(−1,380.7) = −3, 483 kip-ft
Notes:
1. At the negative moment section, the compression
face is the bottom flange of the beam and is 26 in

wide.
2. This section is a nonprestressed reinforced concrete
section, thus Φ = 0.9 for flexure.

53
Assume the deck reinforcement is at the mid-height of the

deck.
 As f y 
M u = φ As f y  d −  (5.14.1.2.7j)
 1.7 f c'b 
fy = Yield strength of compression reinforcement in2
= 60.0
fc‘ = Compressive
p strength
g of g
girder = 7.0 ksi
d = Effective depth to negative moment in
reinforcement from bottom of girder =
54 + 0.5(8.5) = 58.25
 As (60) 
3 483(12) = 00.90
3, 58 25 −
90 As (60)  58.25 
 1.7(7.0)(26) 
0 = 10.47 As2 − 3145 As + 41, 796
As = 13.94in 2
This is the required amount of mild steel reinforcement

required in the slab to resist the negative moment and it is
equal to 18 #5 bars and 19 #6 bars.

54
Longitudinal Deck Reinforcement
The longitudinal reinforcement in the deck includes

distribution reinforcement and other minimum reinforcement
reinforcement.
As ( provided ) = 5.58in 2
Negative Moment Deck Reinforcement
The additional area of deck reinforcement required:

As , Add 'l = 13.93 − 5.58 = 8.35in 2

55
Typical longitudinal deck reinforcement No. 5 @ 12” Top -

No. 5 @ 8” Btm.
Totall Area
T A off longitudinal
l i di l reinforcement
i f 5 58 iin2
5.58
provided
Factored negative design moment -3,483 kip-ft
Total area required to resist negative 13.93 in2
moment
Additional area of deck reinforcement 8.35 in2
required
Addi i
Additional
l reinforcement
i f provided
id d 19 N
No. 6 B
Bars
Additional area of deck reinforcement 8.36 in2
provided
Total As provided 13.94 in2 > 13.93 in2
OK
Location of steel: Note: Epoxy coated

Top – 8 #5 + 8 #6 with 2 2” clear steel assumed. Min.
cover is 1.5 in.
Btm – 10 #5 + 11 #6 with 2 5/8” clear. (5.12.4)
As = 18(0.31) + 19(0.44) = 13.94 in2
8(0.31)(2.3125) + 8(0.44)(2.375) + 10(0.31)(8.5 − 2.9375) + 11(0.44)(8.5 − 3)
x=
13.94
57.96
x= = 4.16
4 16
13.94
We assumed 4.25” from top OK

d = 58.34 in
56
Now check Mn:
a=
Asf y
=
(13.94 )( 60 ) = 5.41in
0.85f c ' b 0.85 ( 7 )( 26 )
a 5.41
c= = = 7.72
β1 0.7
 41 
5.41
M r = φM n = ( 0.9 )(13.94 )( 60 )  58.34 − 
 2 
M r = 41,880k − in = 3, 490k − ft > M u = 3, 483k − ft
Effective Tension Flange Width
The effective tension flange width is the lesser of:
The effective flange width = 96 in CONTROLS

(5.7.3.4)
A width equal to 1/10 of the average of adjacent spans
between bearings =
0 10(96 25)(12) = 115
0.10(96.25)(12) 115.5in
5in
(4.6.2.6)

57
Control of Cracking by Distribution Reinforcement
According to LRFD 5.7.3.4 the spacing of the mild steel

reinforcement in the layer closest to the tension face shall satisfy
equation 5.7.3.4-1.
700γ e
s≤ − 2d c
βs fs
The tensile stress in mild reinforcement is computed to be:
M sl
fs =
As jd
fy = Yield strength of reinforcement = 60.0 ksi
Msl = (292.7)+(467.1)+(1,380.7)= 2,140.5 kip-ft
As = Area of negative moment reinforcement = in2

13.94
reinforcement from bottom of g
girder =
62.5-4.16 = 58.34
j = 1-(k/3) = 1-(0.275/3) = 0.908

58
Where:
k = 2 ρ n + ( ρ n) 2 − ρ n
k = 2(0.00919)(5.718) + (0.00919 * 5.718) 2 − 0.00919 * 5.718
k = 0.275
Where:
As 13.94
ρ= = = 0.00919
bd (26)(58.34)
Esteel 29,, 000
n = Modular
M d l R Ratio
i = = = 5.718
5 718
Egirder 5, 072
2,140.5(12)
So: fs = = 34.8ksi
13.94(0.908)(58.34)
The previous calculation made the simplifying assumption

th t the
that th section
ti was rectangular.
t l
If this assumption is NOT made, the neutral axis, calculated

using working stress concepts, can be calculated as 16.45
inches from the bottom of the beam. The cracked,
transformed moment of inertia is 177200 in4. The steel stress
is found to be 34
34.6
6 ksi which compares to 34
34.8
8 ksi using the
rectangular assumption.

59

A quick review of working stress:
Es
n=
Ec
1) The cracked, transformed section is used.
2) Th neutral
The t l axis
i iis att th
the geometric
t i centroid.
t id
3) Concrete stress is assumed linear.
4) Steel is converted to an equivalent area of concrete by multiplying
by n.
5) Tension in concrete is ignored
The maximum concrete stress is:
M sl c
fc =
I tr
The steel stress is: The term M(d-c)/I gives
M sl ( d − c )
the equivalent concrete
stress. It is converted to
fs = n steel stress by
I tr multiplying by n.

60
This is the assumed cracked, transformed section. Note

that it is a negative moment section. Based on a previous
iteration, the neutral axis, x, is within the tapered section of
the Type IV flange.
To determine “x”, the position of

the neutral axis, the first moment
of inertia of the area about the
neutral axis must be = 0. Define
the downward direction as
positive.
It can be shown that b = 42-2x
( 26 − ( 42 − 2x ) ) (8)( x − 4 ) + 2  12  ( x − 8)( x − 8)  x − 8 − x 3− 8 
   
x
+ x ( 42 − 2x )   − 79.5 ( 58.34 − x ) = 0
2
61

The equation reduces to:
−0.33x 3 + 21x 2 + 15.5x − 4467.3 = 0

The roots are -13.55, 16.45 and 60.75.
The only root which makes any sense is
x = 16.45 in. Thus, b = 9.10 inches and
x-8 = 8.45 in.
( 9.10 )(16.45) + 2  (8.45) 83 + 8.45 ( 8)(16.45 − 4 ) 

1 3 1 2
I=
3 12 
1 1  8.45  
2
+2  ( 8.45 )( 8.45 ) + ( 8.45 )( 8.45 ) 16.45 − 8 −

3
 
 36 2  3  
+79.5 ( 58.34 − 16.45 ) = 177200in 4

2

M sl ( d − c )
fs = n
I tr
2140.5 (12 )( 58.34 − 16.45 )
f s = ( 5.7 ) = 34.6ksi
177200
This is lower than the stress found by assuming a

rectangular section.
section Since the steel stress in the
denominator of the spacing equation, using the
rectangular assumption is conservative (requires a closer
spacing) in this case.

62
The spacing of mild steel reinforcement in the layer closest

to the tension face shall satisfy the following:
700γ e
s≤ − 2d c (5.7.3.4-1)
βs fs
Where:
γe = Exposure factor = 0.75 for Class 2 exposure
condition
fs = Tensile stress in steel reinforcement at the ksi
service limit state
dc
βs = 1 +
0.7( h − d c )
Where:
dc = Thickness of concrete cover measured in

from extreme tension fiber to center of
the flexural reinforcement located closest
therto = 2.00+5/8(0.5) = 2.31
h = Overall height on the composite section in
= 62.5

63
2.31
βs = 1 + = 1.055
0 7(62 5 − 2.31)
0.7(62.5 2 31)
700 ⋅ 0.75
s≤ − 2(2.31) = 9.67in
1.055 ⋅ 34.8
6.0in ≤ 9.67in
OK
For this example the tensile stress in the mild
reinforcement is less than its allowable. Thus, the
distribution of reinforcement for control of cracking is
adequate.
Maximum Reinforcement – Negative Moment Section
As before, check the strain in the extreme tensile steel:
d −c  59.9 − 7.72 

ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.020 > 0.005
 c   7.72 
(5.7.2.1 & 5.5.4.2)

64
Minimum Reinforcement – Negative Moment Section
At any section, the amount of prestressed and

p
nonprestressed tensile reinforcement shall be adequate
q to
develop a factored flexural resistance, Mr, at least equal to
the lesser of:
1.2 times the cracking moment, Mcr, determined on

the basis of elastic stress distribution and the modulus
of rupture, fr,
1.33 times the factored moment required by the

applicable strength load combinations
(5.7.3.3.2)

S 
 Snc 
Where:
fr = 0.37 f c' = 0.37 4.5 = 0.785 ksi

fcpe = 0.0 ksi
Mdnc= M g + M s = 0 kip-ft
Sc= 29,534
29 534 in3

65
29,534
M cr = (0.785)
12
M cr = 1,932k − ft
1.2 M cr = 2,318k − ft
At bearing, the factored moment required by the Strength I load
combination is: Mu = -3,483 kip-ft
Since 1.2 M cr < 1.33M u , 1.2 M cr Controls
M r = 3, 490 > 1.2M cr = 2,318 OK


Positive Moment Connection
Continuous for live load bridges are covered in Article

5.14.1.4.4. Much of this article is new in 2007 (4th Ed.).
One requirement of this article is for a positive moment

connection. These positive moments are caused by the upward
camber of the prestressed girders due to creep and shrinkage.
The positive moment connection is needed to provided continuity
at the pier.
The connection
Th ti can be b made d either
ith by
b extending
t di mildild steel
t l outt
of the end of the girder into the diaphragm or by leaving strand
extend out of the end of the girder into the diaphragm. This
example illustrates bent strand connections.

66
Positive Moment Connection
Positive moments develop at the connection

between girders at in interior supports due to live
live-
load effects (if more than two spans) and restraint
caused by temperature, creep, and shrinkage.
According to LRFD 5.14.1.4.4, these restraint
moments are negligible when continuity is
established after 90 days.
y

Development of Extended Strands
The strands are bent up 90° into the diaphragm so that the hook
extends 8 inches from the end of the girder. The ends of the girders
are placed 10 inches apart
apart. With the 8 inch projection this leaves 2
inches of clear allowing for construction tolerances. Typically mild steel
is placed in the corner of the hooks to enhance the development length
of the hooks. These bars should be at least #5.

67
Required Area of Strand
The design moment used for the working stress check is

Mcr while the design moment for the strength check is
1 2Mcr. According to LRFD 5
1.2M 5.14.1.4.9c
14 1 4 9c the stress in the
strands used for design as a function of the total length of
the strand shall not exceed:
(l − 8) (l − 8)
f psl = dsh ≤ 150ksi f pul = dsh
0.288 0.163
where: (5.14.1.4.9c-1) (5.14.1.4.9c-2)
ℓdsh = total length of extended strand in
fpsl = stress in the strand at the service limit state ksi
Cracked section shall be assumed
fpul = stress in the strand at the strength limit state ksi
The design moments, parameters, and results for

the design of the positive moment connection
using bent strand are found in following table.
The cracking moment is found using the gross,
composite cross section, but assuming that
cracking occurs at the diaphragm. Thus the
diaphragm
p g concrete strength g is used. For these
calculations the effective width of 96 inches, 0.5
inch strand, and concrete strength of 4.5 ksi were
used.
68
When using working stress design the number of strands is

assumed to calculate the length
g of the strand. When using
g
the strength design method, the length of strand is
assumed to calculate the number of strands required.
Design iterations are performed to determine the most
efficient combination of strand and length.
M cr = 0.24 f c ' Scb = 0.24 4.5 (16694 ) = 8500k − in = 708k − ft

1 2M cr = 850k − fft
1.2M
Le = l dsh − 8

Working Stress Design

No of Strand
No. 6 8 10 12 16
ldsh 42.29 33.78 29.36 25.83 21.42
As. 0.92 1.22 1.53 1.84 2.45
Moment 708.00 708.00 708.00 708.00 708.00
n 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
d 62.50 62.50 60.50 60.50 60.50
ρ 45E-6 52E-6 263E-6 317E-6 422E-6
k 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08
j 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97
fs 150 113.07 93.68 78.22 58.87
69
Strength Design
No. of Strand 5.18 6.52 8.00 9.27 13.13
ldsh 42.00 35.00 30.00 27.00 22.00
As 0.79 1.00 1.22 1.42 2.01
Moment 849.70 849.70 849.70 849.70 849.70
d 62.50 62.50 62.50 60.50 60.50
a 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.47
fpul 209 166 135 117 86
* Back calculated based on strand length

In this example working stress design governs. Multiple

iterations are performed to determine the least length of
extension of the strand required.
If the results indicate an odd number of strands they are rounded
up to an even number to provide symmetry in the connection.
It may be more desirable to have a larger number of shorter
strands as opposed to fewer longer strands. Girder fabrication
may be more difficult with longer strand extensions as this may
require excessive space between girders in the bed
bed. In addition
addition,
if a larger number of shorter strands are used the stress can be
distributed throughout a larger area.

70

The designer chooses from the previous tables. A
reasonable design would be 12 strands extended 26
inches. That would be an 8 inch horizontal extension from
the face of the beam and an 18 inch vertical “tail” to the
hook. Any 12 strands could be extended, but spacing
them out and using different rows makes construction
easier and limits stress concentrations.
Also note that, consistent with the design examples in

NCHRP Report 519, the haunch has been included.

Shear Design
The area and spacing of shear reinforcement must be

determined at regular intervals along the entire length of
the beam. In this design example, transverse shear design
procedures are
φ
demonstrated below by determining these
values at the critical section near the supports.
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided where:
Vu ≥ 0.5φ (Vc + V p ) (5.8.2.4-1)

71
Shear Design
Vu = Total factored shear force kips
Vc = Shear strength provided by concrete kips
Vp = Component of the effective prestressing force kips

in the direction of the applied shear
Φ = Resistance factor (5.5.4.2.1)

Critical Section
dv = Effective shear depth

Distance between resultants of tensile and
(5.8.2.9)
compressive forces, de – a/2, but not less
than 0.9de or 0.72h.
de = The corresponding effective depth from in
the extreme compression fiber to the
centroid of the tensile force in the tensile
reinforcement = 58.34
58 34
a = Equivalent depth of the compression in
block = 5.41
h = Total height of section = 62.5 in
72
Effective Shear Depth
d v = d e − 0.5(
0 5(a) = 58.34
58 34 − 0.5(5.41)
0 5(5 41) = 55.63
55 63in
≥ 0.9d e = 0.9(58.34) = 52.5in
≥ 0.72h = 0.72(62.5) = 45in
Therefore, dv = 55.63 in.

Calculation of Critical Section
The critical section near the support is dv = 55.63 in

from the FACE of the support.
support
Note: Assume the length of the bearing pad is 10

inches.
Thus the critical section is:

55.63 in + 5 in = 60.63 inches.

73
Using values from previous tables (linearly interpolated),

the factored shear force and bendingg moment at the critical
section for shear, according to Strength I load
combinations.
Vu = 1.25(35.4 + 42.7 + 14.1) + 1.50(22.6) + 1.75(99.4) = 323.1kips

(All shear goes the same way!)
M u = 0.9(185.2 + 223.5) + 1.25(−219.3) + 1.50(−350.0) + 1.75(−1, 080.9)

M u = −2,323k − ft = −27880k − in

At this point, there are three choices:
1. Ignore the prestressing steel

Then, this is a reinforced section
β=2
θ = 45◦
(This is VERY conservative)
2. Use Sectional Model for RC

3. Include PS Steel
74
Contribution of Concrete to Nominal Shear Resistance
1. Ignore prestressing steel:
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv dv = 0.0316(2) 7(8)(55.63) = 74.4k
323.1
Vs = − 74.4 = 284.6kips
0.9
A
Assume #4 h
hoops Av = 0.4 i 2 α = 90 sin
0 4 in i α =11 cot α =00

Av f y d v cot θ 0.4(60)(55.63)
0 4(60)(55 63) cot 45
s= = = 4.7 in
Vs 284.6
Use #4@4 in
Vs = 334 kips

75
2. Use Sectional Model but for RC:

Mu = 27,880
27 880 kip in
kip-in
dv = 55.63 in.
Nu = Applied factored normal force at the specified section = 0 kips
Vu = 323.1
kips
As = Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the in2
member = 13.94
Ap = 0 in2
Ep = 28,500 ksi
Es = 29,000 ksi

Vp = Component of the effective prestressing force in the kips

direction of the applied shear
= (force per strand)(number of draped strands)(sin ψ)
= 0
fpo = 0

76
Assume 0.5 cot θ = 1.
27,880
+ 0.5(0) + (323.1) − 0
55.63
εx = ≤ 0.001
2(29, 000(13.94))
1.0 x10−3 ≤ 0.001

Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv dv
Where:
vu = Shear stress in concrete kips
bv = Effective web width of the beam in
= 8
= 0

77
323.1 − 0.9(0)
vu = = 0.81 ksi
0 9(8)(55 63)
0.9(8)(55.63)
 vu  0.81
 '= = 0.115
 f c  7.0
Use ((vu / fc’)) < 0.125 and εx < 1 from LRFD Table
5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 37◦
β = 2.13
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv dv = 0.0316(2.13) 7(8)(55.63) = 79.3 kips
323.1 − 0.9(79.3)
Vs = = 280.0 kips
0.9
Use #4 hoops Av = 0.4 in2 α = 90 sin α =1 cot α =0

Av f y d v cot θ 0.4(60)(55.63) cot 37.0
s= = = 6.32
Vs 280.0
So #4 hoops at 6 in
Vs = 295.0 kips
Vr = 0.9(79.3 + 295.0 + 0) = 337 k > Vu OK

78
3. Include Prestressing Steel:

Mu = 27,880
27 880 kip in
kip-in
dv = 53.6 in.
Vu = 323.1
kips
As = Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the in2
member = 13.94
Ap = 9(0.153)
9(0 153) = 1.38
1 38 in2
Ep = 28,500 ksi
Es = 29,000 ksi
Note, when the prestressing steel in included, de = 57 inches. The
term c = 9.76 in and a = 6.77in. Thus, dv = 53.6 in.
If dv < 60db = 30 in, Vp and fpo must be reduced for lack of

bond. dv = 53.6 , so the critical section is 70.6 from the end
of the girder > 30 in so:
Vp Component of the effective prestressing force in the kips
= direction of the applied shear
= 24.3(9)(sin 6.2◦) = 23.6
fppo = A parameter taken as modulus of elasticity of ksi

prestressing tendons multiplied by the locked-in [LRFD
difference in strain between the prestressing tendons 5.8.3.4.2]
and the surrounding concrete
= .7 f pu = 0.7(270.0) = 189

79
Assume 0.5 cot θ = 1.
27,880
+ 0.5(0) + (323.1 − 23.6) − 1.38(189)
53.6
εx = ≤ 0.001
2(29, 000(13.94) + 28,500(1.38))
0.63x10−3 ≤ 0.001

Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv dv
Where:
= 8
= 23.6

80
323.1 − 0.9(23.6)
vu = = 0.782 ksi
0 9(8)(53 6)
0.9(8)(53.6)
 vu  0.782
 '= = 0.111
 fc  7.0
Use ((vu / fc’)) < 0.125 and εx < 0.75 from LRFD
Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 34.4◦
β = 2.26
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv dv = 0.0316(2.26) 7(8)(55.63) = 84.1 kips
323.1 − 0.9(84.1 + 23.6)

Vs = = 251.3 kips
0.9

Av f y d v cot θ 0.4(60)(53.6) cot 34.4
s= = = 7.5
Vs 251.3
So #4 hoops at 6 in
Vs = 313 kips
Vr = 0.9(84.1 + 313.0 + 23.6) = 378.6 > Vu OK

81
Minimum Reinforcement Requirement
(5.8.2.7)
Check which is true:
vu < 0.125 f c' (5.8.2.7-1)
or
vu ≥ 0.125 f c' (5.8.2.7-2)
0.125 f c' = 0.125(7.0) = 0.875 ksi
vu = 0.81 ksi
Since vu < 0.125 f c' , Then smax = 0.8d v = 0.8(55.63) = 44.5 ≤ 24.0 in
24 in CONTROLS

Calculate minimum area of steel using a 6 inch spacing to

get area of steel:
A v ≥ 0.0316 f c '
b vs
= 0.0316 7ksi
(8in )( 6in ) = 0.067in 2
<0.4 in2 OK
fy 60ksi
((5.8.2.5))

82
Critical Section – Positive Moment
Critical Section near the supports is at dv.

Where: (5.8.2.9)
Distance between resultants of tensile and compressive
forces, de – a/2, but not less than 0.9de or 0.72h.
Where:
de = The corresponding effective depth from the in
extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the
tensile force in the tensile reinforcement = 58.2
a = Equivalent depth of the compression block = 3.42 in
h = Total height of section = 62.5 in
In this area, the positive moment properties are needed. However,

since this section is where the strand is harped, the positive moment
properties must be recalculated using 31 strands. Ap = 4.74 in2 and dp =
62.5 - 4.32 = 58.2 inches. The value of 4.32 inches as the centroid of 31
strands was calculated earlier in Section 1.7.2. Refer to Section 1.9.1
for the equations below:
c=
( 4.74 )( 270 ) = 4.11 in
270
( 0.85)( 4.5)( 0.83)( 96 ) + 0.28 ( 4.74 )
58.2
 4.11 
f ps = 270 1 − 0.28  = 264.8 ksi
 58.2 
a = ( 0.83)( 4.11) = 3.42 in
83
d v = de − 0.5(a) = 58.2 − 0.5(3.42) = 56.5in

≥ 0.9d e = 0.9(58.2) = 52.4in
≥ 0.72h = 0.72(62.5) = 45in

The critical section near the support is dv = 56.5 in

from the FACE of the support.
support
Note: Assume the length of the bearing pad is 10

inches.
Thus the critical section is:

56.5 in + 5 in ≈ 62 inches.

84
Using values from previous tables, the factored shear force

and bendingg moment at the critical section for shear,
according to Strength I load combinations.
Vu = 1.25(35.4 + 42.7 + 7.9) + 1.50(12.6) + 1.75(82.2) = 250.0 k
M u = 1.25(185.2 + 223.5 + 49.6) + 1.50(79.1) + 1.75(373.9) = 1,346 k − in
It is conservative to take the highest factored moment that

will occur at that section, rather than the moment
corresponding to maximum Vu. Therefore,
Therefore
(5.8.3.4.2)
Vu = 250.0 kips
M u = 1,346 kip-ft

resistance is:
(5.8.3.3-3)
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv dv

85
Strain in Flexural Tension Reinforcement
Strain in the reinforcement is (assuming uncracked):

Mu
+ 0.5 N u + 0.5 Vu − V p cot θ − Aps f po (5 8 3 4 2 1)
(5.8.3.4.2-1)
dv
εx = ≤ 0.001
Where:
Vp = Component of the effective prestressing force in the direction of the kips
applied shear
= 24.3(9)(sin 6.2◦) = 23.6
fpo = A parameter taken as modulus of elasticity of prestressing tendons ksi
multiplied by the locked-in difference in strain between the [LRFD
prestressing tendons and the surrounding concrete 5.8.3.4.2]
= .7 f = 0.7(270.0) = 189
pu

Where (cont.):
Aps Area off prestressing steel on the flexural
f tension in2
= side of the member, as shown in LRFD Figure
5.8.3.4.2-1.
= 31(0.153) = 4.74
As = Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural in2
tension side of the member = 0
Ac= Area of concrete on the flexural tension half. This in2
term is calculated as the area on the tension side
(bottom in this case) from the tension fiber to h/2.
= 475

86
Note that either θ can be assumed OR 0.5 cot θ can be

assumed =1.1. Assume 0.5 cot θ = 1:
1,346(12)
+ 0.5(0) + (250 − 23.6) − 4.74(189)
56.5
εx = ≤ 0.001
2 ( 28,500(4.74) + 5072 ( 475 ) )
−0.07 x10−3 ≤ 0.001
The negative value means the section is uncracked

Shear Stress
Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv d v
Where:
bv = Effective web width of the beam = 8 in
= 23.6
250 − 0.9(23.6)
vu = = 0.562ksi
0.9(8)(56.5)
87
Values of β & θ
 vu  0.562
 '= = 0.0803
0 0803
 fc  7.0
Use (vu / fc’) < 0.1 and εx < -0.05 from LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 21.4◦
β = 3.24

Concrete Contribution

resistance is:
(5 8 3 3 3)
(5.8.3.3-3)
Vc = 0.0316β f c' bv dv
Vc = 0.0316(3.24) 7.0(8)(56.5) = 122.4 kips

88
Contribution of Reinforcement of Nominal Shear Resistance
Check if: (5.8.2.4-1)
Vu = 250 kips > 0.5φ (Vc + Vp ) = 0.5 ( 0.9 ) (122.4 + 23.6) = 65.7 kips
At least minimum stirrups are needed.

Check which is true: (5.8.2.7)
vu < 0.125 f c' (5.8.2.7-1)

or
vu ≥ 0.125 f c' (5.8.2.7-2)
0.125 f c' = 0.125(7.0) = 0.875 ksi

vu = 0.562 ksi
Since vu < 0.125 f c , Then smax = 0.8d v ≤ 24.0 in : 24 in CONTROLS

'

89
Calculate minimum area of steel using a 12 inch spacing to

get area of steel per foot:
A v ≥ 0.0316 f c '
b vs
= 0.0316 7ksi
(8in )(12in ) = 0.134in 2 (5.8.2.5)
fy 60ksi
ODOT uses #4 bars with 2 legs as standard;
(Av = 2(0.2 in2) = 0.4 in2)
#4@ 24 inch o.c.= 0.2 in2/ft


Maximum Nominal Shear Resistance
The upper limit of Vn, given by following equation, is

intended to ensure that the concrete in the web of the
beam will not crush prior to yield of the transverse
reinforcement.
Vn ≤ 0.25 f c'bv d v + V p (5.8.3.3-2)
Comparing this previous equation with equation LRFD

5.8.3.3.-1:
5 8 3 3 1:

90
Assume #4 @ 24”:
Av f y dv ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α
Vs =
s
Vs =
( 0.4in ) ( 60ksi )( 56.5) cot ( 21.4 ) + 0 (1)
2
24in
Vs = 144.2k
(122.4 + 144.2 ) = 266.6 ≤ 0.25(7.0)(8)(56.5) = 791 OK

Vr = φ (Vc + Vs + V p )
Vr = 0.9 (122.4 + 144.2 + 23.6 ) = 261.2 kips
Vr > Vu = 250 kips

91
Factored Horizontal Shear
It will be assumed that the critical section is the same as for

vertical shear
shear. Using load combination Strength I:
Vu = 323.1 kips
d v = 55.6 in
Both of these values were found in the p preceding g section.

This is shear at the critical section near the pier.

Required Interface Shear Reinforcement
Vri = φVni (5.8.4.1-1)

The nominal shear resistance of the interface plane is:
Vni = cAcv + µ[ Avf f y + Pc ] (5.8.4.1-3)
Where:
c = Cohesion factor ksi
µ = Friction factor [LRFD 5.8.4.3]
Acv = Area of concrete engaged in shear transfer = bviLvi in2

Avf = Area
A off shear
h reinforcement
i f t crossing
i the
th shear
h plane
l i 2
in
Pc = Permanent net compressive force normal to the shear plane kips
fy = Shear reinforcement yield strength ksi
bvi= Width of area of concrete engaged in shear transfer in
Lvi = Length of area of concrete engaged in shear transfer in
92
For a cast-in-place concrete placed against clean concrete

girder surfaces, free of laitance with surface intentionally
roughened to an amplitude of 0.25 in:
c = 0.28 (5.8.4.2)
µ = 1.0

Begin by exploring what happens when the shear

reinforcement is the minimum used anywhere in the girder.
The shear reinforcement was previously calculated to be
#4 @ 24 inches minimum. The shear width is bvi = 20
inches as this is the width of the top of the girder. If Lvi = 24
inches:
Vni = cAcv + µ[ Avf f y + Pc ]
Acv = 20 ( 24 ) = 480in 2
Vni = ( 0.28 )( 480 ) + 1.0 0.4 ( 60 ) + 0  = 158.4k
Vri = φVni = 0.9 (158.4 ) = 142.6k

93
Vui = vui Acv (5.8.4.2-2)

142.6
vui ,max = = 0.297 ksi
480
Vu1
vui = (5.8.4.2-1)
bvi d v
Vu1,,max = 0.297 ( 20 )( 55.6 ) = 330kips

Therefore, #4 @ 24 is adequate anywhere that Vu < 330 kips. Note that
the critical section, the reinforcement is actually #4 @ 4 inches or #4 @
6”; depending on the model used. Note that #4 @ 24 would be
adequate for horizontal shear, so it is NOT necessary to extend every
shear stirrup into the slab.
Minimum Interface Shear Reinforcement
Minimum shear reinforcement,

00.05
05AAcv
Avf ≥ (5.8.4.1-4)
fy
A #4 double leg bar at 24 in spacing is provided

from the beam extending into the deck. Therefore,
Avf =0.4 in2 every 2 ft.
0.05(480)
0.40 ≥ = 0.40 OK
60

94
Minimum Interface Shear Reinforcement
Article 5.8.4.4 states that Avf need not exceed that

required to resist 1.33V /φ The same article also
1 33Vui/φ.
states that the minimum reinforcement provisions are
waived for girder slab interfaces with surfaces
roughened to an amplitude of 0.25 inches where the
factored interface shear, vui, found in equation 5.8.4.2-
1 is less than 0.210 ksi and all of the vertical
(transverse) shear reinforcement required by Article
5.8.1.1 is extended and anchored into the slab.

Vni must be less than:

K1 f c' Acv = 0.3(4.5)(480)
0 3(4 5)(480) = 648k (5.8.4.1-4)
(5 8 4 1 4)
K 2 Acv = 1.8(480) = 864k (5.8.4.1-5)
≤ K1 f c' Acv
Vni provided = 158.4 k OK
≤ K 2 Acv
K1 = 0.3 and K2 = 1.8 (for normal weight concrete) are found

in Article 5.8.4.3.

95
Minimum Longitudinal Reinforcement Requirement
At each section the tensile capacity of the longitudinal

reinforcement on the flexural tension side of the member
shall be proportioned to satisfy:
Mu Nu V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥ + 0.5 +  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ
dv φ φ 
(5.8.3.5-1)

According to Article 5.8.3.5, it is not necessary

to provide any steel beyond that to resist
moment if there is a compressive reaction on
the flexural compression face; in other words,
in a negative moment zone over a support, the
equation in this article does not need to be
satisfied. However, it makes an exception for a
continuous for live load bridge; saying that this
equation must be checked for a continuous for
live load bridge.
96
This provision will be checked at the simply supported end,

using positive moment properties. The check at the
continuous end is made in a similar manner.
The development length is:

 2   2 
l d = κ  f ps − f pe  d b = 1.6  264.8 − (158.6 )  ( 0.5 ) = 127.3in
 3   3 
(5.11.4.2)

a 3.42
dv = dp − = ( 62
62.5 32 ) −
5 − 44.32 = 56
56.5in
5in
2 2
So the critical section is 56.5 inches from face of support.

Allowing for a 10 inch bearing pad and that the center of
bearing is 12 inches from the girder end, the critical section
is 56.5+10/2+12=73.5 inches from the end of the girder.
Since this is less than the development length, the stress in

the steel must be reduced for lack of development.

97
The stress in the undeveloped steel can be found from:
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe ) (5.11.4.2-4)
73.5in − 30in
f px = 158.6ksi
158 6ksi + ( 264.8ksi 158 6ksi ) = 206ksi
264 8ksi − 158.6ksi
127.3in − 30in

Mu Nu V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥ + 0.5 cot θ
+  u − V p − 0.5Vs  co
d vφ φ φ 
( 4.74 )( 206 ) = 977k >
1346  250 
+0+ − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 488k
1.0 ( 56.5)  0.9 
This is OK. Note that Vs may not be taken as greater than

Vu/φ [LRFD 5.8.3.5].
Vu 250k
Vs = 144k < = = 277.8k
φ 0.9
98
At the inside edge of the bearing area of a simply

supported end:
V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ (5.8.3.5-2)
φ 
The steel is not fully developed. Since the bearing pad is
assumed 10 inches and the center of bearing is 12 inches
from the end of the girder, this section is 12+10/2 =17
inches from the end of the girder
girder. This is within the transfer
length, so:
f pe l px 158.6 (17 )
f px = = = 90ksi
60db 30 (5.11.4.2-3)
V 
Aps f ps ≥  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ
φ 
( 4.74 )( 90 ) = 426k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 464.6k NG
 
Assume #4 bars will be used.
Ab f y 0.2 ( 60 )
l d = 1.25 = 1.25 = 5.7in (5.11.2.1)
fc ' 7
< 0.4db f y = 0.4 ( 0.5 )( 60 ) = 12in

99
The development length is 12 inches so the bar is fully

developed:
Thus:
464.6 − 426
As = = 0.64in 2
60
4 #4
# works. 3 ##5 also works as a # 5 needs a 15 inch
development length.

Can also add stirrups. Increase to #4 @ 12:

0.4 ( 60 )( 56.5 ) cot 21.4 Vu
Vs = = 288k > = 277.8k
12 φ
Therefore, Vs = 277.8 for this calculation.
V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 90 ) = 426k >
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 ( 277.8 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 294.2k
 
100
In the previous slides, the assumption was made that the

center of bearing was 12 inches from the end of the girder.
What if the bearing pad is placed right at the end of the

girder? That is, what if the center of bearing is only 5
inches from the end? What effect does that have on
longitudinal steel?

a 3.42
dv = dp − = ( 62
62.5 32 ) −
5 − 44.32 = 56
56.5in
5in
2 2
So the critical section is 56.5 inches from face of support.

Allowing for a 10 inch bearing pad, the critical section is
66.5 inches from the end of the girder.
Since this is less than the development length, the stress in

the steel must be reduced for lack of development.

101
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe ) (5.11.4.2-4)
66.5in − 30in
f px = 158 6ksi +
158.6ksi ( 264.8ksi
264 8ksi − 158 6ksi ) = 198
158.6ksi 198.4ksi
4ksi
127.3in − 30in

Mu Nu V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥ + 0.5 cot θ
+  u − Vp − 0.5Vs  co
d vφ φ φ 
( 4.74 )(198.4 ) = 940.4k >
1346  250 
+0+ − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 488k
1.0 ( 56.5)  0.9 
This is OK. Note that Vs may not be taken as greater than

Vu/φ [LRFD 5.8.3.5].
Vu 250k
Vs = 144k < = = 277.8k
φ 0.9
102
At the inside edge of the bearing area of a simply

supported end:
V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ (5.8.3.5-2)
φ 
The steel is not fully developed. Since the bearing pad is
assumed 10 inches, this section is 10 inches from the end
of the girder. This is within the transfer length, so:
f pe l px 158.6 (10 )
f px = = = 52.9ksi (5.11.4.2-3)
60db 30

V 
 φ 
( )( )
4.74 52.9 = 250.8 k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 464.6k
NG

Ab f y 0.2 ( 60 )
l d = 1.25 = 1.25 = 5.7in (5.11.2.1)
fc ' 7
< 0.4db f y = 0.4 ( 0.5 )( 60 ) = 12in

103
The development length is 12 inches so:

10
f sx = ( 60 ) = 50ksi
12
The #4 can only develop 50 ksi. Thus:

464.6 − 250.8
As = = 4.3in 2
50
This would be 22 #4! Clearly unrealistic!

Add stirrups. Increase to #4 @ 12:

0.4 ( 60 )( 56.5 ) cot 21.4 Vu
Vs = = 288k > = 277.8k
12 φ
V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 52.9 ) = 250.8k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 ( 277.8 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 294.2k
 
104
This is much more workable:

294.2 − 250.8
As = = 0.87in 2
50
This is 5 #4 bars.
So decrease stirrup spacing from the end of the girder to

the critical section (this will be 66.5 inches from the end of
the girder) to #4 @ 12. Add 5 #4 bars longitudinal in the
bottom flange.

Anchorage Zone
The bursting resistance of pretensioned anchorage zones
provided by vertical reinforcement in the ends of the
pretensioned beams at the service limit state shall be take
as: P = f A (5.10.10.1-1)
r s s
As = Total area of transverse reinforcement located in2

within the distance h/4 from the end of the
beam
fs = Stress in steel
steel, but not taken greater than 20 ksi
Pr = Bursting resistance, should not be kips
less than 4% of fpi
40(0.153)(202.5)(0.04) = 49.6
105
Anchorage Zone
49.6
steel, As =
Solving for the required area of steel = 2.47
2 47 in2
20
At least 2.47 in2 of vertical transverse reinforcement should
be provided at the end of the beam for a distance equal to
one-fourth of the depth of the beam, h/4 = 54/4=13.5 in
Therefore, for a distance of 13.5 in from the end of the

member, use 7 #5 bars at 2 inches on center.
The reinforcement provided: 7(2)0.2 = 2.8 > 2.47
OK.
Confinement Reinforcement
For a distance of 1.5d = 1.5(54) = 81 in, from the end of the

beam, reinforcement is placed to confine the prestressing
steel in the bottom flange. The reinforcement should not
be less than #3 deformed pars, with spacing not exceeding
6.0 in, and shaped to enclose the strands.
(5.10.10.2)

106
AASHTO LRFD B Bridge
id DDesign
i SSpecifications
ifi i –
Design Example 2
2 Span Continuous Prestressed I-Girder Bridge
EXTERIOR GIRDER
Design Example - Continuous Two-Span Inelastic I-Girder Bridge
Transverse Section
34’-0”
8.5” structural+ 1.0”

wearing
Type IV
2.5’ 4 Spaces @ 8’-0” = 32’-0” 2.5’
37’-0”

107
Effective Flange Width – Exterior Girder
The effective flange width is taken as one-half the effective

width of the adjacent
j interior g
girder p
plus the least of:
One-eighth of the effective span length = 0.125(96.25)(12)
= 144 in.
6.0 times the average thickness of the = 6.0(8.5) + 0.5(8)

slab, plus the greater of half the web =55 in.
thickness
or
one-quarter
one quarter of the width of the top = 6.0(8.5) + 0.25(20)
flange of the basic girder = 55 in.
The width of the overhang = 2.5 ft = 30 inches
Therefore, the effective flange width for the exterior girder is:
(96/2) + 30 = 78 in.
Exterior Girder Properties
6.5 ft = 78 in
From the previous calculation of beff, the

center to center distance controls.
beff Trans = nbeff = (0.8015) 78 in = 62.5 in
2.5 ft 4.0 ft

108
Exterior Girder Properties
yb= 38.22 in
I= 624512 in4
A= 50457 in2
h= 62.5 in
yTC = 24.28 in
yTG = 15.78 in
Sb= 16340 in3
STG = 39576 in3
STC = 25721in3

Dead Loads
Slab Self Weight:

78 iin (8.5
(8 5 in)(0.150
i )(0 150 kcf)/144 0 691 klf
k f)/144 = 0.691
Haunch Weight: (Same as interior girder)

0.042 klf
Recall that tributary area was used for the slab weight.
This will DECREASE the dead load moment on the
exterior girders.

109
Dead Loads – Deck Plus Haunch – Exterior Girder
Distance Shear Moment

x ft. kips kip-ft
0 00
0.00 35 3
35.3 0
9.26 28.5 295
18.97 21.4 537
28.69 14.2 710
38.41 7.1 814
48.13 0 849
57.84 -7.1 814
67.56 -14.2 710
77.28 -21.4 537
86.99 -28.5 295
96.25 -35.3 0

Exterior Beams
Exterior Girders:
One Lane Loaded:
Lever Rule
Two or More Lanes Loaded:
g= egint
Where:
g = DFMext
gint= DFMint
de
e = 0.77 +
9.1
110
Distribution Factor for Moment
Positive Moment Region:

Exterior Girder – Two or More Lanes Loaded:
DFExt = e DFInt
de
e = 0.77 +
9.1
1.0
= 0.77 + = 0.880
9.1
DFExt+ = (0.880) (0.665) = 0.585

Exterior Beams
Lever Rule: Assume a hinge develops over each interior girder and
solve for the reaction in the exterior girder as a fraction of the truck
load.
This is for one lane loaded. Multiple Presence
Factors apply 1.2 is the MPF
1.5’
∑M H → 1.2 Pe − RS = 0
36k 36k
1.2 Pe 1.2e
R= ∴ DF =
S S
In the diagram,
diagram P/2 are the wheel loads; P
is the resultant force. All three loads are
NOT applied at the same time.
8 ft
Note that truck cannot be closer than 2’
111
One Lane Loaded: 1.2(36k ) [ (10.5 − 3.5) + (10.5 − 9.5) ]

R=
72k (8 ft )
R = 0.6 lanes / girder
1.5’
Multiple Presence:
36k 36k
MPF = 1.2
N t that
Note th t this
thi only
l uses th
the ttruck.
k
By dividing by the total truck
8 ft
weight of 72 kips, R is given in
lanes/girder
Exterior Beams Moment
NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
DFExt ,Min = +
Nb Nb
(C4.6.2.2.2d-1)
∑x 2

Nb - N Number
b off b beams or girders
id
e - Eccentricity of design truck or load from CG of pattern of
girders (ft.)
112
Distribution Factor - One Lane
1.5’ 2’ 6’
36k 36k e = 12’
2.5’ 8’-0”
16’-0”
Note: Only the truck is used and it cannot be closer than 2’


Minimum Exterior Girder Distribution

N
Factor One Lane:
X Ext ∑ e
L
NL
DFM Ext , Min = + Nb
Nb
∑x 2
1 16(12)
DFM = +
( )
Ext , Min
5 2 162 + 82
DFM Ext , Min = 0.50
DFM Ext , Min = MPF ( DF ) = 1.2(0.5) = 0.6
113
Distribution Factor - Two Lanes
12’ Lane 12’ Lane
1.5’ 2’ 6’ 4’ 2’ 6’
36k 36k 36k 36k
e2 = 18.5’ - 1.5’ - 2’ - 6’ - 4’ - 2’ - 3’ = 0’
e1 = 12’
(3.6.1.3)
Note: Truck cannot be closer than 2’ from the barrier and the truck
must be 2 feet from the lane edge.

Minimum Exterior Girder Distribution Factor Two Lane:

NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
Nb
∑x 2
2 ( + 0))
16(12
DFM = +
2(162 + 82 )
Ext , Min
5
DFM Ext , Min = MPF ( DF ) = 1.0(0.7) = 0.7 CONTROLS
114
DFMtwo lanes = 0.585 lanes/girder

DFMone lane = 0.600 lanes/girder (lever rule)
DFMminimum = 0.600 lanes/girder (one lanes)
DFMminimum = 0.700 lanes/girder (two lanes)
The controlling DFM is the minimum DFM with two lanes

loaded DFM = 0.7
This is a 5% increase from the interior girder (DFM =
0.665)

Exterior Beams Shear
Exterior Girders:
One Lane Loaded:
Lever Rule
DFM,Ext
M Ext = e DFM,Int
M Int
de
e = 0.60 +
10

115
Distribution Factor for Shear
Shear:
Exterior Girder – Two or More Lanes Loaded:
DFExt = e DFInt
de
e = 0.6 +
10
10
1.0
= 0.6 + = 0.70
10
DFExt+ = (0.70) (0.814) = 0.570

Distribution Factor for Shear
One Lane Loaded: (Lever Rule)
DFVEXT = 0.6
This is the same as moment calculation.
However, the minimum DF = 0.7 (from possible rigid body

rotation) - THIS CONTROLS.

116
DL-Unfactored Shear Forces & Bending Moments - Exterior Girder

Deck plus Future Wearing
Beam Weight Haunch Barrier Weight Surface
Location [Simple Span] [Simple Span] [Continuous Span] [Continuous Span]
Shear
Sh M g, Shear
Sh Ms, Shear
Sh M b, Shear
Sh Mws,
0.00 0.00 39.6 0 35.3 0 9.2 7.7 14.7 12.4
9.26 0.10 31.9 331 28.5 295.2 6.8 81.8 10.9 130.5
18.97 0.20 24 602.6 21.4 537.3 4.3 136 6.9 217
28.69 0.30 16 796.5 14.2 710.4 1.8 166 2.9 264.9
38.41 0.40 8 912.9 7.1 814.2 -0.6 171.9 -1 274.2
48.13 0.50 0 951.9 0 848.8 -3.1 153.6 -5 245.1
57.84 0.60 -8 912.9 -7.1 814.2 -5.6 111.2 -8.9 177.5
67.56 0.70 -16 796.5 -14.2 710.4 -8.1 44.7 -12.9 71.3
77.28 0.80 -24 602.6 -21.4 537.3 -10.6 -46 -16.9 -73.4
86.99 0.90 -31.9 331 -28.5 295.2 -13.1 -160.8 -20.8 -256.7
96.25 Brg. -39.6 0 -35.3 0 -15.4 -292.7 -24.6 -467.1

Length LL+IM
V M Exterior shear and
ft. k k-ft
Bearing 0 76.5 50.9 bending moments.
moments
Trans. 2.04 74.0 199.4
H/2 2.73 73.2 247.5
0.10L 9.26 65.3 655.8 Maximum envelope
0.20L 18.97 53.7 1101.8 values shown.
0.30L 28.69 42.9 1365.5
0.40L 38.41 34.2 1483.0
MidSpan 48.13 -41.3 1455.5 The values shown
0.60L 57.84 -51.6 1301.1
0.70L 67.56 -61.8 1009.2
may not be from the
0.80L 77.28 -71.7 -815.0 same load case.
0.90L 86.99 -81.3 -921.5
H/2 93.52 -87.1 -1252.7
Trans. 94.21 -87.7 -1299.1
Bearing 96.25 -89.5 -1449.7
117
Load Combinations

Service I:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
Maximum Q = 11.25(DC)
25(DC) + 1
1.50(DW)
50(DW) + 1
1.75(LL
75(LL + IM)

Load Combinations – Exterior Beam
Length Service 1 Service 3 Strength 1

V M V M V M
ft. k k-ft k k-ft k k-ft
Bearing 0 175.3 71.0 160.0 60.8 261.1 117.3
Trans. 2.04 168.2 416.2 153.4 376.4 250.8 630.3
H/2 2.73 165.8 528.7 151.1 479.2 247.2 797.3
0.10L 9.26 143.4 1494.4 130.3 1363.2 214.6 2228.5
0.20L 18.97 110.2 2594.7 99.5 2374.3 166.4 3848.5
0.30L 28.69 77.8 3303.3 69.3 3030.2 119.5 4878.1
0.40L 38.41 47.7 3656.2 40.8 3359.6 76.4 5380.4
MidSpan 48.13 -49.4 3654.7 -41.2 3363.6 -83.7 5357.4
0.60L 57.84 -81.2 3316.9 -70.9 3056.7 -129.6 4841.0
0 70L
0.70L 67 56
67.56 -113 0
-113.0 2632 0
2632.0 -100 7
-100.7 2430 2
2430.2 -175 4
-175.4 3812 5
3812.5
0.80L 77.28 -144.6 205.5 -130.3 368.5 -220.8 -568.0
0.90L 86.99 -175.6 -712.8 -159.3 -528.5 -265.4 -1635.0
H/2 93.52 -195.9 -1707.1 -178.5 -1456.5 -294.3 -2930.0
Trans. 94.21 -198.1 -1829.0 -180.6 -1569.2 -297.5 -3092.5
Bearing 96.25 -204.4 -2209.5 -186.5 -1919.6 -306.4 -3603.6

118
Compression: (5.9.4.2.1)
Due to permanent loads, for service limit states:
For the precast girder: 0.45fc’ = 0.45(7.0) = +3.150 ksi

For the precast girder: 0.40fc’ = 0.40(7.0) = +2.800 ksi


Compression (con’t): (5.9.4.2.1)

Due to p
permanent and transient loads for service limit states:
For the precast girder:
0.60Φw fc’ = 0.60(1.0)(7.0) = +4.200 ksi
For the deck:
0 60Φw fc’ = 0.60(1.0)(4.5)
0.60Φ 0 60(1 0)(4 5) = +2 700 ksi
+2.700
Note: Φw is a factor for slender webs/flanges. It is not really
meant for “I” girders. If the calculations required for Φw are
done, Φw=1.
119
Tension:
For components
p with bonded p
prestressing
g tendons:
For the precast girder:
0.19 f c' = 0.19(7.0) = 0.503ksi

Stresses at Midspan
Concrete stress at the top fiber of the girder, three cases:

1 Under permanent loads
1. loads, Service I:
ftg1 = − + +
A St St Stg
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 848.8) *12 (153.6 + 245.1) *12
ftg1 = − + +
789 8,909 8,909 39576
ftg1 = 1.23
1 23 − 22.18
18 + 22.43
43 + 00.12
12 = +11.60
60

120
Stresses at Midspan

( M LL + I )
ftg 2 = 0.5 ftg1 +
Stg
1, 455*12
ftg 2 = 0.5(1.60) +
39576
ftg 2 = 0.80 + 0.44 = +1.24

Stresses at Midspan
( M LL + I )
ftg 3 = ftg1 +
Stg
1, 455*12
ftg 3 = (1.60) +
39576
ftg 3 = 1.60
1 60 + 0.44
0 44 = +2.04
2 04

121
Stresses at Midspan
( M ws + M b )
ftc =
Stc
(245.1 + 153.6) *12
ftc = +
25271
ftc = +0.186
Note that deck stresses under service loads are almost always well
below allowable for continuous for LL bridges; but they still must be
checked.
Stresses at Midspan

( M LL + I )
f tc 2 = 0.5 f tc1 +
Stc
1, 455*12
f tc 2 = 0.5(0.186) +
25721
f tc 2 = 0.09 + 0.68 = +0.77

122
Stresses at Midspan

( M LL + I )
ftc 3 = ftc1 +
Stc
1, 455*12
ftc 3 = (0.186) +
25721
ftc 3 = 0.19 + 0.68 = +0.87
C
Compressive stress limit ffor concrete: +2.700 ksi OK
O

Stresses at Midspan
Tension stress at the bottom fiber of the girder, Service III:

fb = + − −
A Sb Sb Sbc
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 848.8) *12 [ (245.1 + 153.6) + (0.8*1455) ] *12
fb = + − −
789 10,542 10,542 16,340
fb = 1.23 + 1.84 − 2.05 − 1.15 = −0.13

123
Stresses at Midspan
GIRDER STRESSES INT EXT

COMP – PERMANENT LOADS 1.98 ksi 1.60 ksi
COMP – ½ PERMANENT LOADS 1.34 ksi 1.24 ksi
+ LL
COMP – PERMANENT LOADS + 2.33 ksi 2.04 ksi
LL
TENSION 0.40 ksi 0.13 ksi


M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM ) (Tables 3.4.1-
1&2)
M u ,ext = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )

M u ,ext = 1.25(912.9 + 814.2 + 171.9) + 1.5(274.2) + 1.75(1, 483)
M u ,ext = 5380k − ft < M u ,int = 5, 615k − ft
Since exterior Mu is less than interior Mu, OK

124
The positive moment, under the Strength I limit state, for the exterior
girder is less than that for interior girder. Although the LL increases, the
DL decreases due to the flange (slab) being narrower.
The interior girder design met all the checks for positive moment design.
These were: Nominal Strength, tension controlled, and minimum
reinforcement. All of these checks depend on Mu and/or Mn. Since
MU,ext<Mu,int, the design for the interior girder for POSITIVE MOMENT is
adequate for exterior girder.
Stresses at transfer of prestressing force is independent of whether the

girder is interior or exterior, so no check is needed.


M u = 1.25(
1 25( DC ) + 11.5(
5( DW ) + 11.75(
75( LL + IM ) (3.4.1-1&2)
(3 4 1 1&2)
M u = 1.25(−292.7) + 1.5(−467.1) + 1.75(−1, 450) = −3604 kip-ft
This is 4% greater than the moment for the interior girder. This is
because the LL moment increases. At the support, the slab moment is
0 so it has no effect
0, effect. Away from the support,
support the slab moment is
positive, so it would mitigate the negative moment. Thus, the smaller
slab moment has the effect of INCREASING the negative moment, as
compared to the interior girder.

125
 As (60) 
3 604(12) = 00.90
3, 90 As (60)  58 25 −
58.25 
 1.7(7.0)(26) 
0 = 10.47 As2 − 3145 As + 43248
As = 14.5in 2
This is the required amount of mild steel reinforcement required in the
slab to resist the negative
g moment and it is equal
q to 33 #6 bars.
Distributed over a length of 6.5 feet, this would be #6 @ 4 inches top
and bottom! Use 16 bars on the bottom and 17 on the top. As = 14.52
in2
Note: Only 13.98 in2 were required for the interior girder.
Location of steel:
Top – 17 #6 with 2”
2 clear
Btm – 16 #6 with 2 5/8” clear.
As = 33(0.44) = 14.52 in2

17(0.44)(2.375) + 16(0.44)(8.5 − 3)
x=
14.52
56.48
x= = 3.9
14.52

d = 58.6 in
126
Now check Mn:
a=
Asf y
=
(14.52 )( 60 ) = 5.63in
0.85f c ' b 0.85 ( 7 )( 26 )
a 5.63
c= = = 8.04
β1 0.7
 63 
5.63
M r = φM n = ( 0.9 )(14.52 )( 60 )  58.6 − 
 2 
M r = 43740k − in = 3, 645k − ft > M u = 3, 604k − ft
According to LRFD 5.7.3.4 the spacing of the mild steel

reinforcement in the layer closest to the tension face shall satisfy
equation 5.7.3.4-1.
700γ e
s≤ − 2d c
βs fs
Based on the check made for the interior girders (requiring a spacing
of 9 inches)
inches), #6@ 4 inches will clearly satisfy this requirement
requirement. Note
that the service level stress will increase, but not enough to bring the
requirement below 4 inches.

127
Maximum Reinforcement – Negative Moment Section
As before, check the strain in the extreme tensile steel:
 d −c  59.9 − 8.04 

ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.019 > 0.005
 c   8.04 
(5.7.2.1 & 5.5.4.2)

S 
 Snc 
Where:
fr = 0.37 f c' = 0.37 4.5 = 0.785 ksi

fcpe = 0.0 ksi
Mdnc= Mg + Ms = 0 kip-ft
Sc= 16340 in3

128
16340
M cr = (0.785)
12
M cr = 1069k − ft
1.2 M cr = 1282k − ft
At bearing, the factored moment required by the Strength I load
combination is: Mu = -3604 kip-ft
Therefore, 1.33M u = 4793 kip-ft
Since 1.2 M cr < 1.33M u , 1.2 M cr Controls
M r = 3, 645 > 1.2 M cr = 1282 OK


The design of the exterior section meets all requirements

for positive and negative bending under both Service and
Strength Limit States.

129
Design of the Section for Shear

Strength I
Length Interior Exterior
This compares Strength
V M V M I shears and moments
ft
ft. k kk-ft
ft k kk-ft
ft for the interior and
Bearing 0 299.125 113.1 261.0657 117.3438
Trans. 2.04 287.45 644.925 250.7524 630.3376 exterior girders. Note
H/2 2.73 283.375 817.925 247.1722 797.2625 that the exterior girder
0.10L 9.26 246.375 2303.925 214.6325 2228.485 shears are LESS than
0.20L 18.97 191.575 3993.775 166.3629 3848.451
0.30L 28.69 138.4 5077.725 119.4571 4878.126 the interior girder
0.40L 38.41 89.575 5615.875 76.42157 5380.371 shears. Thus, the
MidSpan 48.13 -95.9 5610.625 -83.733 5357.442
0.60L 57.84 -147.875 5091.675 -129.581 4841.008
previous design works
0.70L 67.56 -199.95 4041.75 -175.438 3812.453 for vertical and
0.80L 77.28 -251.375 -329.31 -220.846 -567.967 horizontal shear. The
0.90L 86.99 -301.825 -1464.58 -265.37 -1635.04
H/2 93.52 -334.65 -2795.88 -294.34 -2929.99
longitudinal steel
Trans. 94.21 -338.2 -2961.82 -297.47 -3092.54 requirements are also
Bearing 96.25 -348.325 -3482.75 -306.435 -3603.56 met.

130
E3GUIDED DESIGN EXAMPLE
Non-composite, Skewed, Adjacent Box Girder Bridge; LRFD Specifications
1.1 This design example demonstrates the design of a single span, 65 ft. long adjacent box
INTRODUCTION girder bridge with a 30o right forward skew, as shown below. This example illustrates
the design of typical interior and exterior beams at the critical sections in positive
flexure and shear due to prestressing, dead load, and live load.
1.1-1
Longitudinal
Section
1.1-2
Transverse Cross
Section
1.1-3
Plan View
Box Girder Example To be Used as an Example, Only

ODOT Short Course Page 1 of 35
1.2 Concrete @ release: fci’ = 5000 psi
MATERIALS Concrete @ 28 days: fc’ = 7000 psi
ODOT Bridge Design Manual (BDM) allows a range of strengths. These are chosen
from that range [ODOT BDM 302.5.1.7]
1.2.1 Ohio B33-48 box girder. Chosen from preliminary design charts in ODOT Design
Precast Data Sheets. Group “B” Design (roadway width 36 ft. to 48 ft.).
Beams
ODOT requires the use of minimum span to depth ratios given in LRFD Article
2.5.2.6.3. For a precast box, the limit is 0.03L = 0.03(65ft)(12in/ft) =23.4 inches OK.
1.2.3 AASHTO M203 (ASTM A416) 7 wire, low relaxation, ½ inch dia., Gr. 270.
Prestressing Here, ½ inch strand is chosen, although the BDM allows both ½ inch and 0.6 inch
Strand diameter. [ODOT BDM 301.5.1.2a]
1.2.4 AASHTO M31 (ASTM A615), Gr. 60 [ODOT BDM 302.5.1.8].

Reinforcing Bars Yield strength, fy = 60 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, Es = 29,000 ksi

1.2.5 Diaphragms: Two, 12 inch wide diaphragms at the 1/3 points
Loads [ODOT Std. Drawings]
Future wearing surface: 0.060 ksf (ODOT Design Data Sheets)

Barriers: 0.090 k/ft each (ODOT Design Data Sheets)
1.2.6 Single Span

Bridge Overall Length: 67 ft.
Parameters c/c Span: 65 ft.
Support: Elastomeric Bearing Pad
1.3 Area in2 733.5

CROSS- Weight (k/ft) 0.764
h (in) 33
SECTION
yb (in) 16.61
PROPERTIES yt (in) 16.39
FOR A I (in4) 108,150
TYPICAL Sb (in3) 6,511
BEAM St (in3) 6,599
1.3.1 E c = 33, 000K1w1.5 f c ' [LRFD 5.4.2.4-1]
Non-Composite
Units are kips; w is weight in kcf, fc’ is given in ksi.
Section
E c = 33, 000(1.0)(0.150 kcf )1.5 5 ksi = 4,300 ksi - at transfer
K1 is an aggregate factor = 1.0 unless specified by the owner.
E C = 33, 000 × 1.0 × 0.1501.5 7.0 = 5, 072 ksi - service loads
1.3.2 The current ODOT standard is to tie the girders together with tie rods, tightened
Assumptions enough to bring the girders together, but not providing significant lateral post-
tensioning. According to the commentary in the LRFD Specifications, for this bridge
to be considered to have the girders “sufficiently connected”, a lateral post-tensioning
force causing a stress of 0.25 ksi across the keyway is needed. Therefore, this bridge
will be considered as not being “sufficiently connected”. In practice, all this does is
change the distribution factor.
1.4 DC = Dead load of structural components and non-structural attachments

SHEAR
FORCES & Beam Weight: DCg = 0.764 klf
BENDING
MOMENTS Diaphragms: 2 at each 1/3 point:
1.4.1 ( 33in − 10.5in )( 48in − 11in ) 1ft 2 diaphragms 0.150kcf = 1.75k
Dead Loads DCd = ( )( )( )
144in 2 / ft 2

Asphalt Wearing Surface – at construction:
ODOT specifies a MINIMUM of 3 inches in the Bridge Design Manual, but the
Design Data Sheets use a 3.5 inch average to account for camber along the
length of beam.
3.5in
DC ws = ( 4ft )( 0.120pcf ) = 0.140klf
12in / ft
Rails – 0.090 klf – applied to exterior girders only

(In other examples, barrier/railing loads are distributed equally to all the girders,
but Article 4.6.2.2 appears to require a deck to distribute the load equally to all
girders).
DW = future wearing surfaces and future DL

DWfws = ( 0.060ksf )( 4ft ) = 0.240klf
1.4.1.1 Since this is a simple span beam, the most critical moment is at midspan.
DL-Unfactored
( 0.764klf + 0.140klf )( 65ft )
2
Bending  65ft 
M DC = + 1.75k = 515.3k − ft
Moments 8  3 
( 0.240klf )( 65ft )
2
M DW = = 126.8k − ft
8
1.4.2 According to LRFD Article 4.6.1.2.1 vehicular live loading on the roadways of bridges
Live Loads or incidental structures, designated HL-93, shall consists of a combination of the:
• Design truck or design tandem with dynamic allowance. The design truck shall
consists of an 8.0 kip front axle and a pair of 32.0 kip back axles. The first and
second axle are spaced 14’-0” apart. The space between the rear axles shall be
varied between 14.0’ and 30.0’ to porduce extreme force effects. The design
tandem shall consist of a pair of 25.0 kip axles spaced 4.0’ apart. [LRFD
Article 3.6.1.2.2 and 3.6.1.2.3]
• Design lane load shall consist of a load of 0.64 kip/ft uniformly distributed in
the longitudinal direction. [LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.4]
Since this is a simple span, the maximum moment from the LANE LOAD occurs when
the girder is fully loaded. Thus:
( 0.640klf )( 65ft )
2
M LL,Lane = = 338k − ft
8
The HL-93 truck controls for this span length. Since this is a simple span, there is a
simple formula for finding the maximum moment. The position of the resultant load is
found and the midspan of the beam is placed halfway between the resultant and the
nearest axle load. Note that the resultant is NOT used to find the moment, just the
position of the axle loads. Also note that for a simple span, the moment is greatest
when the back axles are as close together as possible, thus the minimum spacing of 14
feet is used.

The calculated moment is:
M LL,Truck = 896.0 k − ft
1.4.2.1 The live load bending moments and shear forces are determined by using the simplified
Distribution distribution factor formulas [LRFD 4.6.2.2]. To use the simplified live load
Factors distribution factor formulas, the following conditions must be met [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1]

de = 0.23 ft
Curvature in plan < specified in Article 4.6.1.2 OK
For a precast concrete box beam with an asphalt surface, the bridge type is (g).
[LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-1]
The number of design lanes should be determined by taking the integer part of the ratio
w/12, where w is the clear roadway width in ft between curbs and/or barriers.
[LRFD 3.6.1.1.1]
w = 48 ft.

1.4.2.1.1 This bridge is assumed to have no significant lateral post-tensioning.
Distribution DFM = S/D
Factors for Where:
Bending Moment S = width of precast beam (ft)
D = (11.5 -NL)+1.4NL(1-0.2C)2 when C < 5 [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1]

D = (11.5 -NL) when C > 5
NL ≤ 6
Skew ≤ 45°
Where:
NL = number of traffic lanes
C = K(W/L) < K
Where:
K=
(1 + µ )I
J
J is not published for ODOT girders. However, it can be approximated by:
( )
2
4 A2 4 1180in 2
J= = = 211625in4
S  27.75in  42.5in 42.5in
∑ t 2  5.5in  + 5.5in + 5in
Where:
A = the area enclosed by the centerline of the box walls.
T = wall thickness
S = length of the centerline of a box wall.
µ = Poisson’s Ratio = 0.2 [LRFD 5.4.2.5]
K=
(1 + 0.2 ) 108150in4 = 0.783
211625in4
 48 ft 
C = 0.783   = 0.578
 65 ft 
D = ( 11.5 − 4Lanes ) + 1.4 ( 4Lanes ) ( 1 − 0.2 ( 0.578 ) ) = 11.9
2
S 4 ft
= = 0.336
D 11.9
Note that for boxes, K can be conservatively taken as 1. The DFM = 0.361, a
difference of 8%.
Also note that there is only one distribution factor for this case. This is different from
other cases where there are factors for one lane loaded and two lanes loaded.

1.4.2.1.1 Shear forces will be calculated in the section on shear design.
Distribution The distribution factors will be calculated here.
Factors for Shear
Force Two Lanes Loaded:
DFV = (b/156)0.4 (b/12L)0.1 (I/J)0.05(b/48) [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3a-1]
Where:
b
≥ 1.0
48
One Lane Loaded:
DFV = (b/130L)0.15 (I/J)0.05
5 < Nb < 20 Number of beams
35< b < 60 in Beam width
20< L < 120 ft Span
25000 < J < 610000 in4
40000 < I < 610000 in4
Two Lanes Loaded:

0.1
 48 
0.4
 48   108150 0.05  48 
DFV =         = 0.456 CONTROLS
 156   12 ( 65 )   211625   48 
One Lane Loaded:

0.15
 48   108150 
0.05
DFV =  = 0.445
 130 ( 65 )   
 211625 
 
Because I/J is raised to a very small power, assuming I/J = 1 changes the DFV very
little. In this example, the DFV is about 4% higher if I/J = 1.
1.4.2.2 IM = 33%
Dynamic
Where: IM = dynamic load allowance, applied only to truck load
Allowance
1.4.2.3 g = 1.05 − 0.25 tan θ ≤ 1.0 For 0° ≤ θ ≤ 60° [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2e-1]
Moment
Reduction
g = 1.05 − 0.25 tan 30 ( ) = 0.905
o
Factor for
Skew The specifications state that the MOMENT DISTRIBUTION FACTOR in a skewed
bridge MAY be reduced by this factor.
Note: Table 4.6.2.2.2e-1 has an inconsistency. It does not include this type of bridge
in the description in the first column, but names it as a cross section type in the second
column. It is assumed the skew factor applies to this structure.

1.4.2.4 Unfactored bending moment due to HL-93 truck, per beam:
Unfactored MLL,Truck = (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(1+IM)(skew factor)
Bending =(bending moment per lane)(0.336)(1.33)(0.905)
Moments =(bending moment per lane)(0.404)
= 896 k-ft (0.404) = 362.3 k-ft
Unfactored bending moment due to HL-93 lane load, per beam:

MLL,Lane = (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(skew factor)
= 338 k-ft (0.304) = 102.7 k-ft (Impact is not applied to lane loads.)
1.4.3 The following limit states are applicable: [LRFD 3.4.1]

Load Service I:
Combinations Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
Fatigue: Does not need to be checked for pretensioned beams designed using the
Service III load combination.
1.5 Box girders are usually controlled by Strength I, but it is difficult to estimate number of
ESTIMATE strands using Strength I. It is easier to estimate the number of strands using Service III
REQUIRED and add a few strands. Final strand patterns can be adjusted, if needed, later.
PRESTRESS
1.5.1 Bottom tensile stress due to applied dead and live loads using load combination Service
Service Load III:
Stresses at M + M DW + 0.8M LL + I
Midspan f b = DC
Sb
Where:
MDC = Unfactored bending moment due to DC loads kip-ft
MDW = Unfactored bending moment due to DW loads kip-ft
Sb = Section modulus to the bottom fiber in3
fb =
{515.3 + 126.8 + 0.8 ( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ft} (12in / ft ) = 1.87ksi
6511in 3

Remember! For Service III (which applies ONLY to tension in fully prestressed
members), the LL factor is 0.8!
Box girders are usually controlled by Strength I, but it is difficult to estimate number of
strands using Strength I. It is easier to estimate the number of strands using Service III
and add a few strands. Final strand patterns can be adjusted, if needed, later.
1.5.2 According to LRFD Table 5.9.4.2.2-1 the tensile stress limit at service loads is
Tensile
Stress Limits for
Concrete f b ≤ 0.19 f c ' = 0.19 7ksi = 0.503ksi
1.5.3 The difference between the bottom fiber tensile stress due to applied loads and the
Required Number tensile stress limit is the required precompression stress.
of Strands f pb = (1.87ksi − 0.503ksi ) = 1.37ksi
Assume the strands are 2 inches from the bottom of the girder.
ec = 16.61in − 2in = 14.61in
If Ppe is the total prestressing force, the stress at the bottom fiber due to presstress is:
P P e
f pb = pe + pe c
A Sb
Now plug in the required precompression stress, fpb and solve form Ppe:
1.37ksi
Ppe = = 380kips
 1 14.61in 
 2
+ 
 733.5in 6511in 3 
Final prestress force per strand = (area of strand)(fpi)(1-losses, %) where fpi = initial
prestressing stress before transfer, ksi. For Grade 270 strand, fpi = 0.75fpu = 202.5 ksi.
Assuming 25% loss of prestress the final prestressing force per strand after losses is:
(0.153)(202.5)(1 − 0.25) = 23.2kips
380kips
# strands = = 16.4
23.2kips
This shows a need for at least (18) ½ in diameter, 270 ksi, low-lax strands as the strand
pattern must be symmetrical.

1.5.4 The ODOT Design Data Sheet for Group “B” roadway widths gives 20 strands at 2”
Strand Pattern from the bottom. Use the strand pattern of 20 strands shown at the midspan:
Using 20 strands allows for the possibility that the Strength Limit State controls. This
pattern should work for exterior girders. Recall that the exterior girders will have the
guardrail load and increased live load because of the exterior girder factor. It is NOT
good design practice to have the exterior girder strand patterns be different than that for
the interior girders. By using the same pattern for all girders, the fabricator has the
option to fabricate exterior and interior girders in the same bed at the same time.
2.0 Total Prestress Losses:

SERVICE
LOAD ∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT [LRFD 5.9.5.1-1]
LIMIT
STATE Where:
2.1
Prestress Losses ∆fpES = loss due to elastic shortening, ksi
∆fpLT = loss due to long-term shrinkage and creep of
2.1.1 Ep
Elastic ∆f pES = f cgp [LRFD 5.9.5.2.3a-1]
E ct
Shortening

Where:
fcgp = The concrete stress at the center of gravity of prestressing tendons due
to the prestressing force immediately after the transfer and the self-
weight of the member at the section of the maximum moment (ksi).
For the purpose of estimating fcgp, the prestressing force immediately
after transfer may be assumed to be equal to 0.9 of the force just before
transfer; also, change of concrete stress at the center of gravity of
prestressing tendons due to subsequent applied loads, when considered.
P P e2 M e
f cgp = i + i c − g c
A I I
Eci = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at the time of transfer or time of load
application (ksi).
Mg = girder self weight at release
( 0.764klf )( 65ft )  65ft 
2
= Mg = + 1.75k = 441.4k − ft = 5300k − in

8  3 
( )
Pi = 20strands ( 0.9 )( 202.5ksi ) 0.153in 2 = 558k
558k (14.61in ) 5300k − in (14.61in )

2
558k
f cgp = 2
+ − = 1.15ksi
733.5in 108150in 4 108150in 4
28500ksi
∆f pES = (1.15ksi ) = 7.6ksi
4300ksi
Note: In many example problems, the gravity moment for elastic shortening losses and
stresses at release are calculated using the overall length of the girder. The thought
here is that the girder will “sit up on its ends” and the span will be the overall length.
In this example, the center of bearing to center of bearing span is used rather than
overall length. This is done for 3 reasons:
1) This value will be needed later for service load calculations. Using it in this
calculation saves a calculation later.
2) It is conservative as it actually results in higher losses and higher stresses in the
concrete.
3) It doesn’t make that much of a difference. In this case, using the overall length
increases the gravity moment 6% and decreases the loss 4%. The concrete unit
weight, modulus of elasticity, modulus of rupture and the strength are not
known with an accuracy that justifies being concerned over a few percent
differences in the gravity moment.
2.1.2 For standard, precast, pretensioned members subject to normal loading and
Long-Term environmental conditions:
Losses

f pi A ps
∆f pLT = 10 γ h γ st + 12 γ h γ st + ∆f pR [LRFD 5.9.5.3-1]
Ag
In which:
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01H [LRFD 5.9.5.3-2]
5
γ st = [LRFD 5.9.5.3-3]
1 + f ci '
Where:
γhst = Correction factor for specified concrete strength at time of
Prestress transfer to the concrete member
∆fpR = An estimate of relaxation loss taken as 2.5 ksi for low
relaxation strand, 10.0 ksi for stress relieved strand, and in
accordance with manufacturers recommendation for other types
of strand (ksi)
Assume H = 70%
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01 ( 70 ) = 1.00
5
γ st = = 0.83
1+ 5
So:
( 202.5ksi )( 20 ) ( 0.153in 2 )
∆f pLT = 10 (1.00 )( 0.83) + 12 (1.00 )( 0.83) + 2.5
733.5in 2
∆f pLT = 7.0 + 10.0 + 2.5 = 19.5ksi
2.1.3 Total Prestress Losses:

Total Losses at
Service Loads ∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT = 7.6 + 19.5 = 27.1ksi
27.1ksi
Loss = (100% ) = 13.3% [LRFD 5.9.5.1-1]
202.5ksi
f pe = 202.5 − 27.1 = 175.4ksi
Loss is less than the 25% initially assumed, so OK.
2.2 Sum of effective prestress + permanent loads < 0.45fc’

Compression 1/2(Sum of effective prestress + permanent loads) + live load < 0.4 fc’
Stress Sum of effective prestress + permanent loads + transient loads < 0.6φwfc’
Limit [LRFD Table 5.9.4.2.1-1]

2.2.1 φw is a modifier for sections with thin webs or flanges. It is actually defined in the
φw section for hollow, rectangular compression members (Art. 5.7.4.7). It is based on the
flange or web length/thickness ratio. Since this is for sections with thin webs/flanges,
φw term will usually be = 1 for most beams.
Find the web and flange slenderness ratios:

X
λw = u [LRFD 5.7.4.7.1-1]
t
Where:
Xu = the clear length of the constant thickness
portion of the wall between other walls or fillets
t = wall thickness
48in − 2 ( 5.5in ) − 2 ( 3in )

λw = = 6.2 Bottom Flange
5in
33in − ( 5.5in ) − 5in − 2 ( 3in )
λw = = 2.9 Web
5.5in
The top flange λw < 15 by inspection.
If λw < 15, φw = 1.0 [LRFD 5.7.4.7.2c-1]
X u = b − ( lesser of 2 z or 2 y )
2.2 Pe =20 strand (0.153in2)(202.5 ksi – 27.1 ksi) = 537 kips

Service
Load 537k 537k (14.61in )
Stresses f cp,top = 2
− = −0.457ksi
733.5in 6599in 3
( 515.3 + 126.8 ) k − ft  (12in / ft )

f cDL,top =  = 1.17ksi
6599in 3
f cLL,top =
{( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ft} (12in / ft ) = 0.85ksi
6599in 3

2.2.3 f cp,top + f cDL,top = −0.457ksi + 1.17ksi = 0.713ksi < 0.45f c ' = 0.45 ( 7ksi ) = 3.15ksi
Service Load
Compression
Stress f cp,top + f cDL,top 0.713ksi
+ f cLL,top = + 0.85ksi = 1.21ksi < 0.4(7ksi) = 2.8ksi
Check 2 2
Service I
f cp,top + f cDL,top + f cLL,top = 0.713ksi + 0.85ksi = 1.56ksi < 0.6 (1.0 )( 7ksi ) = 4.2ksi
Compression stresses OK
2.3.4 The Service III stress at the bottom due to dead and live loads, fb, was calculated
Service Load previously.
Tensile The allowable tensile stress of 0.530 ksi was also calculated previously
Stress Check
Service III 537kips 537k (14.61in )
f pb = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
f b = −1.87ksi
f pb + f b = 1.94ksi − 1.87ksi = +0.07ksi = 0.07ksi COMPRESSION
No Tensile Stresses!!! Compression obviously OK
Because the bottom of the girder is in compression, check with Service I:
fb =
{515.3 + 126.8 + ( 362.3 + 102.7 ) k − ft}(12in / ft ) = 2.04ksi
6511in 3
537kips 537k (14.61in )

f pb = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
f b = −2.04ksi
f pb + f b = 1.94ksi − 2.04ksi = −0.1ksi = 0.1ksi TENSION
Now it’s in tension, which is Service III ? Actually, it is sort of both. For all intents
and purposes, the stress at the bottom of the girder is “0” – and this is a dividing line
between Service I and Service III. Because of the 0.8 factor on the LL, there is an
inconsistency between the two load cases. However the stress is so low, that really
doesn’t matter – we satisfy all allowables in all cases.

3.0 Strength I:
STRENGTH
Q = 1.25(DC) + 1.50(DW) + 1.75(LL + IM)
LIMIT STATE
3.1 Q = 1.25(DC) + 1.50(DW) + 1.75(Truck + Lane)
Factored
Moment M u = 1.25 ( 515.3) + 1.50 (126.8 ) + 1.75 ( 362.3 + 102.7 ) = 1648k − ft = 19780k − in
3.2  c 
Steel Stress f ps = f pu 1 − k  [LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1]
 dp
At Strength  
Limit State Where:
Assume the section is rectangular:

A f + A s f s − A s 'f s '
c = ps pu [LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4]
f
0.85f c ' β1b + kA ps pu
dp
Where:
fpu = Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel ksi
= 270
As = Area of mild steel tension reinforcement in2
= 0.0
fy = Yield strength of tension reinforcement ksi
= 60.0
As‘ = Area of compression reinforcement in2
= 0.0
fy‘ = Yield strength of compression reinforcement ksi
= 60.0
fc‘ = Compressive strength of deck concrete ksi
= 7.0
= 0.85 – 0.05(f’c – 4.0) > 0.65 for f’c > 4.0
= 0.70
b= Width of compression flange in.
= 48
c=
( )
20 0.153in 2 270ksi + 0 − 0
= 3.98in. < 5.5in.
270ksi
(
0.85 ( 7ksi )( 0.7 )( 48in ) + 0.28 ( 20 ) 0.153in 2
) 31 in
 3.98in 
f ps = 270ksi 1 − 0.28  = 260ksi
 31 in 

c is also the neutral axis depth, so the stress block depth, a = β1c = 0.7(3.98) = 2.79
inches. Since c < hf, the stress block is entirely in the flange so the beam may be
treated as rectangular.
3.3 The moment equation in the LRFD Specification looks like this
Flexural
Resistance  a  a  a  a hf 
M n = Aps f ps  d p −  + As f y  d s −  − As ' f y '  d s ' −  + 0.85 f c ' ( b − bw ) h f  − 
 2  2  2 2 2 
If the section is rectangular (b=bw), the equation becomes:
 a  a  a
 2  2  2
If there is no compression or mild tension steel, the equation becomes:
 a
 2
Since c < hf, the section may be treated as rectangular.
a = 2.79in
 a
M n = A ps f ps  d p −  [LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1]
 2
 2.79in 
( )
M n = 20 0.153in 2 ( 260ksi )  31 in −
 2 
 = 23550k − in
Note: The nominal flange width of 48 inches was used for “b”. In reality, the flange
area is reduced by the shear key cut-out. However, this is often ignored as this would
require an iterative procedure. If the area is adjusted for the shear key, the nominal
moment, Mn changes by only 0.10%. It may not be appropriate to reduce the area by
the shear key cut-out as this will be filled with grout and the grout may act with the
base concrete to effectively provide the complete flange width. All of this is a matter of
engineering judgment.

3.4 To determine Φ, it is necessary to calculate the steel
Determination strain at the level of the extreme tensile steel.
Of
Phi c = 3.98 inches (calculated above)
dt is the distance to the extreme tensile steel. Since
there is only one row of steel, dt = dp.
dt − c 31in − 3.98
ε t = 0.003 = 0.003 = 0.0204
c 3.98
Since εt > 0.005, the section is tension controlled. [LRFD 5.7.2.1]
Φ = 1.0 [LRFD 5.5.4.2.1]
This is a big change from the old ρbalanced method. However, this now makes the LRFD
Specifications consistent with ACI 318. This replaces the maximum reinforcement
provisions.
3.5 M u ≤ ΦM n
Determination of
19, 780k − in < (1.0 )( 23550k − in ) OK
Flexural
Strength
3.6 For minimum reinforcement, the resistance moment, Mr must be at least the lesser of
Maximum and 1.2 times the cracking moment or 1.33 times the factored applied moment.
Minimum 1.33Mu = 1.33(19780 k-in) = 26310 k-in
Reinforcement
For the cracking moment, find the modulus of rupture:
f r = 0.37 f c ' = 0.37 7ksi = 0.979ksi [LRFD 5.4.2.6]
Note that this is a new MOR for minimum reinforcement. It is equal to 11.5√fc’ in psi;
which is the upper bound for MOR.
Next, determine the stress at the bottom of the box due to effective prestressing force:
537kips 537k (14.61in )
f cpe = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3

M cr = Sb ( f r + f cpe ) [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1]
M cr = 6511in 3 ( 0.979ksi + 1.94ksi ) = 19000k − in

1.2Mcr = 1.2(19000k-in) = 22800k-in < 1.33Mu
Mr = φMn = 1.0(23550) k-in = 23550k-in > 22800 k-in OK
Note: When the number of strands was selected, it was determined that 18 strands
would be needed, but 20 were used. If 18 strands had been used, φMn = 21400 k-in, so
18 strands would NOT meet the minimum requirement.
4.0 Assume the stress at transfer is 0.9fpi

STRESSES
AT Pi = 20 strand(0.153in2)(0.9)(202.5 ksi)=558 kips
TRANSFER
4.1
Steel Stress
At Transfer
4.2 Tension: 0.0948√fci’ < 0.2ksi w/o bonded reinforcement [LRFD Table 5.9.4.1.2-1]
Allowable 0.24√fci’ w/bonded reinforcement
Stresses at
Transfer Compression: 0.6fci’
4.3 558kips 558k (14.61in )

End f pt = − = −0.474ksi
733.5in 2 6599in 3
Stress
At Transfer 558kips 558k (14.61in )
f pb = + = 2.01ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
These stresses should be calculated at the end of the transfer length = 60db=30 inches.
The dead load stresses 30 inches from the support should be added. However, these
stresses will not be large and it is conservative to use just the stress due to prestressing.
fpt = 0.474 ksi tension < 0.24√fci’ = 0.24√5ksi = 0.537 ksi OK w/bonded steel
fpb = 2.01 ksi compression < 0.6fci = 0.6(5ksi) = 3 ksi OK
Because the stress is OK, no debonding is needed. However, if debonding was needed,
no more that 25% of the total number of strands could be debonded and no more than
40% in one row can be debonded.
[LRFD 5.11.4.3]
4.3.1 Bonded steel is needed at the top of the girder at the end to take the tensile forces. This
Bonded steel must resist the total tension in the top flange with a stress of no more than 0.5fy
Steel but not more than 30 ksi. [LRFD Table 5.9.4.1.2-1]
The first step it to find the tension in the flange. This requires the location of the
neutral axis to be determined. From the top and bottom stresses at the end, the neutral
at the end is:

From the top and bottom stresses at the end, the
neutral at the end is:
0.474ksi ( 33in )
x= = 6.30in
0.474 + 2.01ksi
The top flange is 5.5 inches, so the stress at the

bottom of the top flange is:
0.474ksi
( 6.3in − 5.5in ) = 0.060ksi
6.30in
The total tensile force is:
0.474ksi + 0.060ksi
T = 0.5 ( 6.30in )( 0.474ksi )( 5.5in )( 2 ) + ( 5.5in ) ( 48in − 2 ( 5.5in ) )
2
T = 70.8kips
Again, this tension could be reduced by calculating the force at the end of the transfer
length (including the gravity moment). Including the gravity moment will reduced the
calculated tension, but because bars only come in certain sizes, the reduction may not
change the number of bars needed.
The bonded steel must resist the total tensile force with a stress not exceeding the lesser
of 0.5fy or 30 ksi. [LRFD Table 5.9.4.1.2-1]
70.8kips
As = = 2.36in 2
30ksi
Use 8 #5
The length of the bar is determined by the point where bonded steel is no longer
required. Since 0.0948√fci’ = 0.212 ksi > 0.2ksi; find the point where the dead load
drops the stress below 0.2 ksi.
For simplicity, just consider the beam weight and ignore diaphragms.
The required moment = ∆fc St = (0.474 ksi – 0.200 ksi) 6599 in3 = 1808 k-in
= 150.7k-ft
M = 150.7k − ft = 0.5 ( 0.764klf ) x ( 65ft − x )

150.7k − ft = 24.83x − 0.382x 2
x = 6.75ft; 58.25ft

This is from center of bearing, so extend steel 7.75 ft. from each end and then add
development length.
1.25A b f y
ld = ≥ 0.4d b f y [LRFD 5.11.2.1.1]
fc '
1.25 ( 0.31in 2 ) 60ksi
ld = = 8.8in < 0.4 ( 0.625in )( 60ksi ) = 15in
7ksi
Where:
Ab = Area of the bar
db = diameter of bar
Top bar factor = 1.4
1.4(15inches) = 21 inches
So the minimum bar length = 6’- 9” + 1’ – 9” = 9’ – 6”
4.4 Mg = 5300 k-in (calculated in the section on losses - 2.1.1)

Midspan 5300k − in
f t,DL = = 0.803ksi
Stress 6599in 3
At Transfer −5300k − in
f b,DL = = −0.814ksi
6511in 3
f top = −0.474ksi + 0.803ksi = 0.329ksi

f bot = 2.01ksi − 0.814ksi = 1.120ksi
By inspection, both are below the compression limit.
5.0 The critical section is at dv from the face of the support for a section where the reaction
SHEAR force in the direction of the applied shear introduces compression into the end region of
5.1 the member. [LRFD 5.8.3.2]
Critical
Section For this member with only a single layer of prestressing steel:
a 2.79in
d v = d p − = 31in − = 29.6inches
2 2
The term dv is not taken less than:
0.9de = 0.9(31 inches)=27.9 inches < 29.6 inches
or
0.72h = 0.72(33 inches) = 23.76 inches < 29.6 inches
Assuming a 1 ft. long bearing pad, the critical section is:
29.6+6 = 35.6 inches from center of bearing. For calculations, use 36 inches = 3 ft.
The difference is only a few percent.

5.2 DC:
Shear Forces For beam weight:
And Moments Vg = w ( 0.5L − x ) = 0.764klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 3ft ) = 22.54k
At the Critical
Section M g = 0.5wx ( L − x ) = 0.5 ( 0.764klf )( 3ft )( 65ft − 3ft ) = 71.0k − ft
5.2.1
Basic For the diaphragm, V = 1.75k (shear is constant), M = 1.75(3) = 5.25k-ft
Shear
Forces For the wearing surface:
And Vws = 0.140klf ( 0.5 ( 65 ft ) − 3 ft ) = 4.13k
Moments
At the M ws = 0.5 ( 0.140klf )( 3 ft )( 65 ft − 3 ft ) = 13k − ft
Critical
Section DW:
Vfws = 0.240klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 3ft ) = 7.08k
M ws = 0.5 ( 0.240klf )( 3ft )( 65ft − 3ft ) = 22.3k − ft
Live Load:
Consider the influence line for shear:
The shear at x is maximized by placing the rear wheel of the truck at x and loading the
right part of the beam with the uniform load. (Note that influence lines are NOT used
for dead loads. Obviously, it is not possible to have the DL on only part of the beam!)
Using a standard structural analysis program, at the critical section:
VLL,Lane = 18.92k
VLL,Truck = 58.33k
MLL,Lane = 56.76 k-ft

MLL,Truck = 175.0 k-ft

5.2.2 This is a multibeam bridge. The shear at the obtuse corner of each girder MUST be
Skew increased by:
Factor 12L 12 ( 65ft )
1+ tan θ = 1 + tan ( 30 ) = 1.20 [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1]
90d 90 ( 33in )
Note that this factor applies only to the distribution factor.
Since the critical section is only 3 feet from the support, apply the skew factor.
5.2.3 As calculated in Section 1.4.2.1.1 of this example:

Factored DFV = 0.456
Moments DFM = 0.336
And The moment MAY be multiplied by the skew factor for moment, 0.91.
Shears The shear MUST be increased by skew factor, 1.20.

VLL+IM = 0.456(1.2)[58.33(1.33)+18.92] = 52.5 k
Vu = 1.25(22.54k + 1.75k + 4.13 k) + 1.50 (7.08 k) + 1.75(52.5 k) = 138.0 k
MLL+IM = 0.336(0.905)[175 k-ft(1.33)+56.8] = 88.0 k-ft
Mu = 1.25(71.0 k-ft + 5.25 k-ft + 13.0 k-ft) + 1.5(22.3 k-ft) + 1.75(88.0 k-ft)
= 299 k-ft = 3588 k-in
5.3 For shear design, the shear forces at various points along the girder should be
Sectional calculated. Normally, this is done at the critical section, at points where strands are
Design debonded or harped and then at every 0.1L.
Model
For this design example, only the shear at the critical section is analyzed. The same
procedure for the remaining points would be used.
The LRFD Specifications adopted the modified compression field theory for shear
design with Version 1. This was called the Sectional Design Model.
In Version 4 (2007), the Simplified Method was added. The Simplified Method
restores the old Vci and Vcw from the Standard Specifications.
Both methods will be illustrated in this example.
5.3.1 The sectional design model requires the calculation of two factors:
Finding
β and θ • Concrete strain at : εx
• Average shear stress in the concrete: v
These two values are used to find β and θ; which are then used to find the strength of
the concrete and the strength of the stirrups.

5.3.1.1 The first step is to find the strain at 0.5dv in the cross section.
Finding
εx It is assumed the section is uncracked and that at least minimum transverse
reinforcement will be used.
Note that θ is unknown at this point. However, the commentary allows 0.5cotθ=1 as a
simplification. [LRFD C5.8.3.4.2]
Mu
dv [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-3]
εx =
2(E s As + E p Aps + E c Ac )
Where:
Nu = Applied factored normal force at the specified section kips
= 0.0
Vp = Strands are not harped = 0.0 kips
fpo = A parameter taken as modulus of elasticity of ksi
prestressing tendons multiplied by the locked-in
difference in strain between the prestressing tendons
and the surrounding concrete
= .7 f pu = 0.7(270.0) = 189 [LRFD
5.8.3.4.2]
Aps = Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side in2
of the member, as shown in LRFD Figure 5.8.3.4.2-1.
= 20 strands(0.153) = 3.06
As = Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension in2
side of the member = 0.0
Ac = Ac is the area of concrete on the tension half of the in2
beam; it is the area of the bottom half (h/2).
= 2(5.5in)(33in)(0.5) + (48in-11in)(5in) = 366.5 in2
Ep = 28,500 ksi
dv = 29.6 in
3588k − in
+ 138k − 3.06in 2 (189ksi )
εx = 29.6in = −82x10−6 ≈ −0.08x10−3
2  28500ksi ( 3.06in ) + 5072ksi ( 366.5in ) 
2 2
Negative means “uncracked”.
5.3.1.2 Vu − φVp 138k

Finding vu vu = = = 0.469ksi < 0.18f c ' = 1.26ksi
φb v d v ( 0.9 )( 2 )( 5.5in )( 29.6in )
[LRFD 5.8.2.9]
Where:
Vp = 0
φ = 0.9 [LRFD 5.5.4.2.1]

5.3.1.3 v u 0.469ksi
Using = = 0.067 and ε x = −0.08
β and θ fc ' 7ksi
From LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 21◦
β = 4.1
5.3.2 Vc = 0.0316β f c 'b v d v [LRFD 5.8.3.3-3]

Shear Strength of
Concrete Vc = 0.0316 ( 4.1) 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) = 111.6k
Since Vu = 138k > φVc = 0.9(111.6k) = 100 k; at least minimum stirrups are needed for
strength. The equations for β and θ assumed minimum stirrups.
5.3.3 v u = 0.469ksi < 0.125f c ' = 0.125 ( 7ksi ) = 0.875ksi

Minimum Stirrups [LRFD 5.8.2.7]
s max = 0.8d v = 0.8 ( 29.6in ) = 23.7in < 24in
smax = 23.75 in.
Calculate minimum area of steel using a 12 inch spacing to get area of steel per foot:
bs
A v ≥ 0.0316 f c ' v = 0.0316 7ksi
(11in )(12in ) = 0.184in 2 [LRFD 5.8.2.5]
fy 60ksi
ODOT uses #4 bars with 2 legs as standard (Av = 2(0.2in2) = 0.4in2) @ 12 inch o.c.
5.3.4 A v f y d v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α

Shear Strength of Vs = [LRFD 5.8.3.3-4]
s
the Girder
The stirrups are perpendicular to the main steel so α = 90o; cotα = 0, sinα=1; θ = 21o
Vs =
A v f y d v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α
=
( 0.4in ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6 ) cot ( 21) + 0 (1)
2
s 12in
Vs = 154.2k
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp = 111.6k + 154.2k + 0 = 265.8k

Vu = 138k < φVn = 0.9 ( 265.8k ) = 239.2k
#4 @ 12 inches is OK. Girder is OK in shear.
5.3.5 Maximum The upper limit of Vn, given by following equation, is intended to ensure that the
Nominal Shear concrete in the web of the beam will not crush prior to yield of the transverse
Resistance reinforcement.
Vn ≤ 0.25 f c'bv d v + V p [LRFD 5.8.3.3-2]

With Vp=0:
111.6 + 154.2 ≤ 0.25(7)(11)(29.6)
265.8 ≤ 569.8
5.4 In the 2007 LRFD Specification, the simplified shear method is introduced.
Simplified
Shear This method brings back Vci and Vcw from the Standard Specification.
• Vcw (web shear) usually controls near the support, so Vcw will be checked at the
critical section.
• Vci (flexural shear) doesn’t control near the support, so for this example, Vci will be
calculated at 0.2L. However, in practice Vci and Vcw must be checked at all
appropriate sections.
5.4.1
Vcw ( )
Vcw = 0.06 f c ' + 0.3f pc b v d v + Vp
[LRFD 5.8.3.4.3-3]
Where:
fpc = compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress loses)
at centroid of cross section resisting externally applied loads or at the
junction of the web and the flange when the centroid lies within the
flange (ksi).

P 537k
f pc = e = = 0.732ksi
A 733.5in 2
( )
Vcw = 0.06 7ksi + 0.3 ( 0.732ksi ) (11in )( 29.6in ) = 123.2kips
The critical section is 29.6 inches from the face of the support. Assuming a 1 ft
bearing pad, the critical section is approximately 3.5 feet from the end of the beam.
The transfer length is 60 bar diameters = 30 inches. Thus, the critical section is past
the transfer length, so fpc does not have to be reduced for lack of bond.
If the critical section is within the transfer length, fpc is reduced linearly.
One difference between LRFD and Standard Specifications is that LRFD uses cotθ in
the Vs calculation. For Vcw, the term cotθ must be calculated:
f pc
cot θ = 1.0 + 3 ≤ 1.8 [LRFD 5.8.3.4.3-4]
fc '

0.732ksi
cot θ = 1.0 + 3 = 1.83 > 1.8; so use 1.8
7ksi
θ = 29°
The minimum stirrup area and maximum spacing calculated in the Sectional Model
still applies here. Assuming #4 stirrups @ 12 in:
Vs =
( 0.4in 2 ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6in )(1.8 )
= 106.5k
12in
Vu = 138k < 0.9 (123.2k + 106.5k ) = 207k
5.4.2 Vci does not control near supports of simply supported beams. It will be calculated at
Vci 0.2L=13 ft from the center of the support.
5.4.2.1 The equation for Vci requires the calculation of unfactored dead loads.
Unfoactored DC:
Dead Loads For beam weight:
Vg = w ( 0.5L − x ) = 0.764klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 14.9k
M g = 0.5wx ( L − x ) = 0.5 ( 0.764klf )(13ft )( 65ft − 13ft ) = 258k − ft
For the diaphragm, V = 1.75k (shear is constant), M = 1.75(13) =22.8k-ft
For the wearing surface:

Vfws = 0.140klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 2.73k
DW:
Vfws = 0.240klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 13ft ) = 4.68k
The total UNFACTORED shears and moments are:
Vd = 14.9k + 1.75k + 2.73k + 4.68k = 24.1k

Md = 258.0k-ft + 22.8k-ft +47.3k-ft + 81.1k-ft = 409.2 k-ft = 4910 k-in
The FACTORED shears and moments are:
Vud = 1.25(14.9k + 1.75k + 2.73k) + 1.50(4.68k) = 31.3 k

Mud = 1.25(258.0k-ft + 22.8k-ft +47.3k-ft) + 1.5(81.1k-ft)
= 531.8 k-ft = 6381 k-in

5.4.2.2 This method requires two sets of shears and moments for Live Load. The first is the
Live loading where the shear is maximum and the second is where the moment is maximum.
Load
For the lane load, the shear is maximum when the lane load is on the right 52 ft. of the
girder (see the influence line from the sectional model):
VLane1 = 13.3k and MLane1 = 173 k-ft = 2076 k-in
The maximum moment occurs when the lane load is on the entire girder:
VLane2 = 12.5k and MLane2 = 216.3 k-ft = 2596 k-in
Clearly, the moment is maximum when the lane load is placed along the entire beam.
The truck load is less certain. The moment at “X” is the value of the point load times
the ordinate of the influence line. Unfortunately, it is not clear where this product will
be maximum!

For the truck, it is again necessary to consider two placements:
Placed for maximum shear
Placed for maximum moment
In this case, it just happens that both are the same – the rear axle placed at 0.2L as
shown in the previously.
For the truck load, the maximum shear at the section and the maximum moment at the
section happen to occur under the same loading – the rear wheel of the truck 13 ft.
from the support. In this case, the maximum shear loading and the maximum moment
loading are the same, but that is NOT always the case. Be sure to carefully check all
reasonable load conditions.
However, this is not always the case. It just happened that way in this example.
VTruck = 47.2 k and MTruck = 613 k-ft = 7356 k-in
Vu,LL = 1.75[Vtruck(1+IM) + VLane](DFV)

Vu,LL = 1.75[47.2k(1.33) + 13.3k]( 0.456) = 60.7k
Note that the skew factor is NOT applied. The skew factor is applied only at the obtuse
corner and at 0.2L, the section is not at the obtuse corner.
Mu,LL = 1.75[Mtruck(1+IM) + MLane](DFM)(skew factor)

Mu,LL = 1.75[613 k-ft(1.33) + 216.3 k-ft](0.336)(0.905) = 549.0 k-ft = Mmax
Note that the Skew Factor IS Applied to moment
The shear associated with maximum moment is:

Vi = 1.75[47.2k(1.33) + 12.5k]( 0.456) = 60.0 k
5.4.2.3 First, find the modulus of rupture:

Determination of
Cracking Load f r = 0.2 f c ' = 0.2 7ksi = 0.529ksi [LRFD 5.4.2.6]
for Shear
Note that LRFD has 3 different MORs – be sure to use the correct one!
Next, determine the stress at the bottom of the box due to effective prestressing force:
537kips 537k (14.61in )

f cpe = + = 1.94ksi
733.5in 2 6511in 3
 12M dnc 
M cre = Sc  f r + f cpe −  [LRFD 5.8.3.4.3-2]
 Snc 

Where:
Mdnc = Unfactored moment due to dead load on the non- composite or
monolithic section = 409.2 k-ft (note – in k-ft; 12 in numerator
converts to inches)
Snc = non-composite section modulus
Sc = composite section modulus = Snc since this is a non-composite
structure
 12 ( 409.2k − ft ) 
M cre = ( 6511in 3 )  0.529ksi + 1.94ksi − 
 6511in 3 
M cre = 11165k − in = 930.5k − ft
5.4.2.4 Vi M cre
Vci Vci = 0.02 f c 'b v d v + Vd + ≥ 0.06 f c 'b v d v [LRFD 5.8.3.4.3-1]
M max
Vci = 0.02 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) + 24.1k +

( 60.0k )( 930.5k − ft ) = 143.0k >
549k − ft
0.06 7ksi (11in )( 29.6in ) = 51.7
5.4.2.5 Vu = 31.3k + 60.7k = 92.0k

Check Shear
Strength Assuming #4@12; cotθ=1 for Vci [LRFD 5.8.3.4.3]
Vs =
( 0.4in 2 ) ( 60ksi )( 29.6in )(1.0 )
= 59.2k
12in
Vu = 92.0k < φVn = 0.9 (143.0k + 59.2k ) = 182.0k

The section is adequate in shear.
If s=18”
Vs = 39.5kips
Vu = 92.0k < φVn = 0.9 (143.0k + 39.5k ) = 164k
5.6 At each section: [LRFD 5.8.3.5-1]

Minimum
Longitudinal 0.5N u  Vu
Mu 
Steel A ps f ps + A s f y ≥ +
+ − Vp − 0.5Vs  cot θ
φd v φ  φ 
For this example, the minimum longitudinal steel will be checked at the critical section.
The critical section 29.6 inches from the face of the support. Allowing for a 1 ft.
bearing pad and one foot from center of bearing to the end of the girder, the critical
section is 47.6 inches from the end of the girder. However, it is necessary to see if the
strand stress is reduced by lack of development.

The development length equation is unchanged for strand from Standard
Specifications, except that a factor, κ is added. This factor is the result of an October,
1988 FHWA memorandum suggesting the need for this conservative multiplier
because of strand/bond problems:
 2   2 
l d = κ  f ps − f pe  d b = 1.6  260 − (175.4 )  ( 0.5 ) = 114.5in [LRFD 5.11.4.2]
 3   3 
The terms fps (steel stress at strength limit) and fpe (effective prestressing stress after
losses) were calculated previously. κ = 1.6 for member over 24 inches deep
The critical section occurs at 47.6 inches from the end of the beam, but the
development length is 114.5 inches. Thus, the steel stress MUST be reduced to
account for lack of development.
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe ) [LRFD 5.11.4.2-4]
The following values were previously calculated or determined:
Aps =20(0.153)= 3.06 in2

fps = 260.0 ksi
fpe = 174.5 ksi
Mu = 3588 k-in
Vu = 138 k
θ = 21o (Sectional Design Model)
Vs = 153 k (Sectional Design Model)
Nu = Vp = 0
φ = 1 for moment; 0.9 for shear
Asfy = assumed 0 (ignore any mild steel)
60db = 30 inches
47.6in − 30in
114.5in − 30in
0.5N u  Vu
Mu 
A ps f ps + A s f y ≥ +
+ − Vp − 0.5Vs  cot θ
φd v φ  φ 
3.06in (192.0ksi ) = 588k
2
3588k − in  138k 
> + − 0.5( 153k )  cot ( 21) = 321k
1.0 ( 29.6in )  0.9 
OK.

Note that before the 2005/06 interim, the steel stress was assumed linear with
development length, not bilinear. If the stress were assumed linear here, mild steel
would need to be added. Also note that Vs < Vc/φ = 153k
Check the inside face of the bearing pad. Assuming a 12 in pad and one foot from
center of bearing to the end, the inside of the pad is 12+6 = 18 inches from the end of
the girder. This is inside the transfer length:
 18in 
f px = 174.5ksi   = 104.7 ksi
 30in 
V
Ap f ps ≥ u − 0.5Vs cot θ
φ
 138k 
3.06in 2 (104.7 ksi ) = 320k >  − 0.5( 153k )  cot ( 21) = 199k
 0.9 
OK
If the stirrup spacing is increased to 18”, Vs = 103 k

V
Ap f ps ≥ u − 0.5Vs cot θ
φ
 138k 
3.06in 2 (104.7 ksi ) = 320k >  − 0.5( 103k )  cot ( 21) = 265k
 0.9 
OK
5.7 The bursting resistance of pretensioned anchorage zones provided by vertical

Anchorage Zone reinforcement in the ends of the pretensioned beams at the service limit state shall be
(Bursting take as:
Stirrups) Pr = f s As [LRFD 5.10.10.1-1]
Where:
As = Total area of transverse reinforcement in2
located within the distance h/4 from the end
of the beam
fs = Stress in steel, but not taken greater than 20 ksi
Pr = Bursting resistance, should not be less than kips
4% of Fpi
20(0.153)(202.5)(0.04) = 24.8
24.8
Solving for the required area of steel, As = = 1.24 in2
20
As in the Standard Specification, LRFD requires bursting stirrups which can resist at
least 4% of the initial prestressing force, with a stress of no more than 20ksi:
This steel must be distributed over h/4 from the end. For this girder, h/4=33/4=8.25
inches. Four #4 double leg stirrups @ 3” provides 1.60 in2 over 8 inches.

6.0 The exterior girder takes the rail load (DC):
EXTERIOR 0.090klf ( 65ft )
2
GIRDER Mb = = 47.5k − ft = 570k − in

6.1 8
Moment
Note: Article 4.6.2.2.1 allows the rail load to be equally distributed to all the girders.
However, it does not have to be and, in this case, it is probably more correct to assign
the railing to the exterior girder.
The live load moments must be multiplied by the exterior girder factor.
Two or more lanes loaded: [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1]

g ext = eg int
de
e = 1.04 + >1
25
Since the rail is right at the edge of the box, de = half the web width = 2.75 inches =
0.23 ft. Note that de is in FEET.
0.23
e = 1.04 + = 1.049
25
One lane loaded:

g ext = eg int
de
e = 1.125 + >1
30
0.23
e = 1.125 + = 1.133 Controls
30
Note that there is only one DFM, so the one lane e is multiplied by the DFM. In the
equation below, the truck load (362.3 k-ft) is already multiplied by the interior DFM
and the impact factor; the lane load (102.7 k-ft) is multiplied by the DFM (no impact
on lane load). Thus, it is only necessary to multiply by the increasing factor:
M u = 1.25 ( 515.3 + 47.5 ) + 1.50 (126.8 ) + 1.75 ( 362.3 + 102.7 )(1.133)

M u = 1815k − ft = 21790k − in
For the interior box with 20 strands, φMn = 23550 k-in so OK for Mu
Stresses at transfer do not need to be checked as these stress occur during fabrication
are independent of the railing load and the live load.
The check performed on the interior girders is sufficient.

Service load stresses should be checked. It is clear by inspection that service load
compression stresses are OK (see Section 2.3.3). Check Service III:
M = ( 515.3 + 47.5 ) + (126.8 ) + 0.8 ( 362.3 + 102.7 )(1.133) = 1111k − ft = 13330k −

13330k − in
f bottom = = 2.05ksi
6511in 3
fps = 1.94 ksi compression (previously calculated)
fbottom = 1.94 ksi – 2.05 ksi = -0.110 ksi = 0.110 tension < 0.503 ksi tension OK
6.2 This check must be performed at all sections. Only the critical section is shown here.
Exterior Girder The check is also made using Sectional Model.
Shear
At the critical section:
Vg = w ( 0.5L − x ) = 0.090klf ( 0.5 ( 65ft ) − 3ft ) = 2.65k
M g = 0.5wx ( L − x ) = 0.5 ( 0.090klf )( 3ft )( 65ft − 3ft ) = 8.37k − ft
Two or more lanes loaded: [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1]

 48 
 b 
0.5
 b 
 d e + 12 − 2 
e = 1+   ≥1
 40 
 
0.5
 48 
 0.23 + 12 − 2 
e = 1+   = 1.234
 40 
 
One Lane Loaded:

g ext = eg int
de
e = 1.125 + ≥1
20
0.23
e = 1.125 + = 1.137
20

Check:
Two or more lanes: e*DFV = 1.234(0.456) = 0.562 Controls

One Lane: e*DFV = 1.137(0.445) = 0.506
Because there are two DFV, each must be checked!
Vu= 0.562(1.2)[58.33(1.33) + 18.92] = 65.08k
VLL,truck= 58.33k
VLL,lane = 18.92k
IM = 0.33
Skew Factor = 1.2
Vu = 1.25(22.54k + 1.75k + 4.13 k+2.65) + 1.50 (7.08 k) + 1.75(65.08k)= 163.3 k
Using the Sectional Design Model, Mu = 3714k-in, β= 3.24, θ=21.4o, φVn = 215 k, so
OK.
7.0 Camber calculations are not directly addressed in LRFD (They were not directly
CAMBER AND addressed in the Standard Specifications, either).
DEFLECTION
The same methods used for finding camber and deflection used for Standard
Specifications apply for LRFD Designs.
ODOT invokes Article 2.5.2.6.2,which limits Live Load deflection to L/800 for
precast, simple span girders.
The limit for a Box Girder Bridge is L/800.
Since this is a limit on FLEXURAL deflection, it is appropriate to use the MDF.
MDF = 0.336(0.905) = 0.304
Lane Load = 0.640(0.304) = 0.194klf
Axle Load (rear) = 32k(1.33)(0.304)=12.9k (includes impact)

Axle Load (front) = 8k(1.33)(0.304) = 3.22k (includes impact)
The live load, positioned for maximum deflection is:

Using a standard analysis software:
65ft (12 )
δ = 0.654in < = 0.975in OK
800

GUIDED DESIGN EXAMPLE
AASHTO Type IV, Two Span, Composite Deck, LRFD Specifications
This design example demonstrates the design of a two-span AASHTO Type IV – I girder
INTRO with no skew, as shown below. This example illustrates the design of a typical interior and
exterior beam at the critical sections for positive flexure, negative flexure, shear, and the
continuity connection. The superstructure consists of five beams spaced at 8’-0” centers as
shown below. Beams are designed to act compositely with the 8.5-in-thick cast-in-place
concrete deck slab to resist all superimposed dead loads, live loads, and impact.
Longitudinal
Section
96’-3” 96’-3”
1’-9”
Transverse
Cross Section 34’-0”
8.5” structural+
1.0” wearing
Type IV
2.5’ 4 Spaces @ 8’-0” = 32’-0” 2.5’

37’-0”
MATERIALS Actual thickness, ts = 9.5 in

Slab Structural thickness = 8.5 in.
Note that 1.0 in wearing surface is considered to be an integral part of the 8.5 in deck.
fc’ = 4.5 ksi @ 28 days (ODOT Bridge Design Manual (BDM) 302.5.2.8)
2- Span Continuous Example July 2007 To Be Used as an Example Only

Precast Beams AASHTO Type IV girder shown below
fc’ = 7.0 ksi @ 28 days
fci’ = 4.5 ksi
The ODOT BDM allows a range of strengths (302.5.2.8). Given strengths are within that
range.
1’-8”
8”
6”
6” 8”
1’-11”
4’-6”
9”
9”
8”
2’-2”
Prestressing ½ in diameter, low-relaxation, ASTM A416

Strand Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
The ODOT BDM (302.5.2.2a) allows ½ inch, ½ inch special or 0.6 inch diameter strands.
Regular ½ inch diameter is chosen here.

Reinforcing Yield strength, fy = 60 ksi
Bars Modulus of elasticity, Es = 29,000 ksi
(ODOT BDM 302.5.2.9)
Loads Future wearing surface: 0.060 ksf (ODOT Std. Drawings)

Barriers: 0.640 k/ft each
CROSS- Area in2 789

SECTION Weight (lb/ft) 822
h (in) 54
PROPERTIES
yb (in) 24.73
FOR A yt (in) 29.27
TYPICAL I (in4) 260,741
INTERIOR Sb (in3) 10,542
BEAM St (in3) 8,909
Non-Composite
Section EC = 33, 000 K1wC1.5 f c ' [LRFD 5.4.2.4-1]
EC = 33, 000 ×1.0 × 0.1501.5 4.5 = 4, 067 ksi - at transfer
EC = 33, 000 ×1.0 × 0.1501.5 7.0 = 5, 072 ksi - service loads
Composite (1/4) Span = (96.25 ft)(12in/ft)/4 = 289 in [LRFD 4.6.2.6]

Section
12ts plus the greater of the web thickness or ½ the beam top flange width:
Effective flange
Width ts = 8.5 in (slab thickness - use structural thickness only)
web thickness = 8 in
½ top flange = 0.5(20 in) = 10 in (Greatest)
12(8.5 in) + 10 in = 112 in
Average spacing between beams = 8 ft = 96 in (CONTROLS)
EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH = 96 in Interior Girder
EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH = 78 in Exterior Girder (overhang is 4 ft).
Modular Ratio Ec ( Slab) 4, 067

n= = = 0.8019
Ec (beam) 5, 072
Transformed Transformed flange width = n(effective flange width) = (0.8019)(96) = 76.98 in

Section
Transformed flange area = n(effective flange width)(ts) = (0.8019)(96)(8.5) = 654.35in2
Properties

Note that only the structural thickness of the deck, 8.5 in, is considered. A 2” haunch is
assumed for calculating weight but not for finding composite properties (ODOT BDM
302.5.2.3).
Figure below shows the dimensions of the composite section.
96”
76.98”
8.5”
54”
26”
Properties of Ac = Total area of composite section = 1,443 in2

Composite hc = Overall depth of the composite section = 62.5 in
section
Ic = Moment of inertia of the composite section = 666,579 in4
ybc = Distance from the centroid of the = 39.93 in

composite section to the extreme bottom
fiber of the precast beam
ytg = Distance from the centroid of the = 14.07 in
composite section to the extreme top fiber
of the precast beam
ytc = Distance from the centroid of the = 22.57 in.
composite section to the extreme top fiber
of the slab
Sbc = Composite section modulus for the = 16,694 in3
extreme bottom fiber of the precast beam
Stg = Composite section modulus for the top = 47,376 in3
fiber of the precast beam
Stc = Composite section modulus for extreme = 29,534 in3
top fiber of the deck slab

SHEAR The self-weight of the beam, haunch, and slab act on the non-composite section as a simple
FORCES & span structure. The weight of the barriers, future wearing surface, and live loads with
BENDING impact act on the composite section as a continuous structure.
MOMENTS
Dead Loads DC = Dead load of structural components and non-structural attachments

Slab: (96 in)(9.5 in)(0.150 kcf)/(144 in2/ft2) = 0.95 klf
Haunch: (2 in)(20 in)(0.150 kcf)/(144 in2/ft2) = 0.042 klf (ODOT BDM 302.5.2.3)
Note: The actual slab thickness of 9.5” is used in calculating dead loads. The 2” haunch
thickness is also used in calculating dead loads. The intermediate diaphragms are assumed
as steel “X” braces. These are ignored in these dead load calculations. The weight of each
brace is less than 0.3 kips. The moment caused by these braces is << 1% of the total DL
moment.
DC Dead Loads carried by the continuous structure, composite section:
According to LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.1 permanent loads may be distributed uniformly to all
beams if the following conditions are met:

de = 2.5 ft – 1.5 ft = 1.0 ft
Partial of Table 4.6.2.2.1-1 - This example is a Type “k”
The section meets the criteria, so the loads may be uniformly distributed to the girders.
Future Wearing Surface = 0.060 ksf = (0.060 ksf)(34 ft)/5 beams = 0.408 kips/ft/girder
Barrier = 0.640 klf = 2 each (0.640)/5 girders = 0.256 kips/ft/girder

LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.1 allows the slab weight to be evenly distributed to the girders in the
same manner as the wearing surface and the barriers. In this case, the decision has been
made to use tributary areas to distribute the slab weight to the girders. Either method is
allowable.
DL-Unfactored For dead loads the length of the span depends on the construction stage:
Shear Forces &
Bending
Moments
The shear forces and bending moments are given in the table below:
Future Wearing
Beam Weight Deck plus Haunch Barrier Weight Surface [Continuous
Location [Simple Span] [Simple Span] [Continuous Span] Span]
Distance Section Shear Moment Moment Shear Moment Shear Moment
x ft. x/L kips Mg, kip-ft Shear kips Ms, kip-ft kips Mb, kip-ft kips Mws, kip-ft
0.00 0.00 39.6 0 47.7 0 9.2 7.7 14.7 12.4
9.26 0.10 31.9 331 38.5 399.3 6.8 81.8 10.9 130.5
18.97 0.20 24 602.6 28.9 727 4.3 136 6.9 217
28.69 0.30 16 796.5 19.3 961.1 1.8 166 2.9 264.9
38.41 0.40 8 912.9 9.6 1101.5 -0.6 171.9 -1 274.2
48.13 0.50 0 951.9 0 1148.4 -3.1 153.6 -5 245.1
57.84 0.60 -8 912.9 -9.6 1101.5 -5.6 111.2 -8.9 177.5
67.56 0.70 -16 796.5 -19.3 961.1 -8.1 44.7 -12.9 71.3
77.28 0.80 -24 602.6 -28.9 727 -10.6 -46 -16.9 -73.4
86.99 0.90 -31.9 331 -38.5 399.3 -13.1 -160.8 -20.8 -256.7
96.25 Brg. -39.6 0 -47.7 0 -15.4 -292.7 -24.6 -467.1
Live Loads According to LRFD Article 4.6.1.2.1 vehicular live loading on the roadways of bridges or
incidental structures, designated HL-93, shall consists of a combination of the:
• Design truck or design tandem with dynamic allowance. The design truck shall
consists of an 8.0 kip front axle and a pair of 32.0 kip back axles. The first and
second axle are spaced 14’-0” apart. The space between the rear axles shall be
varied between 14.0’ and 30.0’ to porduce extreme force effects. The design tandem
shall consist of a pair of 25.0 kip axles spaced 4.0’ apart. [LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.2
and 3.6.1.2.3]
• Design lane load shall consist of a load of 0.64 kip/ft uniformly distributed in the
longitudinal direction. [LRFD Article 3.6.1.2.4]
• For negative moment between inflection points, 90% of the effect of two design
trucks (HL-93 with 14 ft. axle spacing) spaced at a minimum of 50 ft. combined with
90% of the design lane load.
• Inflection points are determined by loading all spans with a uniform load.
Distribution The live load bending moments and shear forces are determined by using the simplified
Factors distribution factor formulas [LRFD 4.6.2.2]. To use the simplified live load distribution
factor formulas, the following conditions must be met [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1]

de = 2.5 ft – 1.5 ft = 1.0 ft
For a precast concrete I-girder with CIP deck, the bridge type is (k) [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-1]
The number of design lanes should be determined by taking the integer part of the ratio
w/12, where w is the clear roadway width in ft between curbs and/or barriers. [LRFD
3.6.1.1.1]
w = 34 ft.
Note: It could be argued that this should be designed as a three lane bridge because 3 – 11
ft lanes would fit and the minimum lane width is 10ft. However, the distribution factor is for
2 or more lanes loaded and the number of lanes isn’t in the equation so it doesn’t matter.
Distribution For all limit states except for fatigue limit state. [LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1]
Factors for For two or more lanes loaded:
Bending 0.6 0.2 0.1
 S   S   Kg 
Moment DFM = 0.075 +      3 
 9.5   L   12 Lts 
Where DFM = distribution factor for moment for interior beam. Provided that:
3.5 ≤ S ≤ 16.0 S = 8.0 OK S = Spacing, ft

4.5 ≤ ts ≤ 12.0 ts = 8.5 OK ts = slab thickness, in
20 ≤ L ≤ 240 L = 98 OK L = beam span, ft
Nb ≥ 4 Nb = 5 OK Nb = number of beams
10, 000 ≤ K g ≤ 7, 000, 000 K g = See below Kg = longitudinal
stiffness parameter, in4
(
K g = n I + Aeg2 ) [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-1]
Where:
n = modular ratio between beam and deck materials
E (beam) 5, 072
= c = = 1.247
Ec ( slab) 4, 067
A = cross-section area of the beam (non-composite), in2 = 789
I = moment of inertia of the beam (non-composite), in4 = 260,741
eg = Distance be c.g. of beam and slab, in = (8.5/2+2.0+29.27) = 35.52

So:
(
K g = 1.247 260, 741 + 789*35.522 )
K g = 1,566, 480 in 4
10,000 < Kg < 7,000,000 OK
The haunch is included in this calculation as this results in the most conservative DFM.
Using L = 98 ft:
0.6 0.2 0.1
 8   8   1,566, 480 
DFM = 0.075 +      3 
 9.5   98   12*98*8.5 
DFM = 0.665
0.4 0.3 0.1

 S   S   Kg 
DFM = 0.06 +      3 
 14   L   12 Lts 
0.4 0.3 0.1
 8   8   1,566, 480 
DFM = 0.06 +      3 
 14   98   12*98*8.5 
DFM = 0.467
The case of two design lanes loaded controls, DFM = 0.665 lanes/beam
Distribution For two or more lanes loaded: [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-1]

Factors for
Shear Force S   S 
2
DFV = 0.2 +   −  
 12   35 
Where DFV = distribution factor for shear for interior beam. Provided that:
3.5 ≤ S ≤ 16.0 S = 8.0 OK S = Spacing, ft

4.5 ≤ ts ≤ 12.0 ts = 8.5 OK ts = slab thickness, in
20 ≤ L ≤ 240 L = 98 OK L = beam span, ft
Nb ≥ 4 Nb = 5 OK Nb = number of beams
So:
2
 8  8 
DFV = 0.2 +   −  
 12   35 
DFV = 0.814
For one design lane loaded

 S 
DFV = 0.36 +  
 25 
 8 
DFV = 0.36 +  
 25 
DFV = 0.68
The case of two design lanes loaded controls, DFV = 0.814 lanes/beam
Dynamic IM = 33%
Allowance Where: IM = dynamic load allowance, applied only to truck load
Unfactored Unfactored shear forces and bending moment due to HL-93 truck load, per beam:
Shear Force
VLT = (shear force per lane)(DFV)(1+IM)=(shear force per lane)(0.814)(1.33)
and Bending
=(shear force per lane)(1.083) kips
Moments
MLT = (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(1+IM)=(bending moment per lane)(0.665)(1.33)
=( bending moment per lane)(0.884) kips-ft
Unfactored shear forces and bending moment due to HL-93 lane load, per beam:
VLT = (shear force per lane)(DFV)(1+IM)=(shear force per lane)(0.814)
MLT = (bending moment per lane)(DFM)(1+IM)=(bending moment per lane)(0.665)
This table, obtained from a structural analysis program, is truck load + lane load, with
dynamic effect and distribution factor included.
Location HL-93 Live Load

Max Max. Positive Max. Negative
Distance Section Shear Moment Moment
x ft. x/L kips MLL+I, kip-ft MLL+I, kip-ft
0.00 0.00 89.4 48.5 -5.6
9.26 0.10 76.3 624.6 -83.3
18.97 0.20 62.7 1049.3 -163.4
28.69 0.30 50.1 1300.5 -243.6
38.41 0.40 39.9 1412.4 -323.7
48.13 0.50 -48.3 1386.2 -403.9
57.84 0.60 -60.3 1239.1 -484
67.56 0.70 -72.2 961.1 -564.2
77.28 0.80 -83.8 577.5 -776.2
86.99 0.90 -95 215.9 -877.6
96.25 Brg. -104.6 14.8 -1380.7
Shown in this table are maximum values of shear, positive moment, and negative moment.
The maximum values at a given location are not necessarily from the same load case.

Load The following limit states are applicable: [LRFD 3.4.1]
Combinations Service I:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
ESTIMATE The required number of strands is usually governed by Service III load combination at the
REQUIRED section of maximum moment or harp points.
PRESTRESS
In a continuous for live load structure, the maximum moments do not occur at the same
place for each load. The point of maximum moment depends on whether the load was
applied to the continuous or simple structure. Thus, each point must be checked for the
combinations of loads.
In this structure, the maximum flexural Service Load stresses occur at 48.13 ft. (although
this is NOT where the continuous load moments are maximum). It is inappropriate to
simply take maximum moments without regard to location along the length of the girder.
Service 1 Service 3 Strength 1 Length
V M V M V M
k k-ft k k-ft k k-ft ft.
200.6 68.6 182.72 58.9 299.125 113.1 Bearing 0
192.6 431.7 175.3 393.72 287.45 644.925 Trans. 2.04
189.8 549.9 172.7 502.76 283.375 817.925 H/2 2.73
164.4 1567.2 149.14 1442.28 246.375 2303.925 0.10L 9.26
126.8 2731.9 114.26 2522.04 191.575 3993.775 0.20L 18.97
90.1 3489 80.08 3228.9 138.4 5077.725 0.30L 28.69
55.9 3872.9 47.92 3590.42 89.575 5615.875 0.40L 38.41
-56.4 3885 -46.74 3607.76 -95.9 5610.625 MidSpan 48.13
-92.4 3542.2 -80.34 3294.38 -147.875 5091.675 0.60L 57.84
-128.5 2834.7 -114.06 2642.48 -199.95 4041.75 0.70L 67.56
-164.2 434 -147.44 589.24 -251.375 -329.31 0.80L 77.28
-199.3 -564.8 -180.3 -389.28 -301.825 -1464.58 0.90L 86.99
-222.3 -1614.4 -201.94 -1375.8 -334.65 -2795.88 H/2 93.52
-224.8 -1742.2 -204.3 -1494.76 -338.2 -2961.82 Trans. 94.21
-231.9 -2140.5 -210.98 -1864.36 -348.325 -3482.75 Bearing 96.25
At this point, it is necessary to determine the needed number of strands. Box girders tend to
be controlled by the Strength Limit State, but “I” girders (this example) tend to be controlled
by service load tensions.
The initial estimate of number of strands will be found from the Service III combination.
Recall that Service III ONLY applies to tension in prestressed sections.

Service Load Bottom tensile stress due to applied dead and live loads using load combination Service III:
Stresses at
Midspan Mg + Ms M b + M ws + (0.8)( M LL + I )
fb = +
Sb Sbc
Where:
Mg = Unfactored bending moment due to beam self-weight, kip-ft
Ms = Unfactored bending moment due to slab and haunch weights, kip-ft
Mb = Unfactored bending moment due to due to barrier weights, kip-ft
Mws = Unfactored bending moment due to future wearing surface, kip-ft
MLL+I = Unfactored bending moment due to design vehicular live
load including impact, kip-ft
(951.9 + 1,148.4)(12) [153.6 + 245.1 + (0.8)(1,386.2) ] (12)

fb = +
10,542 16, 694
fb = 2.39 + 1.08
fb = 3.47ksi
Stress Limits According to LRFD Table 5.9.4.2.2-1 the tensile stress limit at service loads is
for Concrete = 0.19 f c'
= 0.19 7.0 = 0.503ksi
Required The difference between the bottom fiber tensile stress due to applied loads and the tensile
Number of stress limit is the required precompression stress.
Strands f pb = (3.47 − 0.503) = 2.97 ksi
At this point, the number of rows of strands is unknown. Assume a strand center of gravity
at midspan as 8% of the height of the girder.
ybs = 0.08(54) = 4.32 in
ec = ( yb − ybs ) = (24.73 − 4.32) = 20.41 in
If Ppe is the total prestressing force, the stress at the bottom fiber due to prestress is:
P P e
f pb = pe + pe c
A Sb
Now plug in the required recompression stress, fpb and solve form Ppe:
P P (20.41)
2.97 = pe + pe
789 10,542
Ppe = 927 kips

The required prestressing force after all losses is 927 kips. This is after an assumed 25%
loss. That means the initial prestressing force will be approximately 1240 kips. Check with
your local precast producer to ensure the capacity prestressing beds can withstand this
force.
Final prestress force per strand = (area of strand)(fpi)(1-losses, %) where fpi = initial
prestressing stress before transfer =0.75 fpu = 202.5 ksi
Assuming 25% loss of prestress the final prestressing force per strand after losses is:
(0.153)(202.5)(1 − 0.25) ≈ 23.2kips / strand
927
Number of strands required = = 39.9 strands
23.2
Try (40) ½ in diameter, 270 ksi, low-lax strands.
Strand Pattern See figure below for the assumed strand pattern at the midspan:
No. Distance from

Strands bottom (in)
7 8
11 6
11 4
11 2
2” 10 Spa. 2”
@ 2”

The distance between the center of gravity of strands and the bottom concrete fiber of the
beam is, ybs, is:
[(11)2 + (11)4 + (11)6 + (7)8]

ybs = = 4.70 in
40
Strand eccentricity at midspan:
ec = yb − ybs = 24.73 − 4.70 = 20.0 in

PRESTRESS Total Prestress Losses
LOSSES
∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT [LRFD 5.9.5.1-1]
Where:

∆fpLT = loss due to long-term shrinkage and creep of concrete, and relaxation of the
steel, ksi
Elastic Ep
Shortening ∆f pES = f cgp [LRFD 5.9.5.2.3a-1]
Ect
Where:
fcgp = The concrete stress at the center of gravity of prestressing tendons due
to the prestressing force immediately after the transfer and the self-
weight of the member at the section of the maximum moment (ksi).
Pi Pe 2
M e
+ i c − g c
A I I
Eci = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at the time of transfer or time of load
application (ksi).
According to the LRFD Commentary for pretensioned member the loss due to elastic
shortening may be determined by the following alternative equation (This is the calculation
of elastic shortening loss by transformed section):
∆ pES = [LRFD C5.9.5.2.3a-1]
AI E
Aps ( I g + em2 Ag ) + g g ct
Ep

Where:
Aps = Area of prestressing steel, in2

= 40(0.153) = 6.12
fpi = Prestressing steel stress immediately prior to transfer, ksi
= 202.5
Ag = Gross area of section, in2
= 789
Ect = Elastic Modulus of the concrete at transfer (ksi).
= 4,067
= 28,500
em = Average prestressing steel eccentricity at midspan, in
= 20.0
Ig = Moment of inertia of the gross concrete section, in4
= 260,741
Mg = Midspan moment due to member self-weight, kip-in
= 951.9(12) = 11,422.8
So:
6.12* 202.5(260, 741 + 20.02 *789) − 20.0*11, 422.8*789

∆ pES =
789* 260, 741* 4, 067
6.12(260, 741 + 20.02 *789) +
28,500
∆ pES = 16.24
Note: If the self weight moment is calculated using total beam length rather than c/c
bearing, the moment becomes 11641 k-in. The elastic shortening loss becomes 16.13 ksi; <
1% different.
Long-Term For standard, precast, pretensioned members subject to normal loading and environmental
Losses conditions:
f pi Aps
∆f pLT = 10 γ hγ st + 12γ hγ st + ∆f pR [LRFD 5.9.5.3-1]
Ag
In which:
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01H [LRFD 5.9.5.3-2]
5
γ st = [LRFD 5.9.5.3-3]
1 + f ci '

Where:

γhst = Correction factor for specified concrete strength at time of
Prestress transfer to the concrete member
∆fpR = An estimate of relaxation loss taken as 2.5 ksi for low
relaxation strand, 10.0 ksi for stress relieved strand, and in
accordance with manufacturers recommendation for other
types of strand (ksi)
Assume H = 70%
γ h = 1.7 − 0.01*70 = 1.00

5
γ st = = 0.91
1 + 4.5
So:
202.5*6.12
∆f pLT = 10 1.00*0.91 + 12*1.00*0.91 + 2.5
789
∆f pLT = 14.29 + 10.92 + 2.5
∆f pLT = 27.71
Total Losses at Total Prestress Losses:

Service Loads ∆f pT = ∆f pES + ∆f pLT
∆f pT = 16.24 + 27.71
[LRFD 5.9.5.1-1]
∆f pT = 43.95
f pe = 202.5 − 43.95 = 158.6
Losses are approximately 22% < 25% OK
STRESSES AT Force per strand after initial losses:

TRANSFER Stress in tendons after transfer: f pt = f pi − ∆f pi = 202.5 − 16.24 = 186.26 ksi
Force per strand = fpt(strand area) = 186.26(0.153) = 28.50 kips

Therefore, the total prestressing force after transfer is, Pi = 1,140 kips
(Note: The LRFD Specifications permit 0.9fpu to be used here; the difference is minimal.)
Stress Limits Compression: 0.60fci’ = 0.60(4.5) = +2.700 ksi [LRFD 5.9.4.1.1]

for Concrete

Tension: [LRFD 5.9.4.1.2]
1. In areas other than the precompressed tensile zone and without bonded
reinforcement
0.0948 f ci' ≤ 0.2
0.0948 4.5 ≤ 0.2
0.201 ≤ 0.2
Therefore, -0.200 ksi (Controls)
2. In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the
concrete computed assuming an uncracked section, where reinforcement is
proportioned using a stress of 0.5fy, not to exceed 30 ksi.
0.24 f ci'
0.24 4.5
-0.509 ksi
Stresses at Stresses at this location need only be checked at release since this stage almost always
Transfer governs. Also, losses with time will reduce the concrete stresses making them less critical.
Length Section
Transfer length = 60(strand diameter) = 60(0.5) = 30 in = 2.5 ft [LRFD 5.8.2.3]
The bending moment at a distance 2.5 ft from the end of the beam due to beam self-weight
is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(2.5)(97.17 − 2.5) = 97.3 kip-ft

Compute top stress at the top fiber of the beam:
P Pe M g
ft = i − i +
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 97.3(12)
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
ft = 1.44 − 2.56 + 0.13 = −0.99
Tensile stress limit for concrete with bonded reinforcement: -0.509 ksi NG

P Pe M
ft = i + i − g
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 97.3(12)
ft = + −
789 10,542 10,542
ft = 1.44 + 2.16 − 0.11 = +3.49
Compressive stress limit for concrete: +2.700 ksi NG

Since the top and bottom concrete stresses exceed the stress limits, harp 9 strands at 0.35L =
34 ft. as shown in the following figures.
At Midspan At ends
No. Distance from No. Distance from
Strands bottom (in) Strands bottom (in)
7 8 3 52
11 6 3 50
11 4 3 48
11 2 4 8
8 6
8 4
11 2
Compute the center of gravity of the prestressing strands at the transfer length using the
harped pattern.
The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands at the end of the beam
and the top fiber of the precast beam is:
3(2) + 3(4) + 3(6)
= 4.00 in
9
The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands at the harp point and the
bottom fiber of the precast beam is:
3(4) + 3(6) + 3(8)
= 6.00 in
9

The distance between the center of gravity of the 9 harped strands and the top fiber of the
beam at the transfer length section is:
(54 − 6 − 4)
4.00 + (2.5) = 7.25 in
34
The distance between the center of gravity of the 31 straight bottom strands and the extreme
bottom fiber of the beam is:
11(2) + 8(4) + 8(6) + 4(8)
= 4.32 in
31
The distance between the center of gravity of the total number of the strands and the bottom
fiber of the precast beam at the transfer length is:
9(54 − 7.25) + 31(4.32)
= 13.87 in
40
Eccentricity of the strand group at transfer length is: 24.73 − 13.87 = 10.86 in
The distance between the center of gravity of the total number of the strands and the bottom
fiber of the precast beam at the end of the beam is:
9(54 − 4) + 31(4.32)
= 14.60 in
40
The eccentricity at the end of the beam is: 24.73 − 14.60 = 10.13 in
Recompute top and bottom stresses at the transfer length section using the harped pattern:
1,140 1,140(10.86) 97.3(12)
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
ft = 1.44 − 1.39 + 0.13 = +0.18
At the bottom:
1,140 1,140(10.86) 97.3(12)
ft = + −
789 10,542 10,542
ft = 1.44 + 1.17 − 0.11 = +2.50
Stresses at The strand eccentricity at the harp points is the same as at the midspan, ec = 20.0 in
Harp Points The bending moment due to beam self-weight at a distance 34.00 ft. from the end of the
beam is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(34.00)(97.17 − 34.00) = 882.7 kip-ft

P Pe M g
ft = i − i +
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 882.7 *12
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
ft = 1.44 − 2.56 + 1.19 = +0.07

P Pe M
ft = i + i − g
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 882.7 *12
ft = + −
789 10,542 10,542
ft = 1.44 + 2.16 − 1.00 = +2.60
Stresses at The maximum moments due to non-composite loads and composite load do not occur at the
Midspan same place. In this example, the maximum combined stresses occur at midspan. The
bending moment due to beam self-weight at a distance 48’-7” from the end of the beam is:
M g = (0.5)(0.822)(48.58)(97.17 − 48.58) = 970.1 kip-ft

P Pe M g
ft = i − i +
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 970.1*12
ft = − +
789 8,909 8,909
ft = 1.44 − 2.56 + 1.31 = +0.19

P Pe M
ft = i + i − g
A Sb Sb
1,140 1,140(20.0) 970.1*12
ft = + −
789 10,542 10,542
ft = 1.44 + 2.16 − 1.10 = +2.50

Hold-Down Assume that the stress in the strand at the time of prestressing, before any losses, is:
Forces 0.75 f pu = 0.75(270) = 202.5 ksi
Then, the Prestress force per strand before any losses is: Pi ' = 0.153(202.5) = 31.0k / strand
From previous figure, harp angle:

 54 − 4 − 6 
ψ = tan −1   = 6.2
o
 34(12) 
Therefore, hold-down force per strand = 1.05(force per strand)(sin ψ)
=1.05(31.0) sin 6.2◦ = 3.5 kips per strand
Note that the factor, 1.05, is applied to account for friction.

Total hold down force = 9 strands(3.5) = 31.6 kips
ODOT BDM States that the following limits are not to be exceeded:
No. of Draped PU/Strand

Strands per Row (lb)
1 6,000
2 4,000
3 4,000
So hold-down force per strand = 3.5 kips per strand OK
Summary of At transfer, stresses at the end of girder tend to exceed allowables if the strand is straight.
Stresses at
Transfer Stresses can be brought within the allowable stress range either by harping or debonding the
strand. The question arises as to which is better, harping or debonding?
Boxes tend to use debonding because harping isn’t practical as the strand would go through
the void. I and Bulb T girders tend to use harping.
However, not all fabricators have the ability to harp (the bed won’t take the hold down
force). Therefore, before deciding to harp, contact probable fabricators or the local PCI
section for assistance and advice.
Top Stresses Bottom stresses

ft, (ksi) fb (ksi)
At transfer length section +0.27 +2.43
At harp points +0.07 +2.60
At midspan +0.19 +2.50
Note that the bottom stresses at the harp points are more critical than the ones at midspan.

STRESSES AT Total loss of prestress at service loads is ∆f pT = 43.95 ksi
SERVICE Stress in tendon after all losses, f pe = f pi − ∆f pT = 202.5 − 43.95 = 158.55 ksi
LOADS
Force per strand = (fpe)(strand area) = (158.6)(0.153) = 24.3 kips
The total prestressing force after all losses, Ppe = 24.3 (40) = 972.0 kips
Stress Limits Compression: [LRFD 5.9.4.2.1]

for Concrete Due to permanent loads, (i.e. beam self-weight, weight of slab and haunch, weight of future
wearing surface, and weight of barriers), for service limit states:


Due to permanent and transient loads (i.e. all dead loads and live loads), for service limit
states:
For the precast beam:0.60Φwfc’ = 0.60(1.0)(7.0) = +4.200 ksi
For the deck: 0.60Φwfc’ = 0.60(1.0)(4.5) = +2.700 ksi
Φw = 1.0 [LRFD 5.7.4.7.2]
Note: Φw is a factor for slender webs/flanges. It is not really meant for “I” girders. If the
calculations required for Φw are done, Φw=1.
Tension:
For components with bonded prestressing tendons:
For the precast beam: 0.19 f c' = 0.19(7.0) = 0.503 ksi
Stresses at Concrete stress at the top fiber of the beam, three cases:
Midspan-
Compression 1. Under permanent loads, Service I:
Use bending moments given in table in Section 1.4.1.1.
ftg1 = − + +
A St St Stg
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 1,148.4) *12 (153.6 + 245.1) *12
ftg1 = − + +
789 8,909 8,909 47,376
ftg1 = 1.23 − 2.18 + 2.83 + 0.10 = +1.98

( M LL + I )
ftg 2 = 0.5 f tg1 +
Stg
1,386.2*12
ftg 2 = 0.5(1.98) +
47,376
ftg 2 = 0.99 + 0.35 = +1.34

( M LL + I )
ftg 3 = ftg +
Stg
1,386.2*12
ftg 3 = 1.98 +
47,376
ftg 3 = 1.98 + 0.35 = +2.33

( M ws + M b )
ftc1 =
Stg
(245.1 + 153.6) *12
ftc1 = +
29,534
ftc1 = +0.162

Note: Note that deck stresses under service loads are almost always well below allowable
for continuous for LL bridges; but they still must be checked.

( M LL + I )
ftc 2 = 0.5 ftc1 +
Stg
1,386.2*12
ftc 2 = 0.5(0.162) +
29,534
ftc 2 = 0.08 + 0.563 = +0.64

( M ws + M b + M LL + I )
ftc =
Stg
(245.1 + 153.6 + 1,386.2) *12
ftc =
29,534
ftc = +0.73
Stresses at Tension stress at the bottom fiber of the beam, Service III:
Midspan-
Tension Ppe Ppe ec (M g + M s ) ( M ws + M b ) + 0.8M LL + I
fb = + − −
A Sb Sb Sbc
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 1,148.4) *12 [ (245.1 + 153.6) + (0.8*1,386.2) ] *12
fb = + − −
789 10,542 10,542 16, 694
fb = 1.23 + 1.84 − 2.39 − 1.08 = −0.40
Service III has the 0.8LL factor!
STRENGTH Total Ultimate bending moment for Strength I is: [LRFD Tables 3.4.1-1&2]
LIMIT STATE
Positive M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )
Moment
Section The maximum moments for non-composite and composite loads do not occur at the same
places. Here, the maximum factored moment occurs at 0.4L (although midspan is only 5k-ft
lower).
At point of maximum moment, 0.4L:
M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )

M u = 1.25(912.9 + 1,101.5 + 171.9) + 1.5(274.2) + 1.75(1, 412.4)
M u = 5, 615k − ft
Average stress in prestressing steel when f pe ≥ 0.5 f pu : [LRFD 5.7.3.1.1]

 c 
f ps = f pu  1 − k 
 dp
 

Where:

k=  f py 
2 1.04 − 
 f pu 

= 0.28 for low relaxation strands [LRFD Table C5.7.3.1.1-1]
dp = Distance from extreme compression fiber in.
to the centroid of the prestressing tendons
= h - ybs = 62.5 – 4.70 = 57.80

compressive face
To compute c, assume rectangular section behavior, and check if the depth of the equivalent
compression stress block, a, is equal to or less than ts:
Note: a =β1c
c= [LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4]
f pu
0.85 f c β b + kAps
'
dp
Where:
= 40 * 0.153 = 6.12
fpu = Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel ksi
= 270
As = Area of mild steel tension reinforcement in2
= 0.0
fy = Yield strength of tension reinforcement ksi

= 60.0
As‘ = Area of compression reinforcement in2
= 0.0
fy‘ = Yield strength of compression reinforcement ksi
= 60.0
fc‘ = Compressive strength of deck concrete ksi
= 4.5
= 0.83
b= Effective width of compression flange in.
= 96

6.12(270) + 0.0 − 0.0
c=
270
0.85(4.5)(0.83)(96) + 0.28(6.12)
57.80
c = 5.28
a = depth of the equivalent stress block = β1c

a = 0.83(5.28) = 4.39 in. < ts=8.5 in. OK
Therefore, the assumption of rectangular section behavior is valid and the average stress in
prestressing steel is:
 5.28 
f ps = 270 1 − 0.28  = 263.3 ksi
 57.80 
Nominal flexural resistance:

 a
 2
 4.39 
6.12(263.3)  57.80 − 
 2 
Mn =
12
M n = 7, 467
Factored flexural resistance:
Mr = φMn
Where φ = resistance factor = 1.0 for flexure and tension of prestressed concrete
M r = 7, 467 kip-ft > M u = 5, 615 kip-ft OK
NOTE: The equation given above for Mn is not the exact equation 5.7.3.2.2-1. Equation
5.7.3.2.2-1 assumes T-beam behavior, the presence of non-prestressed tensile steel,
prestressed tensile steel and non-prestressed compression steel. When the section is
rectangular and the non-prestressed reinforcement is ignored, equation 5.7.3.2.2-1
simplifies to the one used above.
Maximum The old ρmax requirement has been deleted. The LRFD Specifications now require that φ be
Reinforce- determined based on whether the section is tension controlled, compression controlled or a
ment Positive transition section. In the calculation of Mr, tension control was assumed.
Moment Section
Check the strain in the extreme tensile steel:
d t = 54.0 + 8.5 − 2.0 = 60.5
 d −c  60.5 − 5.28 
ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.032 > 0.005
 c   5.28 
This is a tension controlled section, so φ = 1.0 [LRFD 5.7.2.1 and 5.5.4.2]

Minimum [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2]
Reinforce- At any section, the amount of prestressed and nonprestressed tensile reinforcement shall be
ent Positive adequate to develop a factored flexural resistance, Mr, at least equal to the lesser of:
Moment Section
3. 1.2 times the cracking moment, Mcr, determined on the basis of elastic stress
distribution and the modulus of rupture, fr,
4. 1.33 times he factored moment required by the applicable strength load
combinations
S 
M cr = Sc ( f r + f cpe ) − M dnc  c − 1 ≥ Sc f r [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1]
 S nc 
Where:
fr = Modulus of rupture ksi
= 0.37 f = 0.37 7.0 = 0.979
'
c [LRFD 5.4.2.6]
fcpe = Compressive stress in concrete due to effective ksi
prestresss forces only (after allowance for all
Prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads
Ppe Ppe ec 972 972(20.0)
= + = + = 1.23 + 1.84 = 3.07
A Sb 789 10,542
Mdnc= Total unfactored dead load moment acting on the kip-ft
non composite section
= M g + M s = 951.9 + 1,148.4 = 2,100.3
Sc= Section modulus for the extreme fiber of the in3
composite section where tensile stress is caused by
externally applied loads
= 16,694
Snc= Section modulus for the extreme fiber of the in3
noncomposite section where tensile stress is caused
by externally applied loads
= 10,542
16, 694  16, 694  16, 694

M cr = (0.98 + 3.07) − 2,100.3  − 1 ≥ (0.979)
12  10,542  12
M cr = 4, 408 ≥ 1,362
1.2 M cr = 5, 290 kip-ft
At midspan, the factored moment required by the Strength I load combination is:
Mu = 5,610 kip-ft

Since 1.2 M cr < 1.33M u 1.2M cr Controls
M r = 7, 467 > 1.2 M cr OK
Note: The LRFD Specifications requires that this provision be met at every section.
Design of Total Ultimate bending moment for Strength I is: [LRFD 3.4.1-1&2]
Negative M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )
Moment
Section At the pier section:
M u = 1.25(−292.7) + 1.5(−467.1) + 1.75(−1,380.7) = −3, 483 kip-ft
Longitudinal
Deck Notes:
Reinforcement 1. At the negative moment section, the compression face is the bottom flange of the
beam and is 26 in wide.
2. This section is a nonprestressed reinforced concrete section, thus Φ = 0.9 for flexure.
Assume the deck reinforcement is at the mid-height of the deck.
 As f y  [LRFD 5.14.1.2.7j]
M u = φ As f y  d − 
 1.7 f c'b 
fy = Yield strength of compression reinforcement = in2

60.0
fc‘ = Compressive strength of girder = 7.0 ksi
d= Effective depth to negative moment in

reinforcement from bottom of girder
54 + 0.5(8.5) = 58.25
 As (60) 
3, 483(12) = 0.90 As (60)  58.25 − 
 1.7(7.0)(26) 
0 = 10.47 As2 − 3145 As + 41, 796
As = 13.94in 2
This is the required amount of mild steel reinforcement required in the slab to resist the
negative moment and it is equal to 18 #5 bars and 19 #6 bars.

The total area of longitudinal reinforcement provided, As ( provided ) = 5.58 in2.
1.9.2.3 The additional area of deck reinforcement required, As ( additional ) = 13.93 − 5.58 = 8.35 in2.
Negative The reinforcement layout is shown in the figure below. The additional reinforcement bars
Moment Deck are placed between the longitudinal reinforcement.
Reinforcement
The table below is a summary of the negative moment continuity calculations.
Typical longitudinal deck No. 5 @ 12” Top = 8 bars
reinforcement No. 5 @ 8” Btm. = 10 bars
Total Area of longitudinal 5.58 in2
reinforcement provided
Factored negative design -3,483 kip-ft
moment
Total area required to resist 13.93 in2
negative moment
Additional area of deck 8.35 in2
reinforcement required
Additional reinforcement 19 No. 6 Bars
provided
Additional area of deck 8.36 in2
reinforcement provided
Total As provided 13.94 in2 > 13.93 in2 OK

Location of steel:
Top – 8 #5 + 8 #6 with 2” clear
Bottom – 10 #5 + 11 #6 with 2 5/8” clear
Note: Epoxy coated steel assumed. Min. cover is 1.5 in. [LRFD 5.124.]
As = 18(0.31) + 19(0.44) = 13.94 in2
8(0.31)(2.3125) + 8(0.44)(2.375) +10(0.31)(8.5 − 2.9375) +11(0.44)(8.5 − 3)

x=
13.94
57.96
x= = 4.16
13.94
The steel was assumed 4.25” from top OK
d = 58.34 in
Now check Mn:
a=
As f y
=
(13.94 )( 60 ) = 5.41in
0.85f c 'b 0.85 ( 7 )( 26 )
a 5.41
c= = = 7.72
β1 0.7
 5.41 
M r = φM n = ( 0.9 )(13.94 )( 60 )  58.34 − 
 2 
M r = 41,880k − in = 3, 490k − ft > M u = 3, 483k − ft
Effective The effective tension flange width is the lesser of: [LRFD 5.7.3.4]
Tension Flange 1. The effective flange width, specified in LRFD Art. 4.6.2.6 = 96 in CONTROLS
Width 2. A width equal to 1/10 of the average of adjacent spans between bearings =
0.10(96.25)(12) = 115.5in

Control of According to LRFD 5.7.3.4 the spacing of the mild steel reinforcement in the layer closest
Cracking by to the tension face shall satisfy equation 5.7.3.4-1.
Distribution 700γ e
s≤ − 2d c
Reinforcement βs fs
The tensile stress in mild reinforcement is computed to be:
M sl
fs =
As jd
Where:
fy = Yield strength of compression reinforcement ksi
= 60.0
Msl = M u = 292.7 + 467.1 + 1,380.7 = 2,140.5 kip-ft
As = Area of negative moment reinforcement in2
= 13.94
reinforcement from bottom of girder
= 62.5 − 4.16 = 58.34
k 0.275
j = 1− = 1− = 0.908
3 3
Where:
k = 2 ρ n + ( ρ n)2 − ρ n
k = 2(0.00919)(5.718) + (0.00919 * 5.718) 2 − (0.00919)(5.718)
k = 0.275
Where:
As 13.94
ρ= = = 0.00919
bd (26)(58.34)
n = Modular ratio
= Esteel 29, 000
= = 5.718
Egirder 5, 072
2,140.5(12)
fs = = 34.8ksi
13.94(0.908)(58.34)
The previous calculation made the simplifying assumption that the section was rectangular.
If this assumption is NOT made, the neutral axis, calculated using working stress concepts,
can be calculate as 16.5 inches from the bottom of the beam. The cracked, transformed
moment of inertia is 177,600 in4. The steel stress is found to be 34.6ksi which compares to
35.4 ksi using the rectangular assumption.

The spacing of mild steel reinforcement in the layer closest to the tension face shall satisfy
the following:
700γ e
s≤ − 2d c [LRFD 5.7.3.4-1]
βs fs
Where:
γe = Exposure factor
= 0.75 for Class 2 exposure condition
fs = Tensile stress in steel reinforcement at the ksi
service limit state
βs = dc
1+
0.7(h − d c )
Where:
dc = Thickness of concrete cover measured in
from extreme tension fiber to center of the
flexural reinforcement located closest
therto
= 2.00 + 5/8 (1/2) = 2.31
h = Overall height on the composite section in
= 62.5
2.31
βs = 1 + = 1.055
0.7(62.5 − 2.31)
700 ( 0.75 )
s≤ − 2(2.31) = 9.67in
1.055 ( 34.8 )
6.0in ≤ 9.67in OK
For this example the tensile stress in the mild reinforcement is less than its allowable. Thus,
the distribution of reinforcement for control of cracking is adequate.
Maximum As before, check the strain in the extreme tensile steel:

Reinforce-
ment. Negative  d −c  59.9 − 7.72 
Moment Section ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.020 > 0.005
 c   7.72 
This is a tension controlled section, so φ = 0.9 [LRFD 5.7.2.1 and 5.5.4.2]
Minimum [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2]

Reinforcement At any section, the amount of prestressed and nonprestressed tensile reinforcement shall be
Negative adequate to develop a factored flexural resistance, Mr, at least equal to the lesser of:
Moment Section 2. 1.2 times the cracking moment, Mcr, determined on the basis of elastic stress
distribution and the modulus of rupture, fr,
3. 1.33 times he factored moment required by the applicable strength load

combinations
S 
M cr = Sc ( f r + f cpe ) − M dnc  c − 1 ≥ Sc f r [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1]
 S nc 
Where:
fr = 0.37 f c' = 0.37 4.5 = 0.785 ksi [LRFD 5.4.2.6]

fcpe = 0 ksi
Mdnc= M g + M s = 0 kip-ft
Sc= 29,534 in3
29,534
M cr = (0.785)
12
M cr = 1,932k − ft
1.2 M cr = 2,318k − ft
At bearing, the factored moment required by the Strength I load combination is:
Mu = -3,483
Therefore, 1.33M u = 4, 631 k-ft.
Since 1.2 M cr > 1.33M u 1.2M cr Controls
M r = 3, 490k − ft > 1.2 M cr = 2,318k − ft OK
Positive Continuous for live load bridges are covered in Article 5.14.1.4.4. Much of this article is
Moment new in 2007 (4th Ed.).
Connection
One requirement of this article is for a positive moment connection. These positive
moments are caused by the upward camber of the prestressed girders due to creep and
shrinkage. The positive moment connection is needed to provide continuity at the pier.
The connection can be made either by extending mild steel out of the end of the girder into
the diaphragm or by leaving strand extend out of the end of the girder into the diaphragm.
This example illustrates bent strand connections.
Positive moments develop at the connection between girders at in interior supports due to
live-load effects (if more than two spans) and restraint caused by temperature, creep, and

shrinkage. According to LRFD 5.14.1.4.4, these restraint moments are negligible when
continuity is established after 90 days.
Development The strands are bent up 90° into the diaphragm so that the hook extends 8 inches from the
Extended end of the girder. This distance is required to use the equations in the following section.
Strands The ends of the girders are placed 10 inches apart. With the 8 inch projection this leaves 2
inches of clear allowing for construction tolerances. Typically mild steel is placed in the
corner of the hooks to enhance the development length of the hooks. These bars should
have a minimum area equal to that of the bent strand or bar.
Required Area The design moment used for the working stress check is Mcr while the design moment for
of Strand the strength check is 1.2Mcr. According to LRFD 5.14.1.4.9c the stress in the strands used
for design as a function of the total length of the strand shall not exceed:
(ldsh − 8)
f psl = ≤ 150ksi [LRFD 5.14.1.4.9c-1]
0.288
(l − 8)
f pul = dsh [LRFD 5.14.1.4.9c-2]
0.163
Where:
ℓdsh = total length of extended strand in

fpsl = stress in the strand at the service limit state ksi
Cracked section shall be assumed
fpul = stress in the strand at the strength limit state ksi
The design moments, parameters, and results for the design of the positive moment
connection using bent strand are found in following table. The cracking moment is found
using the gross, composite cross section, but assuming that cracking occurs at the
diaphragm. Thus the diaphragm concrete strength is used. For these calculations the
effective width of 96 inches, 0.5 inch strand, and concrete strength of 4.5 ksi were used.

When using working stress design the number of strands is assumed to calculate the length
of the strand. When using the strength design method, the length of strand is assumed to
calculate the number of strands required. Design iterations are performed to determine the
most efficient combination of strand and length.
M cr = 0.24 f c ' Scb = 0.24 4.5 (16694 ) = 8500k − in = 708k − ft
1.2M cr = 850k − ft
Le = l dsh − 8
Thus Le is the length of the extended strand beyond the bend.

Working Stress Design
No. of
Strand 6 8 10 12 16
ℓdsh 42.29 33.78 29.36 25.83 21.42
As. 0.92 1.22 1.53 1.84 2.45
Moment 708.00 708.00 708.00 708.00 708.00
n 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
d 62.50 62.50 60.50 60.50 60.50
rho 45E-6 52E-6 263E-6 317E-6 422E-6
k 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08
j 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97
fs 150 113 94 78 59
Strength Design
No. of
Strand* 5.18 6.52 8.00 9.27 13.13
ℓdsh 42.00 35.00 30.00 27.00 22.00
As. 0.79 1.00 1.22 1.42 2.01
Moment 849.70 849.70 849.70 849.70 849.70
d 62.50 62.50 62.50 60.50 60.50
a 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.47
fpul 208.59 165.64 134.97 116.56 85.89
* Back calculated based on strand length
In this example working stress design governs. Multiple iterations are performed to
determine the least length of extension of the strand required.
• If the results indicate an odd number of strands they are rounded up to an even
number to provide symmetry in the connection.
• It may be more desirable to have a larger number of shorter strands as opposed to
fewer longer strands. Girder fabrication may be more difficult with longer strand
extensions as this may require excessive space between girders in the bed. In
addition, if a larger number of shorter strands are used the stress can be distributed
throughout a larger area.

The designer chooses from the tables above. A reasonable design would be 12 strands
extended 26 inches. That would be an 8 inch horizontal extension from the face of the beam
and an 18 inch vertical “tail” to the hook. Any 12 strands could be extended, but spacing
them out and using different rows makes construction easier and limits stress
concentrations.
Also note that, consistent with the design examples in NCHRP Report 519, the haunch has
been included.
SHEAR The area and spacing of shear reinforcement must be determined at regular intervals along
DESIGN the entire length of the beam. In this design example, transverse shear design procedures are
demonstrated below by determining these values at the critical section near the supports.
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided where:
Vu = 0.5φ (Vc + V p ) [LRFD 5.8.2.4-1]
Where:
Vu = Total factored shear force kips
Vc = Shear strength provided by concrete kips
Vp = Component of the effective prestressing kips
force in the direction of the applied shear
φ = Resistance factor [LRFD 5.5.4.2.1]
Critical Section Critical Section near the supports is at dv. [LRFD 5.8.3.2]
Negative
Moment Where:
= Distance between resultants of tensile and
compressive forces, (d e − a / 2) , but not
less than 0.9d e or 0.72h. [LRFD 5.8.2.9]
Where:
de = The corresponding effective depth from the extreme in
compression fiber to the centroid of the tensile force
in the tensile reinforcement
= 58.34
a = Equivalent depth of the compression block in
= 5.41
h = Total height of section in
= 62.5

Effective Shear The critical section will occur in the negative moment area, so use the negative bending
Depth properties:
d v = d e − 0.5(a ) = 58.34 − 0.5(5.41) = 55.63in
≥ 0.9d e = 0.9(58.34) = 52.5in
≥ 0.72h = 0.72(62.5) = 45in
Therefore, dv = 55.63 in
Calculation of The critical section near the support is dv = 55.63 in from the FACE of the support.
Critical Section Note: Assume the length of the bearing pad is 10 inches.
Thus the critical section is 55.63 in + 5 in = 60.63 inches.
Using values from previous tables (linearly interpolated), the factored shear force and
bending moment at the critical section for shear, according to Strength I load combinations.
Vu = 1.25(35.4 + 42.7 + 14.1) + 1.50(22.6) + 1.75(99.4) = 323.1 kips

(All shear goes the same way!)
M u = 0.9(185.2 + 223.5) + 1.25(−219.3) + 1.50(−350.0) + 1.75(−1, 080.9)

= −2323k − ft = 27880k − in
At this point, there are three choices:

1. Ignore the prestressing steel
Then, this is a reinforced section
β=2
θ = 45◦
(This is VERY conservative)
2. Use Sectional Model for Reinforced Concrete
3. Include prestressing steel
1. Ignore prestressing steel:

Vc = 0.0316 β f c' bv d v = 0.0316(2) 7(8)(55.63) = 74.4k
323.1
Vs = − 74.4 = 284.6
0.9
Assume #4 hoops Av = 0.4 in2 α = 90 sin α =1 cot α =0
A f d cot θ 0.4(60)(55.63) cot 45
s= v y v = = 4.69 in
Vs 284.6
Use #4 at 4 in
Vs = 334 kips

2. Use Sectional Model for Reinforced Concrete
Mu =27,880 kip-in
dv =55.63 in.
Nu =Applied factored normal force at the specified section = 0 kips
Vu=323.1 kips
As =Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of in2
the member = 13.94
Ap =0 in2
Ep =28,500 ksi
If dv < 60db = 30 in, Vp and fpo must be reduced for lack of bond. dv = 55.63 from center
bearing, so it is 66.63 from end of girder > 30 in. OK:
Vp =Component of the effective prestressing force in the direction of kips

the applied shear
=(force per strand)(number of draped strands)(sin ψ)
=0
fpo =0
Assume 0.5cotθ = 1.
27,880
+ 0.5(0) + (323.1) − 0
55.63
εx = ≤ 0.001
2(29, 000(13.94))
1x10−3 ≤ 0.001
Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv d v
Where:
= 8
= 0
323.1 − 0.9(0)
vu = = 0.81 kips
0.9(8)(55.63)

 vu  0.81
 '= = 0.115
 f c  7.0
Use (vu / fc’) < 0.125 and εx < 1 from LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 37◦
β = 2.13
Vc = 0.0316 β f c' bv d v = 0.0316(2.13) 7(8)(55.63) = 79.3 kips
323.1 − 0.9(79.3)
Vs = = 280 kips
0.9
Av f y d v cot θ
0.4(60)(55.63) cot 37
s= = = 6.32
Vs 280
So #4 hoops at 6 in
Vs = 295.0 kips
ΦVn = 0.9 ( 79.3 + 295 ) = 337 k < 323.1k = Vu
3. Include Prestressing Steel:
Mu = 27,880 kip-in
dv = 53.6 In.
= 0
Vu = 323.1 kips
side of the member
= 13.94
Ap = 9(0.153) = 1.38 in2
Ep = 28,500 ksi
Es = 29,000 ksi
Note, when the prestressing steel in included, de = 57 inches. The term c = 9.76 in and a =
6.77in. Thus, dv = 53.6 in.
If dv < 60db = 30 in, Vp and fpo must be reduced for lack of bond. dv = 55.63 from face of
support so this > 30 in from the end of the girder, so:

= 24.3(9)(sin 6.2◦) = 23.6
and the surrounding concrete [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]
= .7 f pu = 0.7(270.0) = 189
Assume 0.5cotθ = 1.
27,880
+ 0.5(0) + (323.1 − 23.6) − 1.38(189)
53.6
εx = ≤ 0.001
2(29, 000(13.94) + 28,500(1.38))
0.63x10−3 ≤ 0.001
Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv d v
Where:
= 8
= 23.6
323.1 − 0.9(23.6)
vu = = 0.782 kips
0.9(8)(53.6)
 vu  0.782
 '= = 0.11
 fc  7.0
Use (vu / fc’) < 0.125 and εx < 0.75 from LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 34.4◦
β = 2.26

Vc = 0.0316 β f c' bv d v = 0.0316(2.26) 7 (8)(55.63) = 84.1 kips
323.1 − 0.9(84.1 + 23.6)

Vs = = 251.3 kips
0.9
Av f y d v cot θ
0.4(60)(53.6) cot 34.4
s= = = 7.5
Vs 251.3
So #4 hoops at 6 in
Vs = 313.0 kips
Vr = 0.9(84.1 + 313.0 + 23.6) = 378.6 > Vu OK
Minimum Check which is true:

Reinforcement • vu < 0.125 f c' [LRFD 5.8.2.7-1]
Requirement Or
• vu ≥ 0.125 f c' [LRFD 5.8.2.7-2]
0.125 f = 0.125(7.0) = 0.875 ksi
c
'
vu = 0.81 ksi, max
Since vu < 0.125 f c' , Then smax = 0.8d = 0.8(55.63) = 44.5 ≤ 24.0 in : 24 in CONTROLS
Calculate minimum area of steel using a 6 inch spacing:

bs
Av ≥ 0.0316 f c ' v = 0.0316 7 ksi
(8in )( 6in ) = 0.067in2 < 0.40in2 OK
fy 60ksi
[LRFD 5.8.2.5]

Critical Section Critical Section near the supports is at dv. [LRFD 5.8.3.2]
Positive
Moment Where:
= Distance between resultants of tensile and
compressive forces, (d e − a / 2) , but not
less than 0.9d e or 0.72h. [LRFD 5.8.2.9]
Where:
de = The corresponding effective depth from the extreme in
compression fiber to the centroid of the tensile force
in the tensile reinforcement
= 58.2 = dp
a = Equivalent depth of the compression block in
= 3.42
h = Total height of section in
= 62.5
In this area, the positive moment properties are needed. However, since this section is
where the strand is harped, the positive moment properties must be recalculated using 31
strands. Ap = 4.74 in2 and dp = 62.5-4.32 = 58.2 inches. The value of 4.32 inches as the
centroid of 31 strands was calculated earlier in Section 1.7.2. Refer to previous section for
the equations below:
c=
( 4.74 )( 270 ) = 4.11 in
270
( 0.85 )( 4.5)( 0.83)( 96 ) + 0.28 ( 4.74 )
58.2
 4.11 
f ps = 270 1 − 0.28  = 264.8 ksi
 58.2 
a = ( 0.83)( 4.11) = 3.42 in
Effective Shear
Depth d v = d e − 0.5(a ) = 58.2 − 0.5(3.42) = 56.5in
≥ 0.9d e = 0.9(58.2) = 52.4in
≥ 0.72h = 0.72(62.5) = 45in

Calculation of The critical section near the support is dv = 56.5 in from the FACE of the support.
Critical Section
Note: Assume the length of the bearing pad is 10 inches.
Thus the critical section is 56.5in + 5 in ≈ 62 inches.
Using values from previous tables, the factored shear force and bending moment at the
critical section for shear, according to Strength I load combinations.
Vu = 1.25(35.4 + 42.7 + 7.9) + 1.50(12.6) + 1.75(82.2) = 250.0 k

M u = 1.25(185.2 + 223.5 + 49.6) + 1.50(79.1) + 1.75(373.9) = 1,346 k − in
It is conservative to take the highest factored moment that will occur at that section, rather
than the moment corresponding to maximum Vu, [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]. Therefore,
Vu = 250.0 kips
M u = 1,346 kip-ft
The values used to find Vu and Mu are linearly interpolated from the table of shears and
moments in previous section.
Contribution of The contribution of the concrete to the nominal shear resistance is:
Concrete to Vc = 0.0316 β f c' bv d v [LRFD 5.8.3.3-3]
Nominal Shear
Resistance
Strain in Strain in the reinforcement is (assuming uncracked):

Flexural
Tension Mu
Reinforcement + 0.5 N u + 0.5 Vu − V p cot θ − Aps f po
dv
εx = ≤ 0.001 [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-1]
Where:
= 0
= 24.3(9)(sin 6.2◦) = 23.6
and the surrounding concrete [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]
= .7 f pu = 0.7(270.0) = 189

Aps = Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side in2
of the member, as shown in LRFD Figure 5.8.3.4.2-1.
= 31(0.153) = 4.74
side of the member
= 0
Ac= Area of concrete on the flexural tension half. This in2
term is calculated as the area on the tension side
(bottom in this case) from the tension fiber to h/2.
= 475
This section is beyond the transfer length, so fpo and Vp do not need to be reduced.
Note that either θ can be assumed OR 0.5cotθ can be assumed =1. Assume 0.5cotθ=1:
1,346(12)
+ 0.5(0) + (250 − 23.6) − 4.74(189)
56.5
εx = ≤ 0.001
2 ( 28,500(4.74) + 5072 ( 475 ) )
−0.07 x10−3 ≤ 0.001
The negative value means the section is uncracked.
Shear Stress Vu − φV p
vu =
φ bv d v
Where:
= 8
= 23.6
250 − 0.9(23.6)
vu = = 0.562 kips
0.9(8)(56.5)
 vu  0.562
 '= = 0.0803
 fc  7.0
Values of β & θ Use (vu / fc’) < 0.1 and εx < -0.05 from LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1:
θ = 21.4◦
β = 3.24

Concrete The contribution of the concrete to the nominal shear resistance is:
Contribution Vc = 0.0316 β f c' bv d v [LRFD 5.8.3.3-3]
Vc = 0.0316(3.24) 7.0(8)(56.5) = 122.4 kips
Contribution of Check if: [LRFD 5.8.2.4-1]

Reinforcement
of Nominal Vu = 250 kips > 0.5φ (Vc + V p ) = 0.5 ( 0.9 ) (122.4 + 23.6) = 65.7 kips
Shear
Resistance
At least minimum stirrups are needed.
Minimum The area of transverse reinforcement should not be less than:

Reinforcement bs
Requirement Av ≥ 0.0316 f c' v [LRFD 5.8.2.5-1]
fy
Check maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement: [LRFD 5.8.2.7]

Check which is true:
• vu < 0.125 f c' [LRFD 5.8.2.7-1]
Or
• vu ≥ 0.125 f c' [LRFD 5.8.2.7-2]
0.125 f c' = 0.125(7.0) = 0.875 ksi
vu = 0.562 ksi
Since vu < 0.125 f c' , Then smax = 0.8d = 0.8(56.5) = 45.2 ≤ 24.0 in : 24 in CONTROLS
Calculate minimum area of steel using a 12 inch spacing to get area of steel per foot:
bs
A v ≥ 0.0316 f c ' v = 0.0316 7ksi
(8in )(12in ) = 0.134in 2 [LRFD 5.8.2.5]
fy 60ksi
ODOT uses #4 bars with 2 legs as standard; (Av = 2(0.2in2) = 0.4in2)
#4@ 24 inch o.c. = 0.2 in2 / ft.
Maximum The upper limit of Vn, given by following equation, is intended to ensure that the concrete in
Nominal Shear the web of the beam will not crush prior to yield of the transverse reinforcement.
Resistance Vn = 0.25 f c'bv d v + V p [LRFD 5.8.3.3-2]
Comparing this previous equation with equation LRFD 5.8.3.3.-1:

Assume #4 @ 24”:
Vs =
Av f y d v ( cot θ + cot α ) sin α
=
( 0.4in ) ( 60ksi )( 56.5) cot ( 21.4 ) + 0 (1)
2
s 24in
Vs = 144.2k
(122.4 + 144.2 ) = 266.6 ≤ 0.25(7.0)(8)(56.5) = 791 kips OK
Vr = φ (Vc + Vs + V p )
Vr = 0.9 (122.4 + 144.2 + 23.6 ) = 261.2 kips
Vr > Vu = 250 kips
INTERFACE It will be assumed that the critical section is the same as for vertical shear. Using load
SHEAR combination Strength I:
TRANSFER Vu = 323.1 kips
Factored d v = 55.6 in
Horizontal
Shear
Both of these values were found in the preceding section. This is shear at the critical section
near the pier.
Required Vri = φVni [LRFD 5.8.4.1-1]

Interface Shear
Reinforcement The nominal shear resistance of the interface plane is:
Vni = cAcv + µ[ Avf f y + Pc ] [LRFD 5.8.4.1-3]
Where:
c = Cohesion factor ksi [LRFD 5.8.4.3]
µ = Friction factor [LRFD 5.8.4.3]
Acv = Area of concrete engaged in shear in2 [LRFD 5.8.4.1-6]
transfer
= bviLvi
Avf = Area of shear reinforcement crossing the in2
shear plane
Pc = Permanent net compressive force normal kips
to the shear plane
fy = Shear reinforcement yield strength ksi
bvi= Width of area of concrete engaged in inch
shear transfer
Lvi = Length of area of concrete engaged in inch
shear transfer

For a cast-in-place concrete placed against clean concrete girder surfaces, free of
laitance with surface intentionally roughened to an amplitude of 0.25 in:
c = 0.28 [LRFD 5.8.4.2]
µ = 1.0
Begin by exploring what happens when the shear reinforcement is the minimum used
anywhere in the girder. The shear reinforcement was previously calculated to be #4 @ 24
inches minimum. The shear width is bvi = 20 inches as this is the width of the top of the
girder. If Lvi = 24 inches:
Vni = cAcv + µ[ Avf f y + Pc ]

Acv = 20 ( 24 ) = 480in 2
Vni = ( 0.28 )( 480 ) + 1.0 0.4 ( 60 ) + 0  = 158.4k
Vri = φVni = 0.9 (158.4 ) = 142.6k
Vui = vui Acv [LRFD 5.8.4.2-2]
142.6
vui ,max = = 0.297 ksi
480
Vu1
vui = [LRFD 5.8.4.2-1]
bvi d v
Vu1,max = 0.297 ( 20 )( 55.6 ) = 330kips
Therefore, #4 @ 24 is adequate anywhere that Vu < 330 kips. Note that the critical section,
the reinforcement is actually #4 @ 4 inches or #4 @ 6”; depending on the model used. Note
that #4 @ 24 would be adequate for horizontal shear, so it is NOT necessary to extend every
shear stirrup into the slab.
Minimum 0.05 Acv

Interface Shear Minimum shear reinforcement, Avf ≥ [LRFD 5.8.4.1-4]
fy
Reinforcement
A #4 double leg bar at 24 in spacing is provided from the beam extending into the deck.
Therefore, Avf =0.4 in2
0.05(480)
0.40 ≥ = 0.40 OK
60

Article 5.8.4.4 states that Avf need not exceed that required to resist 1.33Vui/φ. The same
article also states that the minimum reinforcement provisions are waived for girder slab
interfaces with surfaces roughened to an amplitude of 0.25 inches where the factored
interface shear, vui, found in equation 5.8.4.2-1 is less than 0.210 ksi and all of the vertical
(transverse) shear reinforcement required by Article 5.8.1.1 is extended and anchored into
the slab.
Maximum Vni must be less than:

Nominal Shear K1 f c' Acv = 0.3(4.5)(480) = 648k [LRFD 5.8.4.1-4]
Resistance
K 2 Acv = 1.8(480) = 864k [LRFD 5.8.4.1-5]
≤ K1 f c' Acv
Vni provided = 158.4k OK
≤ K 2 Acv
K1 = 0.3 and K2 = 1.8 (for normal weight concrete) are found in Article 5.8.4.3.
MINIMUM At each section the tensile capacity of the longitudinal reinforcement on the flexural tension
LONG- side of the member shall be proportioned to satisfy: [LRFD 5.8.3.5-1]
ITUDINAL
REIN- Mu Nu V 
FORC- Aps f ps + As f y ≥ + 0.5 +  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ
d vφ φ φ 
EMENT
REQUIRE-
MENT According to Article 5.8.3.5, it is not necessary to provide any steel beyond that to resist
moment if there is a compressive reaction on the flexural compression face; in other words,
in a negative moment zone over a support, the equation in this article does not need to be
satisfied. However, it makes an exception for a continuous for live load bridge; saying that
this equation must be checked for a continuous for live load bridge.
This provision will be checked at the simply supported end, using positive moment
properties. The check at the continuous end is made in a similar manner.
The development length is:
 2   2 
l d = κ  f ps − f pe  d b = 1.6  264.8 − (158.6 )  ( 0.5 ) = 127.3in [LRFD 5.11.4.2]
 3   3 
a 3.42
dv = dp − = ( 62.5 − 4.32 ) − = 56.5in
2 2
So the critical section is 56.5 inches from face of support. Allowing for a 10 inch bearing
pad and that the center of bearing is 12 inches from the girder end, the critical section is
56.5+10/2+12=73.5 inches from the end of the girder.

Since this is less than the development length, the stress in the steel must be reduced for lack
of development.
l px − 60d b
f px = f pe +
l d − 60d b
(f ps − f pe ) [LRFD 5.11.4.2-4]
73.5in − 30in
f px = 158.6ksi + ( 264.8ksi − 158.6ksi ) = 206ksi
127.3in − 30in
Mu Nu V 
d vφ φ φ 
( 4.74 )( 206 ) = 977k >
1346  250 
+0+ − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 488k
1.0 ( 56.5 )  0.9 
This is OK. Note that Vs may not be taken as greater than Vu/φ [LRFD 5.8.3.5].
Vu 250k
Vs = 144k < = = 277.8k
φ 0.9
At the inside edge of the bearing area of a simply supported end:

V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ [LRFD 5.8.3.5-2]
φ 
The steel is not fully developed. Since the bearing pad is assumed 10 inches and the center
of bearing is 12 inches from the end of the girder, this section is 12+10/2 =17 inches from
the end of the girder. This is within the transfer length, so:
f pe l px 158.6 (17 )
f px = = = 90ksi [5.11.4.2-3]
60db 30

V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 90 ) = 426k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 464.6k
 
Ab f y 0.2 ( 60 )
l d = 1.25 = 1.25 = 5.7in
fc ' 7 [LRFD 5.11.2.1]
< 0.4db f y = 0.4 ( 0.5 )( 60 ) = 12in
The development length is 12 inches so the bar is fully developed, thus:
464.6 − 426
As = = 0.64in 2
60
4 #4 works. 3 #5 also works as a # 5 needs a 15 inch development length.
Can also add stirrups. Increase to #4 @ 12:
0.4 ( 60 )( 56.5 ) cot 21.4 Vu

Vs = = 288k > = 277.8k
12 φ
V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 90 ) = 426k >
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 ( 277.8 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 294.2k
 
In the previous calculations, the assumption was made that the center of bearing was 12
inches from the end of the girder.
What if the bearing pad is placed right at the end of the girder? That is, what if the center of
bearing is only 5 inches from the end? What effect does that have on longitudinal steel?

a 3.42
dv = dp − = ( 62.5 − 4.32 ) − = 56.5in
2 2
So the critical section is 56.5 inches from face of support. Allowing for a 10 inch bearing
pad, the critical section is 66.5 inches from the end of the girder.
Since this is less than the development length, the stress in the steel must be reduced for lack
of development.

l − 60d b
f px = f pe + px
l d − 60d b
( f ps − f pe ) [LRFD 5.11.4.2-4]
66.5in − 30in
127.3in − 30in
Mu Nu V 
d vφ φ φ 
( 4.74 )(198.4 ) = 940.4k >
1346  250 
+0+ − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 488k
1.0 ( 56.5 )  0.9 
This is OK. Note that Vs may not be taken as greater than Vu/φ [LRFD 5.8.3.5].
Vu 250k
Vs = 144k < = = 277.8k
φ 0.9
At the inside edge of the bearing area of a simply supported end:
V 
Aps f ps + As f y ≥  u − V p − 0.5Vs  cot θ [LRFD 5.8.3.5.-2]
φ 
The steel is not fully developed. Since the bearing pad is assumed 10 inches, this section is
10 inches from the end of the girder. This is within the transfer length, so:
f pe l px 158.6 (10 )
f px = = = 52.9ksi [LRFD 5.11.4.2-3]
60db 30

V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 52.9 ) = 250.8k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 (144.2 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 464.6k
 
NG. Assume #4 bars will be used.

Ab f y 0.2 ( 60 )
l d = 1.25 = 1.25 = 5.7in
fc ' 7
< 0.4db f y = 0.4 ( 0.5 )( 60 ) = 12in
The development length is 12 inches so:
10
f sx = ( 60 ) = 50ksi
12
The #4 can only develop 50 ksi. Thus:
464.6 − 250.8
As = = 4.3in 2
50
This would be 22 #4! Clearly unrealistic!

Add stirrups. Increase to #4 @ 12:
0.4 ( 60 )( 56.5 ) cot 21.4 Vu

Vs = = 288k > = 277.8k
12 φ
V 
φ 
( 4.74 )( 52.9 ) = 250.8k <
 250 
 0.9 − 23.6 − 0.5 ( 277.8 )  cot ( 21.4 ) = 294.2k
 
This is much more workable:
294.2 − 250.8
As = = 0.87in 2
50

This is 5 #4 bars.
So decrease stirrup spacing from the end of the girder to the critical section (this will be 66.5
inches from the end of the girder) to #4 @ 12. Add 5 #4 bars longitudinal in the bottom
flange.
PRE- The bursting resistance of pretensioned anchorage zones provided by vertical reinforcement
TENSIONED in the ends of the pretensioned beams at the service limit state shall be take as:
ANCHORAG Pr = f s As [LRFD 5.10.10.1-1]
E ZONE Where:
Anchorage As = Total area of transverse reinforcement in2
Zone located within the distance h/4 from the end
of the beam
fs = Stress in steel, but not taken greater than 20 ksi
Pr = Bursting resistance, should not be less than kips
4% of Fpi
40(0.153)(202.5)(0.04) = 49.6
49.6
Solving for the required area of steel, As = = 2.47 in2
20
At least 2.47 in2 of vertical transverse reinforcement should be provided at the end of the
beam for a distance equal to one-fourth of the depth of the beam, h/4 = 54/4=13.5 in
Therefore, for a distance of 13.5 in from the end of the member, use 7 #4 bars at 2 inches on
center. The reinforcement provided 7(2)0.2 = 2.8 > 2.47 OK. This may be unrealistic, so
larger bars may be needed.
Confinement [LRFD 5.10.10.2]

Reinforcement For a distance of 1.5d = 1.5(54) = 81 in, from the end of the beam, reinforcement is placed
to confine the prestressing steel in the bottom flange. The reinforcement should not be less
than #3 deformed pars, with spacing not exceeding 6.0 in, and shaped to enclose the strands.
EXTERIOR
GIRDER

Effective The effective flange width is taken as one-half the effective width of the adjacent interior
Flange Width – girder plus the least of:
Exterior Girder One-eighth of the effective span length = 0.125(96.25)(12)
= 144 in.
6.0 times the average thickness of the slab, plus = 6.0(8.5) + 0.5(8)
the greater of half the web thickness =55 in.
or
one-quarter of the width of the top flange of the = 6.0(8.5) + 0.25(20)
basic girder = 55 in.
The width of the overhang = 2.5 ft = 30 inches
Therefore, the effective flange width for the exterior girder is: (96/2) + 30 = 78 in.
From the previous calculation of beff, the center to center distance controls.
beff Trans = nbeff = (0.8015) 78 in = 62.5 in
Exterior Girder From the previous calculation of beff, the center to center distance controls.
Properties beff Trans = nbeff = (0.8015) 78 in = 62.5 in
yb= 38.22 in
I= 624512 in4
A= 50457 in2
h= 62.5 in
yTC = 24.28 in
yTG = 15.78 in
Sb= 16340 in3
STG = 39576 in3
STC = 25721in3

Dead Loads Slab Self Weight:
78 in (8.5 in)(0.150 kcf)/144 = 0.691 klf
Haunch Weight: (Same as interior girder)

0.042 klf
Recall that tributary area was used for the slab weight. This will DECREASE the dead load
moment on the exterior girders.
Distance x, ft. Shear, kips Moment, kip-ft
0.00 35.3 0
9.26 28.5 295
18.97 21.4 537
28.69 14.2 710
38.41 7.1 814
48.13 0 849
57.84 -7.1 814
67.56 -14.2 710
77.28 -21.4 537
86.99 -28.5 295
96.25 -35.3 0
Distribution One Lane Loaded: Lever Rule

Factors
g= egint
Where:
g = DFMext
gint= DFMint
d
e = 0.77 + e
9.1

Distribution Positive Moment Region:
Factor for Exterior Girder – Two or More Lanes Loaded:
Moment
DFExt = e DFInt
de 1.0
e = 0.77 + = 0.77 + = 0.880
9.1 9.1
DFExt+ = (0.880) (0.665) = 0.585
Lever Rule Assume a hinge develops over each interior girder and solve for the reaction in the exterior
girder as a fraction of the truck load.
∑M H → 1.2 Pe − RS = 0
1.2 Pe 1.2e
R= ∴ DF =
S S
This is for one lane loaded. Multiple Presence

Factors apply 1.2 is the MPF
In the diagram, P/2 are the wheel loads; P is the

resultant force. All three loads are NOT applied at
the same time.
Note that truck cannot be closer than 2’ from the

barrier
Distribution for One Lane Loaded:

Factor for
Moment 1.2(36k ) [ (10.5 − 3.5) + (10.5 − 9.5) ]
R=
72k (8 ft )
R = 0.6 lanes / girder
Multiple Presence:
MPF = 1.2
Note that this only uses the truck.
By dividing by the total truck weight of 72 kips, R is given in lanes/girder

NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
DFExt ,Min = + Nb
[LRFD C4.6.2.2.2d-1]
Nb
∑x 2
Where:

Nb - Number of beams or girders
e - Eccentricity of design truck or load from CG of pattern of girders (ft.)
Note: Only the truck is used and it cannot be closer than 2’ from the barrier
Minimum Exterior Girder Distribution Factor One Lane:
NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
Nb
∑x 2
1 16(12)
DFM = +
( )
Ext , Min
5 2 162 + 82
DFM Ext , Min = MPF ( DF ) = 1.2(0.5) = 0.6

Two Lanes Loaded:
Note: Truck cannot be closer than 2’ from the barrier and the truck must be 2 feet from the
lane edge.
Minimum Exterior Girder Distribution Factor Two Lane:

NL
X Ext ∑ e
NL
Nb
∑x 2
2 16(12 + 0)
DFM = +
2(162 + 82 )
Ext , Min
5
DFM Ext , Min = MPF ( DF ) = 1.0(0.7) = 0.7 CONTROLS
DFMtwo lanes = 0.585 lanes/girder

DFMone lane = 0.600 lanes/girder (lever rule)
DFMminimum = 0.600 lanes/girder (one lanes)
DFMminimum = 0.700 lanes/girder (two lanes)
The controlling DFM is the minimum DFM with two lanes loaded DFM = 0.7
This is a 5% increase from the interior girder (DFM = 0.665)
Distribution for One Lane Loaded: Lever Rule

Factor for
Shear Two or More Lanes Loaded:
DFM,Ext = e DFM,Int
d
e = 0.66 + e
10

DFExt = e DFInt
de 1.0
e = 0.6 + = 0.6 + = 0.70
10 10
DFExt+ = (0.70) (0.814) = 0.570
One Lane Loaded: (Lever Rule)

DFVEXT = 0.6
This is the same as moment calculation.

However, the minimum DF = 0.7 (from possible rigid body rotation) - THIS CONTROLS.
Unfactored Dead Loads:
Shear Forces &
Bending Future Wearing
Moments Deck plus Barrier Weight Surface
Beam Weight Haunch [Continuous [Continuous
Location [Simple Span] [Simple Span] Span] Span]
Shea
Shear Mg , Shear Ms, Shear Mb, r Mws,
0.00 0.00 39.6 0 35.3 0 9.2 7.7 14.7 12.4
9.26 0.10 31.9 331 28.5 295.2 6.8 81.8 10.9 130.5
18.97 0.20 24 602.6 21.4 537.3 4.3 136 6.9 217
28.69 0.30 16 796.5 14.2 710.4 1.8 166 2.9 264.9
38.41 0.40 8 912.9 7.1 814.2 -0.6 171.9 -1 274.2
48.13 0.50 0 951.9 0 848.8 -3.1 153.6 -5 245.1
57.84 0.60 -8 912.9 -7.1 814.2 -5.6 111.2 -8.9 177.5
67.56 0.70 -16 796.5 -14.2 710.4 -8.1 44.7 -12.9 71.3
77.28 0.80 -24 602.6 -21.4 537.3 -10.6 -46 -16.9 -73.4
86.99 0.90 -31.9 331 -28.5 295.2 -13.1 -160.8 -20.8 -256.7
96.25 Brg. -39.6 0 -35.3 0 -15.4 -292.7 -24.6 -467.1

Live Loads:
Length LL+IM
V M
ft. k k-ft
Bearing 0 76.5 50.9
Trans. 2.04 74.0 199.4
H/2 2.73 73.2 247.5
0.10L 9.26 65.3 655.8
0.20L 18.97 53.7 1101.8
0.30L 28.69 42.9 1365.5
0.40L 38.41 34.2 1483.0
MidSpan 48.13 -41.3 1455.5
0.60L 57.84 -51.6 1301.1
0.70L 67.56 -61.8 1009.2
0.80L 77.28 -71.7 -815.0
0.90L 86.99 -81.3 -921.5
H/2 93.52 -87.1 -1252.7
Trans. 94.21 -87.7 -1299.1
Bearing 96.25 -89.5 -1449.7
Maximum envelope values shown. The values shown may not be from the same load case.
Load The following limit states are applicable: [LRFD 3.4.1]

Combinations Service I:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 1.00 (LL + IM)
Service III:
Q = 1.00(DC + DW) + 0.80(LL + IM)
Strength I:
Length Service 1 Service 3 Strength 1
V M V M V M
ft. k k-ft k k-ft k k-ft
Bearing 0 175.3 71.0 160.0 60.8 261.1 117.3
Trans. 2.04 168.2 416.2 153.4 376.4 250.8 630.3
H/2 2.73 165.8 528.7 151.1 479.2 247.2 797.3
0.10L 9.26 143.4 1494.4 130.3 1363.2 214.6 2228.5
0.20L 18.97 110.2 2594.7 99.5 2374.3 166.4 3848.5
0.30L 28.69 77.8 3303.3 69.3 3030.2 119.5 4878.1
0.40L 38.41 47.7 3656.2 40.8 3359.6 76.4 5380.4
MidSpan 48.13 -49.4 3654.7 -41.2 3363.6 -83.7 5357.4
0.60L 57.84 -81.2 3316.9 -70.9 3056.7 -129.6 4841.0
0.70L 67.56 -113.0 2632.0 -100.7 2430.2 -175.4 3812.5
0.80L 77.28 -144.6 205.5 -130.3 368.5 -220.8 -568.0
0.90L 86.99 -175.6 -712.8 -159.3 -528.5 -265.4 -1635.0
H/2 93.52 -195.9 -1707.1 -178.5 -1456.5 -294.3 -2930.0
Trans. 94.21 -198.1 -1829.0 -180.6 -1569.2 -297.5 -3092.5
Bearing 96.25 -204.4 -2209.5 -186.5 -1919.6 -306.4 -3603.6

Stresses at Concrete stress at the top fiber of the girder, three cases:
Midspan
1. Under permanent loads, Service I:
Ppe Ppe ec ( M g + M s ) ( M ws + M b )
ftg1 = − + +
A St St Stg
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 848.8) *12 (153.6 + 245.1) *12
ftg1 = − + +
789 8,909 8,909 39576
ftg1 = 1.23 − 2.18 + 2.43 + 0.12 = +1.60

( M LL + I )
ftg 2 = 0.5 ftg1 +
Stg
1, 455*12
ftg 2 = 0.5(1.60) +
39576
ftg 2 = 0.80 + 0.44 = +1.24

( M LL + I )
ftg 3 = ftg1 +
Stg
1, 455*12
ftg 3 = (1.60) +
39576
ftg 3 = 1.60 + 0.44 = +2.04
( M ws + M b )
ftc =
Stc
(245.1 + 153.6) *12
ftc = +
25271
ftc = +0.186
Note that deck stresses under service loads are almost always well below allowable for
continuous for LL bridges; but they still must be checked.

( M LL + I )
ftc 2 = 0.5 ftc1 +
Stc
1, 455*12
ftc 2 = 0.5(0.186) +
25721
ftc 2 = 0.09 + 0.68 = +0.77

( M LL + I )
ftc 3 = ftc1 +
Stc
1, 455*12
ftc 3 = (0.186) +
25721
ftc 3 = 0.19 + 0.68 = +0.87
Tension stress at the bottom fiber of the girder, Service III:

fb = + − −
A Sb Sb Sbc
972 972(20.0) (951.9 + 848.8) *12 [ (245.1 + 153.6) + (0.8*1455) ] *12
fb = + − −
789 10,542 10,542 16,340
fb = 1.23 + 1.84 − 2.05 − 1.15 = −0.13
GIRDER STRESSES INT EXT
COMP – PERMANENT LOADS 1.98 ksi 1.60 ksi

COMP – ½ PERMANENT LOADS + LL 1.34 ksi 1.24 ksi
COMP – PERMANENT LOADS + LL 2.33 ksi 2.04 ksi
TENSION 0.40 ksi 0.13 ksi
Positive Total Ultimate bending moment for Strength I i: [LRFD Tables 3.4.1&2]
Moment
Section M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )

M u ,ext = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )

M u ,ext = 1.25(912.9 + 814.2 + 171.9) + 1.5(274.2) + 1.75(1, 483)
M u ,ext = 5380k − ft < M u ,int = 5, 615k − ft
Since exterior Mu is less than interior Mu, OK
The positive moment, under the Strength I limit state, for the exterior girder is less than that
for interior girder. Although the LL increases, the DL decreases due to the flange (slab)
being narrower.
The interior girder design met all the checks for positive moment design. These were:
Nominal Strength, tension controlled, and minimum reinforcement. All of these checks
depend on Mu and/or Mn. Since MU,ext<Mu,int, the design for the interior girder for
POSITIVE MOMENT is adequate for exterior girder.
Stresses at transfer of prestressing force is independent of whether the girder is interior or
exterior, so no check is needed.
Negative Total Ultimate bending moment for Strength I is: [LRFD Tables 3.4.1&2]
Moment
Section M u = 1.25( DC ) + 1.5( DW ) + 1.75( LL + IM )

M u = 1.25(−292.7) + 1.5(−467.1) + 1.75(−1, 450) = −3604 kip-ft
This is 4% greater than the moment for the interior girder. This is because the LL moment
increases. At the support, the slab moment is 0, so it has no effect. Away from the support,
the slab moment is positive, so it would mitigate the negative moment. Thus, the smaller
slab moment has the effect of INCREASING the negative moment, as compared to the
interior girder.
 As (60) 
3, 604(12) = 0.90 As (60)  58.25 − 
 1.7(7.0)(26) 
0 = 10.47 As2 − 3145 As + 43248
As = 14.5in 2
This is the required amount of mild steel reinforcement required in the slab to resist the
negative moment and it is equal to 33 #6 bars. Distributed over a length of 6.5 feet, this
would be #6 @ 4 inches top and bottom! Use 16 bars on the bottom and 17 on the top. As =
14.52 in2
Note: Only 13.98 in2 were required for the interior girder.

Location of steel:
Top – 17 #6 with 2” clear
Btm – 16 #6 with 2 5/8” clear.
As = 33(0.44) = 14.52 in2
17(0.44)(2.375) + 16(0.44)(8.5 − 3)
x=
14.52
56.48
x= = 3.9
14.52
d = 58.6 in
Now check Mn:
a=
As f y
=
(14.52 )( 60 ) = 5.63in
0.85f c 'b 0.85 ( 7 )( 26 )
a 5.63
c= = = 8.04
β1 0.7
 5.63 
M r = φM n = ( 0.9 )(14.52 )( 60 )  58.6 − 
 2 
M r = 43740k − in = 3, 645k − ft > M u = 3, 604k − ft
Control of According to LRFD 5.7.3.4 the spacing of the mild steel reinforcement in the layer closest to
Cracking by the tension face shall satisfy equation 5.7.3.4-1.
Distribution
Reinforcement 700γ e
s≤ − 2d c
βs fs
Based on the check made for the interior girders (requiring a spacing of 9 inches), #6@ 4
inches will clearly satisfy this requirement. Note that the service level stress will increase,
but not enough to bring the requirement below 4 inches.

Maximum As before, check the strain in the extreme tensile steel: : [LRFD 5.7.2.1 & 5.5.4.2]
Reinforcement
– Negative  d −c  59.9 − 8.04 
Moment ε t = 0.003  t  = 0.003   = 0.019 > 0.005
 c   8.04 
Section
Minimum S 
Reinforcement M cr = Sc ( f r + f cpe ) − M dnc  c − 1 ≥ Sc f r [LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1]
– Negative  S nc 
Moment Where:
Section
fr = f r = 0.37 f c' = 0.37 4.5 = 0.785 ksi
fcpe = 0.0 ksi

Mdnc= Mg + Ms = 0 kip-ft
Sc= 16340 in3
16340
M cr = (0.785)
12
M cr = 1069k − ft
1.2M cr = 1282k − ft
At bearing, the factored moment required by the Strength I load combination is:
Mu = -3604 kip-ft
Therefore, 1.33M u = 4793 kip-ft
Since 1.2 M cr < 1.33M u , 1.2M cr Controls

M r = 3, 645 > 1.2M cr = 1282 OK
The design of the exterior section meets all requirements for positive and negative bending
under both Service and Strength Limit States.

Shear
Strength I
Length Interior Exterior
V M V M
ft. k k-ft k k-ft
Bearing 0 299.125 113.1 261.0657 117.3438
Trans. 2.04 287.45 644.925 250.7524 630.3376
H/2 2.73 283.375 817.925 247.1722 797.2625
0.10L 9.26 246.375 2303.925 214.6325 2228.485
0.20L 18.97 191.575 3993.775 166.3629 3848.451
0.30L 28.69 138.4 5077.725 119.4571 4878.126
0.40L 38.41 89.575 5615.875 76.42157 5380.371
MidSpan 48.13 -95.9 5610.625 -83.733 5357.442
0.60L 57.84 -147.875 5091.675 -129.581 4841.008
0.70L 67.56 -199.95 4041.75 -175.438 3812.453
0.80L 77.28 -251.375 -329.31 -220.846 -567.967
0.90L 86.99 -301.825 -1464.58 -265.37 -1635.04
H/2 93.52 -334.65 -2795.88 -294.34 -2929.99
Trans. 94.21 -338.2 -2961.82 -297.47 -3092.54
Bearing 96.25 -348.325 -3482.75 -306.435 -3603.56
This compares Strength I shears and moments for the interior and exterior girders. Note that
the exterior girder shears are LESS than the interior girder
shears. Thus, the previous design works for vertical and horizontal shear. The longitudinal
steel requirements are also met.


33-ODOT Prestressed Design FINAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

33-ODOT Prestressed Design FINAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AASHTO LRFD Bridge

RICHARD A. MILLER, PhD, PE, FPCI

 AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition

 This module covers prestressed concrete superstructure

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

 LRFD equations are in KSI units!

f r = 0.24 5ksi = 0.530ksi LRFD

 In most cases, the equations are simply the old Standard

7.5 5000 psi 7.5 1000 5ksi 7.5 5ksi

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§ 5.4 – Material Properties

 Materials must meet AASHTO LRFD Bridge

 There is an effort to extend all provisions to 18 ksi.

 If a provision does not allow higher strength, use a

maximum of 10 ksi in the calculations.

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

 A current problem with the LRFD Specifications is that some

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§ 5.4 – Material Properties

§ 5.4.2.3 – Shrinkage and Creep

 For calculation of creep and shrinkage, the engineer may

 CEB-FIP Model Code

 For prestressed concrete – the loss equations include

§ 5.4.2.3 – Shrinkage and Creep

Creep Coefficient ( Art. 5.4.2.3.2) : H = Relative Humidity

§ 5.4 – Material Properties

§ 5.4.2.3 – Shrinkage and Creep

Shrinkage ( Art. 5.4.2.3.3) : H = Relative Humidity

§ 5.4.2.6 – Modulus of Rupture

 There are now 3 defined Moduli of Rupture for normal

 Note that the value for Article 5.8.3.4.3 (shear) ONLY

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§ 5.4 – Material Properties

§ 5.4.2.4 – Modulus of Elasticity & § 5.4.2.5 – Poisson’s Ratio

testing or as approved by a jurisdiction.

 E is basically the old Standard Specifications equation converted to

 µ is unchanged from Standard Specifications.

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations

 Strength II-V and Extreme Event I and II are checked as warranted.

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§ 3.4 - Loads and Load Factors

§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations

Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations

Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors (cont.)

EXTREME EVENT I γp γEQ 1.00 -- -- 1.00 -- -- -- 1.00 -- -- --

EXTREME EVENT II γp 0.50 1.00 -- -- 1.00 -- -- -- -- 1.00 1.00 1.00

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§ 3.4 - Loads and Load Factors

§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations

Table 3.4.1-1 Load Combinations and Load Factors (cont.)

SERVICE II 1.00 1.30 1.00 -- -- 1.00 1.00/1.20 -- -- -- -- -- --

SERVICE III 1.00 0.80 1.00 -- -- 1.00 1.00/1.20 γTG γSE -- -- -- --

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

§3.4.1: Load Factors and Load Combinations

Service III applies only to LONGITUDINAL TENSION in

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

 AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition

§ 4.6.2.2.2 Distribution Factor Method for Moment and Shear

The simplified distribution factors may be used if:

July 2007 AASHTO-LRFD 2007

AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition

This module covers prestressed concrete superstructure

LRFD equations are in KSI units!

In most cases, the equations are simply the old Standard

Materials must meet AASHTO LRFD Bridge

There is an effort to extend all provisions to 18 ksi.

If a provision does not allow higher strength, use a

A current problem with the LRFD Specifications is that some

For calculation of creep and shrinkage, the engineer may

CEB-FIP Model Code

For prestressed concrete – the loss equations include

There are now 3 defined Moduli of Rupture for normal

Note that the value for Article 5.8.3.4.3 (shear) ONLY

E is basically the old Standard Specifications equation converted to

µ is unchanged from Standard Specifications.

Strength II-V and Extreme Event I and II are checked as warranted.

AASHTO-LRFD Specification, 4th Edition

The simplified distribution factors may be used if:

One lane loaded:

DFM= 0.06+( S/14 )0.4 ( S/L )0.3 (Kg/12.0Lts3)0.1

One lane loaded:

3.5 < S < 16.0 ft.

If Nb = 3; use the lever rule.

LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1

LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1

Minimum Exterior DFM: (Rigid Body Rotation of Bridge Section)

NL - Number of loaded lanes under consideration

Adjacent box girders with shear keys, but no cast-in-

For preliminary design, ( I/J )0.06 = 1.0

Distribution Factor for Moment - LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1

D = (11.5 - NL)+1.4NL(1-0.2C)2 when C < 5